Evil mode and latex support

1 files changed, 9633 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/elpa/auctex-13.1.3/auctex.info b/elpa/auctex-13.1.3/auctex.info
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b9ac9ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/elpa/auctex-13.1.3/auctex.info
@@ -0,0 +1,9633 @@
+This is auctex.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.8 from auctex.texi.
+
+This manual is for AUCTeX (version 13.1.3 from 2022-04-16), a
+sophisticated TeX environment for Emacs.
+
+   Copyright (C) 1992-1995, 2001, 2002, 2004-2022 Free Software
+Foundation, Inc.
+
+     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+     document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+     Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
+     Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts and no
+     Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section
+     entitled "GNU Free Documentation License."
+INFO-DIR-SECTION Emacs
+START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+* AUCTeX: (auctex).     A sophisticated TeX environment for Emacs.
+END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+
+INFO-DIR-SECTION TeX
+START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+* AUCTeX: (auctex).     A sophisticated TeX environment for Emacs.
+END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Copying,  Up: (dir)
+
+AUCTeX
+******
+
+This manual may be copied under the conditions spelled out in *note
+Copying this Manual::.
+
+   AUCTeX is an integrated environment for editing LaTeX, ConTeXt,
+docTeX, Texinfo, and TeX files.
+
+   Although AUCTeX contains a large number of features, there are no
+reasons to despair.  You can continue to write TeX and LaTeX documents
+the way you are used to, and only start using the multiple features in
+small steps.  AUCTeX is not monolithic, each feature described in this
+manual is useful by itself, but together they provide an environment
+where you will make very few LaTeX errors, and makes it easy to find the
+errors that may slip through anyway.
+
+   It is a good idea to make a printout of AUCTeX's reference card
+'tex-ref.tex' or one of its typeset versions.
+
+   If you want to make AUCTeX aware of style files and multifile
+documents right away, insert the following in your init file (usually
+'~/.emacs.d/init.el').
+
+     (setq TeX-auto-save t)
+     (setq TeX-parse-self t)
+     (setq-default TeX-master nil)
+
+   Another thing you should enable is RefTeX, a comprehensive solution
+for managing cross references, bibliographies, indices, document
+navigation and a few other things.  (*Note (reftex)Installation::.)
+
+   For detailed information about the preview-latex subsystem of AUCTeX,
+see *note Introduction: (preview-latex)Top.
+
+   There is a mailing list for general discussion about AUCTeX: write a
+mail with "subscribe" in the subject to <auctex-request@gnu.org> to join
+it.  Send contributions to <auctex@gnu.org>.
+
+   Bug reports should go to <bug-auctex@gnu.org>, suggestions for new
+features, and pleas for help should go to either <auctex-devel@gnu.org>
+(the AUCTeX developers), or to <auctex@gnu.org> if they might have
+general interest.  Please use the command 'M-x TeX-submit-bug-report
+<RET>' to report bugs if possible.  You can subscribe to a low-volume
+announcement list by sending "subscribe" in the subject of a mail to
+<info-auctex-request@gnu.org>.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Copying::                     Copying
+* Introduction::                Introduction to AUCTeX
+* Editing::                     Editing the Document Source
+* Display::                     Controlling Screen Display
+* Processing::                  Starting Processors, Viewers and Other Programs
+* Customization::               Customization and Extension
+* Appendices::                  Copying, Changes, Development, FAQ, Texinfo mode
+* Indices::                     Indices
+
+ -- The Detailed Node Listing --
+
+Introduction
+
+* Summary::                     Overview of AUCTeX
+* Installation::                Installing AUCTeX
+* Quick Start::                 Quick Start
+
+Editing the Document Source
+
+* Quotes::                      Inserting double quotes
+* Font Specifiers::             Inserting Font Specifiers
+* Sectioning::                  Inserting chapters, sections, etc.
+* Environments::                Inserting Environment Templates
+* Mathematics::                 Entering Mathematics
+* Completion::                  Completion of macros
+* Commenting::                  Commenting text
+* Indenting::                   Reflecting syntactic constructs with whitespace
+* Filling::                     Automatic and manual line breaking
+
+Inserting Environment Templates
+
+* Equations::                   Equations
+* Floats::                      Floats
+* Itemize-like::                Itemize-like Environments
+* Tabular-like::                Tabular-like Environments
+* Customizing Environments::    Customizing Environments
+
+Controlling Screen Display
+
+* Font Locking::                Font Locking
+* Folding::                     Folding Macros and Environments
+* Outline::                     Outlining the Document
+* Narrowing::                   Restricting display and editing to a portion of the buffer
+* Prettifying::                 Displaying Greek and math macros as Unicode characters
+
+Font Locking
+
+* Fontification of macros::     Fontification of macros
+* Fontification of quotes::     Fontification of quotes
+* Fontification of math::       Fontification of math constructs
+* Verbatim content::            Verbatim macros and environments
+* Faces::                       Faces used by font-latex
+* Known problems::              Known fontification problems
+
+Starting Processors, Viewers and Other Programs
+
+* Commands::                    Invoking external commands.
+* Viewing::                     Invoking external viewers.
+* Debugging::                   Debugging TeX and LaTeX output.
+* Checking::                    Checking the document.
+* Control::                     Controlling the processes.
+* Cleaning::                    Cleaning intermediate and output files.
+* Documentation::               Documentation about macros and packages.
+
+Viewing the Formatted Output
+
+* Starting Viewers::            Starting viewers
+* I/O Correlation::             Forward and inverse search
+
+Catching the errors
+
+* Ignoring warnings::           Controlling warnings to be reported
+* Error overview::              List of all errors and warnings
+
+Customization and Extension
+
+* Multifile::                   Multifile Documents
+* Parsing Files::               Automatic Parsing of TeX Files
+* Internationalization::        Language Support
+* Automatic::                   Automatic Customization
+* Style Files::                 Writing Your Own Style Support
+
+Language Support
+
+* European::                    Using AUCTeX with European Languages
+* Japanese::                    Using AUCTeX with Japanese
+
+Automatic Customization
+
+* Automatic Global::            Automatic Customization for the Site
+* Automatic Private::           Automatic Customization for a User
+* Automatic Local::             Automatic Customization for a Directory
+
+Writing Your Own Style Support
+
+* Simple Style::                A Simple Style File
+* Adding Macros::               Adding Support for Macros
+* Adding Environments::         Adding Support for Environments
+* Adding Other::                Adding or Examining Other Information
+* Hacking the Parser::          Automatic Extraction of New Things
+
+Copying, Changes, Development, FAQ
+
+* Copying this Manual::
+* Changes::
+* Development::
+* FAQ::
+* Texinfo mode::
+
+Copying this Manual
+
+* GNU Free Documentation License:: License for copying this manual.
+
+Indices
+
+* Key Index::
+* Function Index::
+* Variable Index::
+* Concept Index::
+
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Copying,  Next: Introduction,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
+
+Copying
+*******
+
+AUCTeX primarily consists of Lisp files for Emacs, but there are also
+installation scripts and files and TeX support files.  All of those are
+"free"; this means that everyone is free to use them and free to
+redistribute them on a free basis.  The files of AUCTeX are not in the
+public domain; they are copyrighted and there are restrictions on their
+distribution, but these restrictions are designed to permit everything
+that a good cooperating citizen would want to do.  What is not allowed
+is to try to prevent others from further sharing any version of these
+programs that they might get from you.
+
+   Specifically, we want to make sure that you have the right to give
+away copies of the files that constitute AUCTeX, that you receive source
+code or else can get it if you want it, that you can change these files
+or use pieces of them in new free programs, and that you know you can do
+these things.
+
+   To make sure that everyone has such rights, we have to forbid you to
+deprive anyone else of these rights.  For example, if you distribute
+copies of parts of AUCTeX, you must give the recipients all the rights
+that you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
+the source code.  And you must tell them their rights.
+
+   Also, for our own protection, we must make certain that everyone
+finds out that there is no warranty for AUCTeX.  If any parts are
+modified by someone else and passed on, we want their recipients to know
+that what they have is not what we distributed, so that any problems
+introduced by others will not reflect on our reputation.
+
+   The precise conditions of the licenses for the files currently being
+distributed as part of AUCTeX are found in the General Public Licenses
+that accompany them.  This manual specifically is covered by the GNU
+Free Documentation License (*note Copying this Manual::).
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Introduction,  Next: Editing,  Prev: Copying,  Up: Top
+
+1 Introduction
+**************
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Summary::                     Overview of AUCTeX
+* Installation::                Installing AUCTeX
+* Quick Start::                 Quick Start
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Summary,  Next: Installation,  Up: Introduction
+
+1.1 Overview of AUCTeX
+======================
+
+AUCTeX is a comprehensive customizable integrated environment for
+writing input files for TeX, LaTeX, ConTeXt, Texinfo, and docTeX using
+Emacs.
+
+   It supports you in the insertion of macros, environments, and
+sectioning commands by providing completion alternatives and prompting
+for parameters.  It automatically indents your text as you type it and
+lets you format a whole file at once.  The outlining and folding
+facilities provide you with a focused and clean view of your text.
+
+   AUCTeX lets you process your source files by running TeX and related
+tools (such as output filters, post processors for generating indices
+and bibliographies, and viewers) from inside Emacs.  AUCTeX lets you
+browse through the errors TeX reported, while it moves the cursor
+directly to the reported error, and displays some documentation for that
+particular error.  This will even work when the document is spread over
+several files.
+
+   One component of AUCTeX that LaTeX users will find attractive is
+preview-latex, a combination of folding and in-source previewing that
+provides true "What You See Is What You Get" experience in your
+sourcebuffer, while letting you retain full control.
+
+   More detailed information about the features and usage of AUCTeX can
+be found in the remainder of this manual.
+
+   AUCTeX is written entirely in Emacs Lisp, and hence you can easily
+add new features for your own needs.  It is a GNU project and
+distributed under the 'GNU General Public License Version 3'.
+
+   The most recent version is always available at
+<https://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/auctex/>.
+
+   WWW users may want to check out the AUCTeX page at
+<https://www.gnu.org/software/auctex/>.
+
+   For comprehensive information about how to install AUCTeX *Note
+Installation::, or *note Installation under MS Windows::, respectively.
+
+   If you are considering upgrading AUCTeX, the recent changes are
+described in *note Changes::.
+
+   If you want to discuss AUCTeX with other users or its developers,
+there are several mailing lists you can use.
+
+   Send a mail with the subject "subscribe" to <auctex-request@gnu.org>
+in order to join the general discussion list for AUCTeX.  Articles
+should be sent to <auctex@gnu.org>.  In a similar way, you can subscribe
+to the <info-auctex@gnu.org> list for just getting important
+announcements about AUCTeX.  The list <bug-auctex@gnu.org> is for bug
+reports which you should usually file with the 'M-x
+TeX-submit-bug-report <RET>' command.  If you want to address the
+developers of AUCTeX themselves with technical issues, they can be found
+on the discussion list <auctex-devel@gnu.org>.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Installation,  Next: Quick Start,  Prev: Summary,  Up: Introduction
+
+1.2 Installing AUCTeX
+=====================
+
+The modern and strongly recommended way of installing AUCTeX is by using
+the Emacs package manager integrated in Emacs 24 and greater (ELPA).
+Simply do 'M-x list-packages <RET>', mark the auctex package for
+installation with 'i', and hit 'x' to execute the installation
+procedure.  That's all.
+
+   'use-package' users can use this simple recipe in their
+'user-init-file' which essentially does the same as the manual
+installation explained above.
+
+     (use-package tex
+       :ensure auctex)
+
+   Using the ELPA version has several advantages.  Besides being
+platform and OS independent, you will receive intermediate bugfix
+releases between major AUCTeX releases conveniently.  For past ELPA
+releases, see <https://elpa.gnu.org/packages/auctex.html>.  Once the
+installation is completed, you can skip the rest of this section and
+proceed to *note Quick Start::.
+
+   The remainder of this section is about installing AUCTeX from a
+release tarball or from a checkout of the AUCTeX repository.
+
+   Installing AUCTeX should be simple: merely './configure', 'make', and
+'make install' for a standard site-wide installation (most other
+installations can be done by specifying a '--prefix=...' option).
+
+   On many systems, this will already activate the package, making its
+modes the default instead of the built-in modes of Emacs.  If this is
+not the case, consult *note Loading the package::.  Please read through
+this document fully before installing anything.  The installation
+procedure has changed as compared to earlier versions.  Users of
+MS Windows are asked to consult *Note Installation under MS Windows::.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Prerequisites::
+* Configure::
+* Build/install and uninstall::
+* Loading the package::
+* Advice for package providers::
+* Advice for non-privileged users::
+* Installation under MS Windows::
+* Customizing::
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Prerequisites,  Next: Configure,  Up: Installation
+
+1.2.1 Prerequisites
+-------------------
+
+   * GNU Emacs 25.1 or higher
+
+     Using preview-latex requires a version of Emacs compiled with image
+     support.
+
+     Windows
+          Precompiled versions are available from
+          <https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/emacs/windows/>.
+     macOS
+          For an overview of precompiled versions of Emacs for macOS see
+          for example <https://www.emacswiki.org/emacs/EmacsForMacOS>.
+     GNU/Linux
+          Most GNU/Linux distributions nowadays provide a recent variant
+          of Emacs via their package repositories.
+     Self-compiled
+          Compiling Emacs yourself requires a C compiler and a number of
+          tools and development libraries.  Details are beyond the scope
+          of this manual.  Instructions for checking out the source code
+          can be found at <https://savannah.gnu.org/git/?group=emacs>.
+
+   * A working TeX installation
+
+     Well, AUCTeX would be pointless without that.  Processing
+     documentation requires TeX, LaTeX and Texinfo during installation.
+     preview-latex requires Dvips or 'dvipng' for its operation in DVI
+     mode.  The default configuration of AUCTeX is tailored for
+     TeX Live-based distributions, but can be adapted easily.
+
+   * A recent Ghostscript
+
+     This is needed for operation of preview-latex in both DVI and PDF
+     mode.  Ghostscript version 7.07 or newer is required.
+
+   * GNU make
+
+     Recent AUCTeX uses GNU make specific capabilities in the Makefiles.
+     If your OS's default 'make' command is not GNU make, you have to
+     obtain it in order to build AUCTeX by yourself.  GNU make is
+     sometimes provided under the name 'gmake' in your OS's binary
+     package system.
+
+   * The Texinfo package
+
+     Strictly speaking, you can get away without it if you are building
+     from the distribution tarball, have not modified any files and
+     don't need a printed version of the manual: the pregenerated info
+     file is included in the tarball.  At least version 4.0 is required.
+
+   For some known issues with various software, see *note
+(preview-latex)Known problems::.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Configure,  Next: Build/install and uninstall,  Prev: Prerequisites,  Up: Installation
+
+1.2.2 Configure
+---------------
+
+The first step is to configure the source code, telling it where various
+files will be.  To do so, run
+
+     ./configure OPTIONS
+
+   (Note: if you have fetched AUCTeX from Git rather than a regular
+release, you will have to first follow the instructions in
+'README.GIT').
+
+   On many machines, you will not need to specify any options, but if
+'configure' cannot determine something on its own, you'll need to help
+it out with one of these options:
+
+'--prefix=PREFIX'
+     All automatic placements for package components will be chosen from
+     sensible existing hierarchies below this: directories like 'man',
+     'share' and 'bin' are supposed to be directly below PREFIX.
+
+     Only if no workable placement can be found there, in some cases an
+     alternative search will be made in a prefix deduced from a suitable
+     binary.
+
+     '/usr/local' is the default PREFIX, intended to be suitable for a
+     site-wide installation.  If you are packaging this as an operating
+     system component for distribution, the setting '/usr' will probably
+     be the right choice.  See *note Advice for package providers:: for
+     detail.
+
+     If you are planning to install the package as a single
+     non-priviledged user, you will typically set PREFIX to your home
+     directory.  Consult *note Advice for non-privileged users:: for
+     addtional instructions.
+
+'--with-emacs=/PATH/TO/EMACS'
+     If you are using a pretest which isn't in your 'PATH', or
+     'configure' is not finding the right Emacs executable, you can
+     specify it with this option.
+
+'--with-lispdir=LISPDIR'
+     This option specifies the location of the 'site-lisp' directory
+     within 'load-path' under which the files will get installed (the
+     bulk will get installed in a subdirectory).  './configure' should
+     figure this out by itself.
+
+'--with-auctexstartfile=auctex.el'
+'--with-previewstartfile=preview-latex.el'
+     This is the name of the respective startup files.  If LISPDIR
+     contains a subdirectory 'site-start.d', the start files are placed
+     there, and 'site-start.el' should load them automatically.  Please
+     be aware that you must not move the start files after installation
+     since other files are found _relative_ to them.
+
+'--with-packagelispdir=auctex'
+     This is the directory where the bulk of the package gets located.
+     The startfile adds this into 'load-path'.
+
+'--with-auto-dir=/DIR'
+     You can use this option to specify the directory containing
+     automatically generated information by 'M-x
+     TeX-auto-generate-global <RET>'.  It is not necessary for most TeX
+     installs, but may be used if you don't like the directory that
+     configure is suggesting.
+
+'--help'
+     This is not an option specific to AUCTeX.  A number of standard
+     options to 'configure' exist, and we do not have the room to
+     describe them here; a short description of each is available, using
+     '--help'.
+
+'--disable-preview'
+     This disables configuration and installation of preview-latex.
+     This option is not actually recommended.  If your Emacs does not
+     support images, you should really upgrade to a newer version.
+     Distributors should, if possible, refrain from distributing AUCTeX
+     and preview-latex separately in order to avoid confusion and
+     upgrade hassles if users install partial packages on their own.
+
+'--with-texmf-dir=/DIR'
+'--without-texmf-dir'
+     This option is used for specifying a TDS-compliant directory
+     hierarchy.  Using '--with-texmf-dir=/DIR' you can specify where the
+     TeX TDS directory hierarchy resides, and the TeX files will get
+     installed in '/DIR/tex/latex/preview/'.
+
+     If you use the '--without-texmf-dir' option, the TeX-related files
+     will be kept in the Emacs Lisp tree, and at runtime the 'TEXINPUTS'
+     environment variable will be made to point there.  You can install
+     those files into your own TeX tree at some later time with 'M-x
+     preview-install-styles <RET>'.
+
+'--with-tex-dir=/DIR'
+     If you want to specify an exact directory for the preview TeX
+     files, use '--with-tex-dir=/DIR'.  In this case, the files will be
+     placed in '/DIR', and you'll also need the following option:
+
+'--with-doc-dir=/DIR'
+     This option may be used to specify where the TeX documentation
+     goes.  It is to be used when you are using '--with-tex-dir=/DIR',
+     but is normally not necessary otherwise.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Build/install and uninstall,  Next: Loading the package,  Prev: Configure,  Up: Installation
+
+1.2.3 Build/install and uninstall
+---------------------------------
+
+Once 'configure' has been run, simply enter
+
+     make
+
+at the prompt to byte-compile the lisp files, extract the TeX files and
+build the documentation files.  To install the files into the locations
+chosen earlier, type
+
+     make install
+
+You may need special privileges to install, e.g., if you are installing
+into system directories.
+
+   Should you want to completely remove the installed package, in the
+same directory you built AUCTeX run
+
+     make uninstall
+
+You will need administration privileges if you installed the package
+into system directories.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Loading the package,  Next: Advice for package providers,  Prev: Build/install and uninstall,  Up: Installation
+
+1.2.4 Loading the package
+-------------------------
+
+You can detect the successful activation of AUCTeX and preview-latex in
+the menus after loading a LaTeX file like 'circ.tex': AUCTeX then gives
+you a 'Command' menu, and preview-latex gives you a 'Preview' menu.
+
+   With Emacs (or if you explicitly disabled use of the package system),
+the startup files 'auctex.el' and 'preview-latex.el' may already be in a
+directory of the 'site-start.d/' variety if your Emacs installation
+provides it.  In that case they should be automatically loaded on
+startup and nothing else needs to be done.  If not, they should at least
+have been placed somewhere in your 'load-path'.  You can then load them
+by placing the lines
+
+     (load "auctex.el" nil t t)
+     (load "preview-latex.el" nil t t)
+into your init file such as 'init.el' or '.emacs'.
+
+   If you explicitly used '--with-lispdir', you may need to add the
+specified directory into Emacs' 'load-path' variable by adding something
+like
+
+     (add-to-list 'load-path "~/elisp")
+before the above lines into your Emacs startup file.
+
+   For site-wide activation in GNU Emacs, see *Note Advice for package
+providers::.
+
+   Once activated, the modes provided by AUCTeX are used per default for
+all supported file types.  If you want to change the modes for which it
+is operative instead of the default, use
+     M-x customize-option <RET> TeX-modes <RET>
+
+   If you want to remove a preinstalled AUCTeX completely before any of
+its modes have been used,
+     (unload-feature 'tex-site)
+should accomplish that.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Advice for package providers,  Next: Advice for non-privileged users,  Prev: Loading the package,  Up: Installation
+
+1.2.5 Providing AUCTeX as a package
+-----------------------------------
+
+As a package provider, you should make sure that your users will be
+served best according to their intentions, and keep in mind that a
+system might be used by more than one user, with different preferences.
+
+   There are people that prefer the built-in Emacs modes for editing TeX
+files, in particular plain TeX users.  There are various ways to tell
+AUCTeX even after auto-activation that it should not get used, and they
+are described in *note Introduction to AUCTeX: Introduction.
+
+   So if you have users that don't want to use the preinstalled AUCTeX,
+they can easily get rid of it.  Activating AUCTeX by default is
+therefore a good choice.
+
+   If the installation procedure did not achieve this already by placing
+'auctex.el' and 'preview-latex.el' into a possibly existing
+'site-start.d' directory, you can do this by placing
+
+     (load "auctex.el" nil t t)
+     (load "preview-latex.el" nil t t)
+
+in the system-wide 'site-start.el'.
+
+   The '--without-texmf-dir' option can be convenient for systems that
+are intended to support more than a single TeX distribution.  Since more
+often than not TeX packages for operating system distributions are
+either much more outdated or much less complete than separately provided
+systems like TeX Live, this method may be generally preferable when
+providing packages.
+
+   The following package structure would be adequate for a typical fully
+supported Unix-like installation:
+
+'preview-tetex'
+     Style files and documentation for 'preview.sty', placed into a TeX
+     tree where it is accessible from the teTeX executables usually
+     delivered with a system.  If there are other commonly used TeX
+     system packages, it might be appropriate to provide separate
+     packages for those.
+'auctex-emacs-tetex'
+     This package will require the installation of 'preview-tetex' and
+     will record in 'TeX-macro-global' where to find the TeX tree.  It
+     is also a good idea to run
+          emacs -batch -f TeX-auto-generate-global
+     when either AUCTeX or teTeX get installed or upgraded.  If your
+     users might want to work with a different TeX distribution
+     (nowadays pretty common), instead consider the following:
+'auctex-emacs'
+     This package will be compiled with '--without-texmf-dir' and will
+     consequently contain the 'preview' style files in its private
+     directory.  It will probably not be possible to initialize
+     'TeX-macro-global' to a sensible value, so running
+     'TeX-auto-generate-global' does not appear useful.  This package
+     would neither conflict with nor provide 'preview-tetex'.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Advice for non-privileged users,  Next: Installation under MS Windows,  Prev: Advice for package providers,  Up: Installation
+
+1.2.6 Installation for non-privileged users
+-------------------------------------------
+
+Often people without system administration privileges want to install
+software for their private use.  In that case you need to pass more
+options to the 'configure' script.
+
+   The main expedient is using the '--prefix' option to the 'configure'
+script, and let it point to the personal home directory.  In that way,
+resulting binaries will be installed under the 'bin' subdirectory of
+your home directory, manual pages under 'man' and so on.  It is
+reasonably easy to maintain a bunch of personal software, since the
+prefix argument is supported by most 'configure' scripts.
+
+   You often need to specify '--with-lispdir' option as well.  If you
+haven't installed Emacs under your home directory and use Emacs
+installed in system directories, the 'configure' script might not be
+able to figure out suitable place to install lisp files under your home
+directory.  In that case, the 'configure' script would silently choose,
+by default, the 'site-lisp' directory within 'load-path' for the place,
+where administration privileges are usually required to put relevant
+files.  Thus you will have to tell the 'configure' script explicitly
+where to put those files by, e.g.,
+'--with-lispdir='/home/myself/share/emacs/site-lisp''.
+
+   You'll have to add something like
+'/home/myself/share/emacs/site-lisp' to your 'load-path' variable, if it
+isn't there already.
+
+   In addition, you will have to tell 'configure' script where to
+install TeX-related files such as 'preview.sty' if preview-latex isn't
+disabled.  It is enough to specify '--with-texmf-dir=$HOME/texmf' for
+most typical cases, but you have to create the direcotry '$HOME/texmf'
+in advance if it doesn't exist.  If this prescription doesn't work,
+consider using one or more of the options '--with-texmf-dir=/DIR',
+'--without-texmf-dir', '--with-tex-dir=/DIR' and '--with-doc-dir=/DIR'.
+See *note Configure:: for detail of these options.
+
+   Now here is another thing to ponder: perhaps you want to make it easy
+for other users to share parts of your personal Emacs configuration.  In
+general, you can do this by writing '~myself/' anywhere where you
+specify paths to something installed in your personal subdirectories,
+not merely '~/', since the latter, when used by other users, will point
+to non-existent files.
+
+   For yourself, it will do to manipulate environment variables in your
+'.profile' resp. '.login' files.  But if people will be copying just
+Elisp files, their copies will not work.  While it would in general be
+preferable if the added components where available from a shell level,
+too (like when you call the standalone info reader, or try using
+'preview.sty' for functionality besides of Emacs previews), it will be a
+big help already if things work from inside of Emacs.
+
+   Here is how to do the various parts:
+
+Making the Elisp available
+..........................
+
+In GNU Emacs, it should be sufficient if people just do
+
+     (load "~myself/share/emacs/site-lisp/auctex.el" nil t t)
+     (load "~myself/share/emacs/site-lisp/preview-latex.el" nil t t)
+where the path points to your personal installation.  The rest of the
+package should be found relative from there without further ado.
+
+Making the Info files available
+...............................
+
+For making the info files accessible from within Elisp, something like
+the following might be convenient to add into your or other people's
+startup files:
+
+     (eval-after-load 'info
+        '(add-to-list 'Info-directory-list "~myself/info"))
+
+Making the LaTeX style available
+................................
+
+If you want others to be able to share your installation, you should
+configure it using '--without-texmf-dir', in which case things should
+work as well for them as for you.
+
+1.2.6.1 Using AUCTeX from local Git repo
+........................................
+
+With the techniques described above, it is also possible to use AUCTeX
+directly from a local Git repository.  Let's assume you have your Git
+repositories under '~/development/'.
+
+   First, you have to fetch a copy of the AUCTeX Git repository.  In a
+shell, change directory to '~/development/' and do:
+     git clone https://git.savannah.gnu.org/git/auctex.git
+
+   Now change directory to '~/development/auctex' and run
+'./autogen.sh'.  Next thing is to run 'configure' like this:
+     ./configure --without-texmf-dir --with-lispdir=.
+
+When finished, simply enter
+     make
+and you're finished.  Note that the 'make install' step is not
+necessary.
+
+   Now you have to tell Emacs about the plan.  The following variables
+must be set in your init file because their normal values are only
+correct when AUCTeX is installed:
+     (setq TeX-data-directory "~/development/auctex"
+           TeX-lisp-directory TeX-data-directory)
+
+The info files will be available with this:
+     (eval-after-load 'info
+        '(add-to-list 'Info-additional-directory-list
+                      "~/development/auctex/doc"))
+
+Now you're ready to load 'auctex.el' and 'preview-latex.el' out of this
+directory:
+     (load "~/development/auctex/auctex.el" nil t t)
+     (load "~/development/auctex/preview-latex.el" nil t t)
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Installation under MS Windows,  Next: Customizing,  Prev: Advice for non-privileged users,  Up: Installation
+
+1.2.7 Installation under MS Windows
+-----------------------------------
+
+In a Nutshell
+.............
+
+The following are brief installation instructions for the impatient.  In
+case you don't understand some of this, run into trouble of some sort,
+or need more elaborate information, refer to the detailed instructions
+further below.
+
+  1. Install the prerequisites, i.e. GNU Emacs, MSYS or Cygwin, a TeX
+     system, and Ghostscript.
+
+  2. Open the MSYS shell or a Cygwin shell and change to the directory
+     containing the unzipped file contents.
+
+  3. Configure AUCTeX:
+
+     For Emacs: Many people like to install AUCTeX into the pseudo file
+     system hierarchy set up by the Emacs installation.  Assuming Emacs
+     is installed in 'C:/Program Files/Emacs' and the directory for
+     local additions of your TeX system, e.g. MiKTeX, is
+     'C:/localtexmf', you can do this by typing the following statement
+     at the shell prompt:
+
+          ./configure --prefix='C:/Program Files/Emacs' \
+            --infodir='C:/Program Files/Emacs/info' \
+            --with-texmf-dir='C:/localtexmf'
+
+     The commands above is example for common usage.  More on
+     configuration options can be found in the detailed installation
+     instructions below.
+
+     If the configuration script failed to find all required programs,
+     make sure that these programs are in your system path and add
+     directories containing the programs to the 'PATH' environment
+     variable if necessary.  Here is how to do that in W2000/XP:
+
+       1. On the desktop, right click "My Computer" and select
+          properties.
+       2. Click on "Advanced" in the "System Properties" window.
+       3. Select "Environment Variables".
+       4. Select "path" in "System Variables" and click "edit".  Move to
+          the front in the line (this might require scrolling) and add
+          the missing path including drive letter, ended with a
+          semicolon.
+
+  4. If there were no further error messages, type
+
+          make
+
+     In case there were, please refer to the detailed description below.
+
+  5. Finish the installation by typing
+
+          make install
+
+Detailed Installation Instructions
+..................................
+
+Installation of AUCTeX under Windows is in itself not more complicated
+than on other platforms.  However, meeting the prerequisites might
+require more work than on some other platforms, and feel less natural.
+
+   If you are experiencing any problems, even if you think they are of
+your own making, be sure to report them to <auctex-devel@gnu.org> so
+that we can explain things better in future.
+
+   Windows is a problematic platform for installation scripts.  The main
+problem is that the installation procedure requires consistent file
+names in order to find its way in the directory hierarchy, and Windows
+path names are a mess.
+
+   The installation procedure tries finding stuff in system search paths
+and in Emacs paths.  For that to succeed, you have to use the same
+syntax and spelling and case of paths everywhere: in your system search
+paths, in Emacs' 'load-path' variable, as argument to the scripts.  If
+your path names contain spaces or other 'shell-unfriendly' characters,
+most notably backslashes for directory separators, place the whole path
+in '"double quote marks"' whenever you specify it on a command line.
+
+   Avoid 'helpful' magic file names like '/cygdrive/c' and
+'C:\PROGRA~1\' like the plague.  It is quite unlikely that the scripts
+will be able to identify the actual file names involved.  Use the full
+paths, making use of normal Windows drive letters like ' 'C:/Program
+Files/Emacs' ' where required, and using the same combination of upper-
+and lowercase letters as in the actual files.  File names containing
+shell-special characters like spaces or backslashes (if you prefer that
+syntax) need to get properly quoted to the shell: the above example used
+single quotes for that.
+
+   Ok, now here are the steps to perform:
+
+  1. You need to unpack the AUCTeX distribution (which you seemingly
+     have done since you are reading this).  It must be unpacked in a
+     separate installation directory outside of your Emacs file
+     hierarchy: the installation will later copy all necessary files to
+     their final destination, and you can ultimately remove the
+     directory where you unpacked the files.
+
+     Line endings are a problem under Windows.  The distribution
+     contains only text files, and theoretically most of the involved
+     tools should get along with that.  However, the files are processed
+     by various utilities, and it is conceivable that not all of them
+     will use the same line ending conventions.  If you encounter
+     problems, it might help if you try unpacking (or checking out) the
+     files in binary mode, if your tools allow that.
+
+     If you don't have a suitable unpacking tool, skip to the next step:
+     this should provide you with a working 'unzip' command.
+
+  2. The installation of AUCTeX will require the MSYS tool set from
+     <http://www.mingw.org/> or the Cygwin tool set from
+     <https://cygwin.com/>.  The latter is slower and larger (the
+     download size of the base system is about 15 MB) but comes with a
+     package manager that allows for updating the tool set and
+     installing additional packages like, for example, the spell checker
+     aspell.
+
+     If Cygwin specific paths like '/cygdrive/c' crop up in the course
+     of the installation, using a non-Cygwin Emacs could conceivably
+     cause trouble.  Using Cygwin either for everything or nothing might
+     save headaches, _if_ things don't work out.
+
+  3. Install a current version of Emacs from
+     <https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/emacs/windows/>.
+
+  4. You need a working TeX installation.  One popular installation
+     under Windows is MiKTeX (https://miktex.org/).  Another much more
+     extensive system is TeX Live (https://www.tug.org/texlive/) which
+     is rather close to its Unix cousins.
+
+  5. A working copy of Ghostscript (https://www.ghostscript.com/) is
+     required for preview-latex operation.  Examining the output from
+          gswin32c -h
+     on a Windows command line should tell you whether your Ghostscript
+     supports the 'png16m' device needed for PNG support.  MiKTeX
+     apparently comes with its own Ghostscript called 'mgs.exe'.
+
+  6. Perl (https://www.perl.org/) is needed for rebuilding the
+     documentation if you are working with a copy from Git or have
+     touched documentation source files in the preview-latex part.  If
+     the line endings of the file 'preview/latex/preview.dtx' don't
+     correspond with what Perl calls '\n' when reading text files,
+     you'll run into trouble.
+
+  7. Now the fun stuff starts.  If you have not yet done so, unpack the
+     AUCTeX distribution into a separate directory after rereading the
+     instructions for unpacking above.
+
+  8. Ready for takeoff.  Start some shell (typically 'bash') capable of
+     running 'configure', change into the installation directory and
+     call './configure' with appropriate options.
+
+     Typical options you'll want to specify will be
+     '--prefix=DRIVE:/PATH/TO/EMACS-HIERARCHY'
+          which tells 'configure' where to perform the installation.  It
+          may also make 'configure' find Emacs automatically; if this
+          doesn't happen, try '--with-emacs' as described below.  All
+          automatic detection of files and directories restricts itself
+          to directories below the PREFIX or in the same hierarchy as
+          the program accessing the files.  Usually, directories like
+          'man', 'share' and 'bin' will be situated right under PREFIX.
+
+          This option also affects the defaults for placing the Texinfo
+          documentation files (see also '--infodir' below) and
+          automatically generated style hooks.
+
+          If you have a central directory hierarchy (not untypical with
+          Cygwin) for such stuff, you might want to specify its root
+          here.  You stand a good chance that this will be the only
+          option you need to supply, as long as your TeX-related
+          executables are in your system path, which they better be for
+          AUCTeX's operation, anyway.
+
+     '--with-emacs'
+          if you are installing for a version of Emacs.  You can use
+          '--with-emacs=DRIVE:/PATH/TO/EMACS' to specify the name of the
+          installed Emacs executable, complete with its path if
+          necessary (if Emacs is not within a directory specified in
+          your 'PATH' environment setting).
+
+     '--with-lispdir=DRIVE:/PATH/TO/SITE-LISP'
+          This option tells a place in 'load-path' below which the files
+          are situated.  The startup files 'auctex.el' and
+          'preview-latex.el' will get installed here unless a
+          subdirectory 'site-start.d' exists which will then be used
+          instead.  The other files from AUCTeX will be installed in a
+          subdirectory called 'auctex'.
+
+          If you think that you need a different setup, please refer to
+          the full installation instructions in *note Configure::.
+
+     '--infodir=DRIVE:/PATH/TO/INFO/DIRECTORY'
+          If you are installing into an Emacs directory, info files have
+          to be put into the 'info' folder below that directory.  The
+          configuration script will usually try to install into the
+          folder 'share/info', so you have to override this by
+          specifying something like '--infodir='C:/Program Files/info''
+          for the configure call.
+
+     '--with-auto-dir=DRIVE:/DIR'
+          Directory containing automatically generated information.  You
+          should not normally need to set this, as '--prefix' should
+          take care of this.
+
+     '--disable-preview'
+          Use this option if your Emacs version is unable to support
+          image display.
+
+     '--with-texmf-dir=DRIVE:/DIR'
+          This will specify the directory where your TeX installation
+          sits.  If your TeX installation does not conform to the TDS
+          (TeX directory standard), you may need to specify more options
+          to get everything in place.
+
+     For more information about any of the above and additional options,
+     see *note Configure::.
+
+     Some executables might not be found in your path.  That is not a
+     good idea, but you can get around by specifying environment
+     variables to 'configure':
+          GS="DRIVE:/PATH/TO/GSWIN32C.EXE" ./configure ...
+     should work for this purpose.  'gswin32c.exe' is the usual name for
+     the required _command line_ executable under Windows; in contrast,
+     'gswin32.exe' is likely to fail.
+
+     As an alternative to specifying variables for the 'configure' call
+     you can add directories containing the required executables to the
+     'PATH' variable of your Windows system.  This is especially a good
+     idea if Emacs has trouble finding the respective programs later
+     during normal operation.
+
+  9. Run 'make' in the installation directory.
+
+  10. Run 'make install' in the installation directory.
+
+  11. With Emacs, activation of AUCTeX and preview-latex depends on a
+     working 'site-start.d' directory or similar setup, since then the
+     startup files 'auctex.el' and 'preview-latex.el' will have been
+     placed there.  If this has not been done, you should be able to
+     load the startup files manually with
+          (load "auctex.el" nil t t)
+          (load "preview-latex.el" nil t t)
+     in either a site-wide 'site-start.el' or your personal startup file
+     (usually accessible as '~/.emacs' or '~/.emacs.d/init.el' from
+     within Emacs).
+
+     The default configuration of AUCTeX is probably not the best fit
+     for Windows systems with MiKTeX.  You might want to add
+          (require 'tex-mik)
+     after loading 'auctex.el' and 'preview-latex.el' in order to get
+     more appropriate values for some customization options.
+
+     You can always use
+
+          M-x customize-group <RET> AUCTeX <RET>
+
+     in order to customize more stuff, or use the 'Customize' menu.
+
+  12. Load 'circ.tex' into Emacs and see if you get the 'Command' menu.
+     Try using it to LaTeX the file.
+
+  13. Check whether the 'Preview' menu is available in this file.  Use
+     it to generate previews for the document.
+
+     If this barfs and tells you that image type 'png' is not supported,
+     you can either add PNG support to your Emacs installation or choose
+     another image format to be used by preview-latex.
+
+     Adding support for an image format usually involves the
+     installation of a library, e.g. from <http://gnuwin32.sf.net/>.  If
+     you got your Emacs from <https://www.gnu.org/> you might want to
+     check its README file
+     (https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/emacs/windows/README) for details.
+
+     A different image format can be chosen by setting the variable
+     'preview-image-type'.  While it is recommended to keep the 'dvipng'
+     or 'png' setting, you can temporarily select a different format
+     like 'pnm' to check if the lack of PNG support is the only problem
+     with your Emacs installation.
+
+     Try adding the line
+
+          (setq preview-image-type 'pnm)
+
+     to your init file for a quick test.  You should remove the line
+     after the test again, because PNM files take away *vast* amounts of
+     disk space, and thus also of load/save time.
+
+   Well, that about is all.  Have fun!
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Customizing,  Prev: Installation under MS Windows,  Up: Installation
+
+1.2.8 Customizing
+-----------------
+
+Most of the site-specific customization should already have happened
+during configuration of AUCTeX.  Any further customization can be done
+with customization buffers directly in Emacs.  Just type 'M-x
+customize-group <RET> AUCTeX <RET>' to open the customization group for
+AUCTeX or use the menu entries provided in the mode menus.  Editing the
+file 'tex-site.el' as suggested in former versions of AUCTeX should not
+be done anymore because the installation routine will overwrite those
+changes.
+
+   You might check some options with a special significance.  They are
+accessible directly by typing 'M-x customize-option <RET> <option>
+<RET>'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-macro-global
+     Directories containing the site's TeX style files.
+
+   Normally, AUCTeX will only allow you to complete macros and
+environments which are built-in, specified in AUCTeX style files or
+defined by yourself.  If you issue the 'M-x TeX-auto-generate-global'
+command after loading AUCTeX, you will be able to complete on all macros
+available in the standard style files used by your document.  To do
+this, you must set this variable to a list of directories where the
+standard style files are located.  The directories will be searched
+recursively, so there is no reason to list subdirectories explicitly.
+Automatic configuration will already have set the variable for you if it
+could use the program 'kpsewhich'.  In this case you normally don't have
+to alter anything.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Quick Start,  Prev: Installation,  Up: Introduction
+
+1.3 Quick Start
+===============
+
+AUCTeX is a powerful program offering many features and configuration
+options.  If you are new to AUCTeX this might be deterrent.  Fortunately
+you do not have to learn everything at once.  This Quick Start Guide
+will give you the knowledge of the most important commands and enable
+you to prepare your first LaTeX document with AUCTeX after only a few
+minutes of reading.
+
+   In this introduction, we assume that AUCTeX is already installed on
+your system.  If this is not the case, you should read the file
+'INSTALL' in the base directory of the unpacked distribution tarball.
+These installation instructions are available in this manual as well,
+*note Installation::.  We also assume that you are familiar with the way
+keystrokes are written in Emacs manuals.  If not, have a look at the
+Emacs Tutorial in the Help menu.
+
+   If AUCTeX is installed in any other way than from the Emacs package
+manager (ELPA), you might still need to activate it, by inserting
+
+     (load "auctex.el" nil t t)
+in your user init file.(1)
+
+   If AUCTeX is installed from ELPA, the installation procedure already
+cares about loading AUCTeX correctly and you *must not* have the line
+above in your init file.  Note that this also applies if you have the
+following line in your init file
+
+     (package-initialize)
+
+   In order to get support for many of the LaTeX packages you will use
+in your documents, you should enable document parsing as well, which can
+be achieved by putting
+
+     (setq TeX-auto-save t)
+     (setq TeX-parse-self t)
+into your init file.  Finally, if you often use '\include' or '\input',
+you should make AUCTeX aware of the multifile document structure.  You
+can do this by inserting
+
+     (setq-default TeX-master nil)
+
+   into your init file.  Each time you open a new file, AUCTeX will then
+ask you for a master file.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Editing Facilities::          Functions for editing TeX files
+* Processing Facilities::       Creating and viewing output, debugging
+
+   ---------- Footnotes ----------
+
+   (1) This usually is a file in your home directory called '.emacs', or
+'.emacs.d/init.el'.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Editing Facilities,  Next: Processing Facilities,  Up: Quick Start
+
+1.3.1 Functions for editing TeX files
+-------------------------------------
+
+1.3.1.1 Making your TeX code more readable
+..........................................
+
+AUCTeX can do syntax highlighting of your source code, that means
+commands will get special colors or fonts.  This is enabled by default.
+You can disable it locally by typing 'M-x font-lock-mode <RET>'.
+
+   AUCTeX will indent new lines to indicate their syntactical
+relationship to the surrounding text.  For example, the text of a
+'\footnote' or text inside of an environment will be indented relative
+to the text around it.  If the indenting has gotten wrong after adding
+or deleting some characters, use <TAB> to reindent the line, 'M-q' for
+the whole paragraph, or 'M-x LaTeX-fill-buffer <RET>' for the whole
+buffer.
+
+1.3.1.2 Entering sectioning commands
+....................................
+
+Insertion of sectioning macros, that is '\chapter', '\section',
+'\subsection', etc. and accompanying '\label' commands may be eased by
+using 'C-c C-s'.  You will be asked for the section level.  As nearly
+everywhere in AUCTeX, you can use the <TAB> or <SPC> key to get a list
+of available level names, and to auto-complete what you started typing.
+Next, you will be asked for the printed title of the section, and last
+you will be asked for a label to be associated with the section.
+
+1.3.1.3 Inserting environments
+..............................
+
+Similarly, you can insert environments, that is '\begin{}'-'\end{}'
+pairs: Type 'C-c C-e', and select an environment type.  Again, you can
+use <TAB> or <SPC> to get a list, and to complete what you type.
+Actually, the list will not only provide standard LaTeX environments,
+but also take your '\documentclass' and '\usepackage' commands into
+account if you have parsing enabled by setting 'TeX-parse-self' to 't'.
+If you use a couple of environments frequently, you can use the <up> and
+<down> arrow keys (or 'M-p' and 'M-n') in the minibuffer to get back to
+the previously inserted commands.
+
+   Some environments need additional arguments.  Often, AUCTeX knows
+about this and asks you to enter a value.
+
+1.3.1.4 Inserting macros
+........................
+
+'C-c C-m', or simply 'C-c RET' will give you a prompt that asks you for
+a LaTeX macro.  You can use <TAB> for completion, or the <up>/<down>
+arrow keys (or 'M-p' and 'M-n') to browse the command history.  In many
+cases, AUCTeX knows which arguments a macro needs and will ask you for
+that.  It even can differentiate between mandatory and optional
+arguments--for details, see *note Completion::.
+
+   An additional help for inserting macros is provided by the
+possibility to complete macros right in the buffer.  With point at the
+end of a partially written macro, you can complete it by typing
+'M-<TAB>'.
+
+1.3.1.5 Changing the font
+.........................
+
+AUCTeX provides convenient keyboard shortcuts for inserting macros which
+specify the font to be used for typesetting certain parts of the text.
+They start with 'C-c C-f', and the last 'C-' combination tells AUCTeX
+which font you want:
+
+'C-c C-f C-b'
+     Insert bold face '\textbf{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-i'
+     Insert italics '\textit{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-e'
+     Insert _emphasized_ '\emph{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-s'
+     Insert slanted '\textsl{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-r'
+     Insert roman '\textrm{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-f'
+     Insert sans serif '\textsf{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-t'
+     Insert typewriter '\texttt{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-c'
+     Insert SMALL CAPS '\textsc{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-d'
+     Delete the innermost font specification containing point.
+
+   If you want to change font attributes of existing text, mark it as an
+active region, and then invoke the commands.  If no region is selected,
+the command will be inserted with empty braces, and you can start typing
+the changed text.
+
+   Most of those commands will also work in math mode, but then macros
+like '\mathbf' will be inserted.
+
+1.3.1.6 Other useful features
+.............................
+
+AUCTeX also tries to help you when inserting the right "quote" signs for
+your language, dollar signs to typeset math, or pairs of braces.  It
+offers shortcuts for commenting out text ('C-c ;' for the current region
+or 'C-c %' for the paragraph you are in).  The same keystrokes will
+remove the % signs, if the region or paragraph is commented out yet.
+With 'TeX-fold-mode', you can hide certain parts (like footnotes,
+references etc.) that you do not edit currently.  Support for Emacs'
+outline mode is provided as well.  And there's more, but this is beyond
+the scope of this Quick Start Guide.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Processing Facilities,  Prev: Editing Facilities,  Up: Quick Start
+
+1.3.2 Creating and viewing output, debugging
+--------------------------------------------
+
+1.3.2.1 One Command for LaTeX, helpers, viewers, and printing
+.............................................................
+
+If you have typed some text and want to run LaTeX (or TeX, or other
+programs--see below) on it, type 'C-c C-c'.  If applicable, you will be
+asked whether you want to save changes, and which program you want to
+invoke.  In many cases, the choice that AUCTeX suggests will be just
+what you want: first 'latex', then a viewer.  If a 'latex' run produces
+or changes input files for 'makeindex', the next suggestion will be to
+run that program, and AUCTeX knows that you need to run 'latex' again
+afterwards--the same holds for BibTeX.
+
+   When no processor invocation is necessary anymore, AUCTeX will
+suggest to run a viewer, or you can chose to create a PostScript file
+using 'dvips', or to directly print it.
+
+   Actually, there is another command which comes in handy to compile
+documents: type 'C-c C-a' ('TeX-command-run-all') and AUCTeX will
+compile the document for you until it is ready and then run the viewer.
+This is the same as issuing repeatedly 'C-c C-c' and letting AUCTeX
+guess the next command to run.
+
+   At this place, a warning needs to be given: First, although AUCTeX is
+really good in detecting the standard situations when an additional
+'latex' run is necessary, it cannot detect it always.  Second, the
+creation of PostScript files or direct printing currently only works
+when your output file is a DVI file, not a PDF file.
+
+   Ah, you didn't know you can do both?  That brings us to the next
+topic.
+
+1.3.2.2 Choosing an output format
+.................................
+
+From a LaTeX file, you can produce DVI output, or a PDF file directly
+via 'pdflatex'.  You can switch on source specials for easier navigation
+in the output file, or tell 'latex' to stop after an error (usually
+'--noninteractive' is used, to allow you to detect all errors in a
+single run).
+
+   These options are controlled by toggles, the keystrokes should be
+easy to memorize:
+
+'C-c C-t C-p'
+     This command toggles between DVI and PDF output
+
+'C-c C-t C-i'
+     toggles interactive mode
+
+'C-c C-t C-s'
+     toggles SyncTeX (or source specials) support
+
+'C-c C-t C-o'
+     toggles usage of Omega/lambda.
+
+   There is also another possibility: compile the document with 'tex'
+(or 'latex') and then convert the resulting DVI file to PDF using
+'dvips'-'ps2pdf' sequence or 'dvipdfmx' command.  If you want to go by
+this route, customize 'TeX-PDF-from-DVI' option.  Then AUCTeX will
+suggest you to run the appropriate command when you type 'C-C C-c'.  For
+details, see *note Processor Options::.
+
+1.3.2.3 Debugging LaTeX
+.......................
+
+When AUCTeX runs a program, it creates an output buffer in which it
+displays the output of the command.  If there is a syntactical error in
+your file, 'latex' will not complete successfully.  AUCTeX will tell you
+that, and you can get to the place where the first error occured by
+pressing 'C-c `' (the last character is a backtick).  The view will be
+split in two windows, the output will be displayed in the lower buffer,
+and both buffers will be centered around the place where the error
+ocurred.  You can then try to fix it in the document buffer, and use the
+same keystrokes to get to the next error.  This procedure may be
+repeated until all errors have been dealt with.  By pressing 'C-c C-w'
+('TeX-toggle-debug-boxes') you can toggle whether AUCTeX should notify
+you of overfull and underfull boxes in addition to regular errors.
+
+   Issue 'M-x TeX-error-overview <RET>' to see a nicely formatted list
+of all errors and warnings reported by the compiler.
+
+   If a command got stuck in a seemingly infinite loop, or you want to
+stop execution for other reasons, you can use 'C-c C-k' (for "kill").
+Similar to 'C-l', which centers the buffer you are in around your
+current position, 'C-c C-l' centers the output buffer so that the last
+lines added at the bottom become visible.
+
+1.3.2.4 Running LaTeX on parts of your document
+...............................................
+
+If you want to check how some part of your text looks like, and do not
+want to wait until the whole document has been typeset, then mark it as
+a region and use 'C-c C-r'.  It behaves just like 'C-c C-c', but it only
+uses the document preamble and the region you marked.
+
+   If you are using '\include' or '\input' to structure your document,
+try 'C-c C-b' while you are editing one of the included files.  It will
+run 'latex' only on the current buffer, using the preamble from the
+master file.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Editing,  Next: Display,  Prev: Introduction,  Up: Top
+
+2 Editing the Document Source
+*****************************
+
+The most commonly used commands/macros of AUCTeX are those which simply
+insert templates for often used TeX, LaTeX, or ConTeXt constructs, like
+font changes, handling of environments, etc.  These features are very
+simple, and easy to learn, and help you avoid mistakes like mismatched
+braces, or '\begin{}'-'\end{}' pairs.
+
+   Apart from that this chapter contains a description of some features
+for entering more specialized sorts of text, for formatting the source
+by indenting and filling and for navigating through the document.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Quotes::                      Inserting quotes, dollars, and braces
+* Font Specifiers::             Inserting Font Specifiers
+* Sectioning::                  Inserting chapters, sections, etc.
+* Environments::                Inserting Environment Templates
+* Mathematics::                 Entering Mathematics
+* Completion::                  Completion of macros
+* Marking::                     Marking Environments, Sections, or Texinfo Nodes
+* Commenting::                  Commenting text
+* Indenting::                   Reflecting syntactic constructs with whitespace
+* Filling::                     Automatic and manual line breaking
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Quotes,  Next: Font Specifiers,  Up: Editing
+
+2.1 Insertion of Quotes, Dollars, and Braces
+============================================
+
+Quotation Marks
+---------------
+
+In TeX, literal double quotes '"like this"' are seldom used, instead two
+single quotes are used '``like this'''.  To help you insert these
+efficiently, AUCTeX allows you to continue to press '"' to insert two
+single quotes.  To get a literal double quote, press '"' twice.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-insert-quote COUNT
+     ('"') Insert the appropriate quote marks for TeX.
+
+     Inserts the value of 'TeX-open-quote' (normally '``') or
+     'TeX-close-quote' (normally '''') depending on the context.  With
+     prefix argument, always inserts '"' characters.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-open-quote
+     String inserted by typing '"' to open a quotation.  (*Note
+     European::, for language-specific quotation mark insertion.)
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-close-quote
+     String inserted by typing '"' to close a quotation.  (*Note
+     European::, for language-specific quotation mark insertion.)
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-quote-after-quote
+     Determines the behavior of '"'.  If it is non-nil, typing '"' will
+     insert a literal double quote.  The respective values of
+     'TeX-open-quote' and 'TeX-close-quote' will be inserted after
+     typing '"' once again.
+
+   The 'babel' package provides special support for the requirements of
+typesetting quotation marks in many different languages.  If you use
+this package, either directly or by loading a language-specific style
+file, you should also use the special commands for quote insertion
+instead of the standard quotes shown above.  AUCTeX is able to recognize
+several of these languages and will change quote insertion accordingly.
+*Note European::, for details about this feature and how to control it.
+
+   In case you are using the 'csquotes' package, you should customize
+'LaTeX-csquotes-open-quote', 'LaTeX-csquotes-close-quote' and
+'LaTeX-csquotes-quote-after-quote'.  The quotation characters will only
+be used if both variables--'LaTeX-csquotes-open-quote' and
+'LaTeX-csquotes-close-quote'--are non-empty strings.  But then the
+'csquotes'-related values will take precedence over the
+language-specific ones.
+
+Dollar Signs
+------------
+
+In AUCTeX, dollar signs should match like they do in TeX.  This has been
+partially implemented, we assume dollar signs always match within a
+paragraph.  By default, the first '$' you insert in a paragraph will do
+nothing special.  The second '$' will match the first.  This will be
+indicated by moving the cursor temporarily over the first dollar sign.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-insert-dollar ARG
+     ('$') Insert dollar sign.
+
+     Show matching dollar sign if this dollar sign end the TeX math
+     mode.
+
+     With optional ARG, insert that many dollar signs.
+
+   TeX and LaTeX users often look for a way to insert inline equations
+like '$...$' or '\(...\)' simply typing '$'.  AUCTeX helps them through
+the customizable variable 'TeX-electric-math'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-electric-math
+     If the variable is non-nil and you type '$' outside math mode,
+     AUCTeX will automatically insert the opening and closing symbols
+     for an inline equation and put the point between them.  The opening
+     symbol will blink when 'blink-matching-paren' is non-nil.  If
+     'TeX-electric-math' is nil, typing '$' simply inserts '$' at point,
+     this is the default.
+
+     Besides 'nil', possible values for this variable are '(cons "$"
+     "$")' for TeX inline equations '$...$', and '(cons "\\(" "\\)")'
+     for LaTeX inline equations '\(...\)'.
+
+     If the variable is non-nil and point is inside math mode right
+     between a couple of single dollars, pressing '$' will insert
+     another pair of dollar signs and leave the point between them.
+     Thus, if 'TeX-electric-math' is set to '(cons "$" "$")' you can
+     easily obtain a TeX display equation '$$...$$' by pressing '$'
+     twice in a row.  (Note that you should not use double dollar signs
+     in LaTeX because this practice can lead to wrong spacing in typeset
+     documents.)
+
+     In addition, when the variable is non-nil and there is an active
+     region outside math mode, typing '$' will put around the active
+     region symbols for opening and closing inline equation and keep the
+     region active, leaving point after the closing symbol.  By pressing
+     repeatedly '$' while the region is active you can toggle between an
+     inline equation, a display equation, and no equation.  To be
+     precise, '$...$' is replaced by '$$...$$', whereas '\(...\)' is
+     replaced by '\[...\]'.
+
+   If you want to automatically insert '$...$' in plain TeX files, and
+'\(...\)' in LaTeX files by pressing '$', add the following to your init
+file
+     (add-hook 'plain-TeX-mode-hook
+               (lambda () (set (make-local-variable 'TeX-electric-math)
+                               (cons "$" "$"))))
+     (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook
+               (lambda () (set (make-local-variable 'TeX-electric-math)
+                               (cons "\\(" "\\)"))))
+
+   Note that Texinfo mode does nothing special for '$'.  It inserts
+dollar sign(s) just in the same way as the other normal keys do.
+
+Braces
+------
+
+To avoid unbalanced braces, it is useful to insert them pairwise.  You
+can do this by typing 'C-c {'.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-insert-braces
+     ('C-c {') Make a pair of braces and position the cursor to type
+     inside of them.  If there is an active region, put braces around it
+     and leave point after the closing brace.
+
+   When writing complex math formulas in LaTeX documents, you sometimes
+need to adjust the size of braces with pairs of macros like
+'\left'-'\right', '\bigl'-'\bigr' and so on.  You can avoid unbalanced
+pairs with the help of 'TeX-insert-macro', bound to 'C-c C-m' or 'C-c
+<RET>' (*note Completion::).  If you insert left size adjusting macros
+such as '\left', '\bigl' etc. with 'TeX-insert-macro', it asks for left
+brace to use and supplies automatically right size adjusting macros such
+as '\right', '\bigr' etc. and corresponding right brace in addtion to
+the intended left macro and left brace.
+
+   The completion by 'TeX-insert-macro' also applies when entering
+macros such as '\langle', '\lfloor' and '\lceil', which produce the left
+part of the paired braces.  For example, inserting '\lfloor' by 'C-c
+C-m' is immediately followed by the insertion of '\rfloor'.  In
+addition, if the point was located just after '\left' or its friends,
+the corresponding '\right' etc. will be inserted in front of '\rfloor'.
+In both cases, active region is honored.
+
+   As a side effect, when 'LaTeX-math-mode' (*note Mathematics::) is on,
+just typing '`(' inserts not only '\langle', but also '\rangle'.
+
+   If you do not like such auto completion at all, it can be disabled by
+a user option.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-arg-right-insert-p
+     If this option is turned off, the automatic supply of the right
+     macros and braces is suppressed.
+
+   When you edit LaTeX documents, you can enable automatic brace pairing
+when typing '(', '{' and '['.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-electric-left-right-brace
+     If this option is on, just typing '(', '{' or '[' immediately adds
+     the corresponding right brace ')', '}' or ']'.  The point is left
+     after the opening brace.  If there is an active region, braces are
+     put around it.
+
+     They recognize the preceding backslash or size adjusting macros
+     such as '\left', '\bigl' etc., so the following completions will
+     occur:
+
+        * (when typing single left brace)
+
+             - '(' -> '()'
+
+             - '{' -> '{}'
+
+             - '[' -> '[]'
+
+        * (when typing left brace just after a backslash)
+
+             - '\(' -> '\(\)'
+
+             - '\{' -> '\{\}'
+
+             - '\[' -> '\[\]'
+
+        * (when typing just after '\left' or '\bigl')
+
+             - '\left(' -> '\left(\right)'
+
+             - '\bigl[' -> '\bigl[\bigr]'
+
+        * (when typing just after '\Bigl\')
+
+             - '\Bigl\{' -> '\Bigl\{\Bigr\}'
+
+     This auto completion feature may be a bit annoying when editing an
+     already existing LaTeX document.  In that case, use 'C-u 1' or
+     'C-q' before typing '(', '{' or '['.  Then no completion is done
+     and just a single left brace is inserted.  In fact, with optional
+     prefix ARG, just that many open braces are inserted without any
+     completion.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Font Specifiers,  Next: Sectioning,  Prev: Quotes,  Up: Editing
+
+2.2 Inserting Font Specifiers
+=============================
+
+Perhaps the most used keyboard commands of AUCTeX are the short-cuts
+available for easy insertion of font changing macros.
+
+   If you give an argument (that is, type 'C-u') to the font command,
+the innermost font will be replaced, i.e. the font in the TeX group
+around point will be changed.  The following table shows the available
+commands, with '-!-' indicating the position where the text will be
+inserted.
+
+'C-c C-f C-b'
+     Insert bold face '\textbf{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-m'
+     Insert medium face '\textmd{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-i'
+     Insert italics '\textit{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-e'
+     Insert _emphasized_ '\emph{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-s'
+     Insert slanted '\textsl{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-r'
+     Insert roman '\textrm{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-f'
+     Insert sans serif '\textsf{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-t'
+     Insert typewriter '\texttt{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-c'
+     Insert SMALL CAPS '\textsc{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-l'
+     Insert upper lower case '\textulc{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-w'
+     Insert SWASH '\textsw{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-n'
+     Insert normal '\textnormal{-!-}' text.
+
+'C-c C-f C-d'
+     Delete the innermost font specification containing point.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-font REPLACE WHAT
+     ('C-c C-f') Insert template for font change command.
+
+     If REPLACE is not nil, replace current font.  WHAT determines the
+     font to use, as specified by 'TeX-font-list'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-font-list
+     List of fonts used by 'TeX-font'.
+
+     Each entry is a list with three elements.  The first element is the
+     key to activate the font.  The second element is the string to
+     insert before point, and the third element is the string to insert
+     after point.  An optional fourth element means always replace if
+     not nil.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-font-list
+     List of fonts used by 'TeX-font' in LaTeX mode.  It has the same
+     structure as 'TeX-font-list'.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Sectioning,  Next: Environments,  Prev: Font Specifiers,  Up: Editing
+
+2.3 Inserting chapters, sections, etc.
+======================================
+
+Insertion of sectioning macros, that is '\chapter', '\section',
+'\subsection', etc. and accompanying '\label''s may be eased by using
+'C-c C-s'.  This command is highly customizable, the following describes
+the default behavior.
+
+   When invoking you will be asked for a section macro to insert.  An
+appropriate default is automatically selected by AUCTeX, that is either:
+at the top of the document; the top level sectioning for that document
+style, and any other place: The same as the last occurring sectioning
+command.
+
+   Next, you will be asked for the actual name of that section, and last
+you will be asked for a label to be associated with that section.  The
+label will be prefixed by the value specified in 'LaTeX-section-hook'.
+
+ -- Command: LaTeX-section ARG
+     ('C-c C-s') Insert a sectioning command.
+
+     Determine the type of section to be inserted, by the argument ARG.
+
+        * If ARG is nil or missing, use the current level.
+        * If ARG is a list (selected by C-u), go downward one level.
+        * If ARG is negative, go up that many levels.
+        * If ARG is positive or zero, use absolute level:
+             + 0 : part
+             + 1 : chapter
+             + 2 : section
+             + 3 : subsection
+             + 4 : subsubsection
+             + 5 : paragraph
+             + 6 : subparagraph
+
+     The following variables can be set to customize the function.
+
+     'LaTeX-section-hook'
+          Hooks to be run when inserting a section.
+     'LaTeX-section-label'
+          Prefix to all section references.
+
+   The precise behavior of 'LaTeX-section' is defined by the contents of
+'LaTeX-section-hook'.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-section-hook
+     List of hooks to run when a new section is inserted.
+
+     The following variables are set before the hooks are run
+
+     'LaTeX-level'
+          Numeric section level, default set by prefix arg to
+          'LaTeX-section'.
+     'LaTeX-name'
+          Name of the sectioning command, derived from 'LaTeX-level'.
+     'LaTeX-title'
+          The title of the section, default to an empty string.
+     'LaTeX-toc'
+          Entry for the table of contents list, default nil.
+     'LaTeX-done-mark'
+          Position of point afterwards, default nil meaning after the
+          inserted text.
+
+     A number of hooks are already defined.  Most likely, you will be
+     able to get the desired functionality by choosing from these hooks.
+
+     'LaTeX-section-heading'
+          Query the user about the name of the sectioning command.
+          Modifies 'LaTeX-level' and 'LaTeX-name'.
+     'LaTeX-section-title'
+          Query the user about the title of the section.  Modifies
+          'LaTeX-title'.
+     'LaTeX-section-toc'
+          Query the user for the toc entry.  Modifies 'LaTeX-toc'.
+     'LaTeX-section-section'
+          Insert LaTeX section command according to 'LaTeX-name',
+          'LaTeX-title', and 'LaTeX-toc'.  If 'LaTeX-toc' is nil, no toc
+          entry is inserted.  If 'LaTeX-toc' or 'LaTeX-title' are empty
+          strings, 'LaTeX-done-mark' will be placed at the point they
+          should be inserted.
+     'LaTeX-section-label'
+          Insert a label after the section command.  Controlled by the
+          variable 'LaTeX-section-label'.
+
+     To get a full featured 'LaTeX-section' command, insert
+
+          (setq LaTeX-section-hook
+                '(LaTeX-section-heading
+                  LaTeX-section-title
+                  LaTeX-section-toc
+                  LaTeX-section-section
+                  LaTeX-section-label))
+
+     in your init file such as 'init.el' or '.emacs'.
+
+   The behavior of 'LaTeX-section-label' is determined by the variable
+'LaTeX-section-label'.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-section-label
+     Default prefix when asking for a label.
+
+     If it is a string, it is used unchanged for all kinds of sections.
+     If it is nil, no label is inserted.  If it is a list, the list is
+     searched for a member whose car is equal to the name of the
+     sectioning command being inserted.  The cdr is then used as the
+     prefix.  If the name is not found, or if the cdr is nil, no label
+     is inserted.
+
+     By default, chapters have a prefix of 'cha:' while sections and
+     subsections have a prefix of 'sec:'.  Labels are not automatically
+     inserted for other types of sections.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Environments,  Next: Mathematics,  Prev: Sectioning,  Up: Editing
+
+2.4 Inserting Environment Templates
+===================================
+
+A large apparatus is available that supports insertions of environments,
+that is '\begin{}' -- '\end{}' pairs.
+
+   AUCTeX is aware of most of the actual environments available in a
+specific document.  This is achieved by examining your '\documentclass'
+command, and consulting a precompiled list of environments available in
+a large number of styles.
+
+   Most of these are described further in the following sections, and
+you may easily specify more.  *Note Customizing Environments::.
+
+   You insert an environment with 'C-c C-e', and select an environment
+type.  Depending on the environment, AUCTeX may ask more questions about
+the optional parts of the selected environment type.  With 'C-u C-c C-e'
+you will change the current environment.
+
+ -- Command: LaTeX-environment ARG
+     ('C-c C-e') AUCTeX will prompt you for an environment to insert.
+     At this prompt, you may press <TAB> or <SPC> to complete a
+     partially written name, and/or to get a list of available
+     environments.  After selection of a specific environment AUCTeX may
+     prompt you for further specifications.
+
+     If the optional argument ARG is non-nil (i.e. you have given a
+     prefix argument), the current environment is modified and no new
+     environment is inserted.
+
+   AUCTeX helps you adding labels to environments which use them, such
+as 'equation', 'figure', 'table', etc... When you insert one of the
+supported environments with 'C-c C-e', you will be automatically
+prompted for a label.  You can select the prefix to be used for such
+environments with the 'LaTeX-label-alist' variable.
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-label-alist
+     List the prefixes to be used for the label of each supported
+     environment.
+
+     This is an alist whose car is the environment name, and the cdr
+     either the prefix or a symbol referring to one.
+
+     If the name is not found, or if the cdr is nil, no label is
+     automatically inserted for that environment.
+
+     If you want to automatically insert a label for a environment but
+     with an empty prefix, use the empty string '""' as the cdr of the
+     corresponding entry.
+
+   As a default selection, AUCTeX will suggest the environment last
+inserted or, as the first choice the value of the variable
+'LaTeX-default-environment'.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-default-environment
+     Default environment to insert when invoking 'LaTeX-environment'
+     first time.  When the current environment is 'document', it is
+     overriden by 'LaTeX-default-document-environment'.
+
+ -- Variable: LaTeX-default-document-environment
+     Default environment when invoking 'LaTeX-environment' and the
+     current environment is 'document'.  It is intended to be used in
+     LaTeX class style files.  For example, in 'beamer.el' it is set to
+     'frame', in 'letter.el' to 'letter', and in 'slides.el' to 'slide'.
+
+   If the document is empty, or the cursor is placed at the top of the
+document, AUCTeX will default to insert a 'document' environment
+prompting also for the insertion of '\documentclass' and '\usepackage'
+macros.  You will be prompted for a new package until you enter nothing.
+If you do not want to insert any '\usepackage' at all, just press <RET>
+at the first 'Packages' prompt.
+
+   AUCTeX distinguishes normal and expert environments.  By default, it
+will offer completion only for normal environments.  This behavior is
+controlled by the user option 'TeX-complete-expert-commands'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-complete-expert-commands
+     Complete macros and environments marked as expert commands.
+
+     Possible values are nil, t, or a list of style names.
+
+     nil
+          Don't complete expert commands (default).
+     t
+          Always complete expert commands.
+     (STYLES ...)
+          Only complete expert commands of STYLES.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Equations::                   Equations
+* Floats::                      Floats
+* Itemize-like::                Itemize-like Environments
+* Tabular-like::                Tabular-like Environments
+* Customizing Environments::    Customizing Environments
+
+   You can close the current environment with 'C-c ]', but we suggest
+that you use 'C-c C-e' to insert complete environments instead.
+
+ -- Command: LaTeX-close-environment
+     ('C-c ]') Insert an '\end' that matches the current environment.
+
+   AUCTeX offers keyboard shortcuts for moving point to the beginning
+and to the end of the current environment.
+ -- Command: LaTeX-find-matching-begin
+     ('C-M-a') Move point to the '\begin' of the current environment.
+
+     If this command is called inside a comment and
+     'LaTeX-syntactic-comments' is enabled, try to find the environment
+     in commented regions with the same comment prefix.
+
+ -- Command: LaTeX-find-matching-end
+     ('C-M-e') Move point to the '\end' of the current environment.
+
+     If this command is called inside a comment and
+     'LaTeX-syntactic-comments' is enabled, try to find the environment
+     in commented regions with the same comment prefix.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Equations,  Next: Floats,  Up: Environments
+
+2.4.1 Equations
+---------------
+
+When inserting equation-like environments, the '\label' will have a
+default prefix, which is controlled by the following variables:
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-equation-label
+     Prefix to use for 'equation' labels.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-eqnarray-label
+     Prefix to use for 'eqnarray' labels.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-amsmath-label
+     Prefix to use for amsmath equation labels.  Amsmath equations
+     include 'align', 'alignat', 'xalignat', 'multline', 'flalign' and
+     'gather'.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Floats,  Next: Itemize-like,  Prev: Equations,  Up: Environments
+
+2.4.2 Floats
+------------
+
+Figures and tables (i.e., floats) may also be inserted using AUCTeX.
+After choosing either 'figure' or 'table' in the environment list
+described above, you will be prompted for a number of additional things.
+
+FLOAT POSITION
+     This is the optional argument of float environments that controls
+     how they are placed in the final document.  In LaTeX this is a
+     sequence of the letters 'htbp' as described in the LaTeX manual.
+     The value will default to the value of 'LaTeX-float'.
+
+CAPTION
+     This is the caption of the float.  The default is to insert the
+     caption at the bottom of the float.  You can specify floats where
+     the caption should be placed at the top with
+     'LaTeX-top-caption-list'.
+
+SHORT CAPTION
+     If the specified caption is greater than a specific length, then a
+     short caption is prompted for and it is inserted as an optional
+     argument to the '\caption' macro.  The length that a caption needs
+     to be before prompting for a short version is controlled by
+     'LaTeX-short-caption-prompt-length'.
+
+LABEL
+     The label of this float.  The label will have a default prefix,
+     which is controlled by the variables 'LaTeX-figure-label' and
+     'LaTeX-table-label'.
+
+   Moreover, you will be asked if you want the contents of the float
+environment to be horizontally centered.  Upon a positive answer a
+'\centering' macro will be inserted at the beginning of the float
+environment.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-float
+     Default placement for floats.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-figure-label
+     Prefix to use for figure labels.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-table-label
+     Prefix to use for table labels.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-top-caption-list
+     List of float environments with top caption.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-short-caption-prompt-length
+     Number of chars a caption should be before prompting for a short
+     caption.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Itemize-like,  Next: Tabular-like,  Prev: Floats,  Up: Environments
+
+2.4.3 Itemize-like Environments
+-------------------------------
+
+In an itemize-like environment, nodes (i.e., '\item's) may be inserted
+using 'C-c <LFD>'.
+
+ -- Command: LaTeX-insert-item
+     ('C-c <LFD>') Close the current item, move to the next line and
+     insert an appropriate '\item' for the current environment.  That
+     is, 'itemize' and 'enumerate' will have '\item ' inserted, while
+     'description' will have '\item[] ' inserted.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-arg-item-label-p
+     If non-nil, you will always be asked for optional label in items.
+     Otherwise, you will be asked only in description environments.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Tabular-like,  Next: Customizing Environments,  Prev: Itemize-like,  Up: Environments
+
+2.4.4 Tabular-like Environments
+-------------------------------
+
+When inserting Tabular-like environments, that is, 'tabular' 'array'
+etc., you will be prompted for a template for that environment.  Related
+variables:
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-default-format
+     Default format string for array and tabular environments.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-default-width
+     Default width for minipage and tabular* environments.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-default-position
+     Default position string for array and tabular environments.  If
+     nil, act like the empty string is given, but don't prompt for a
+     position.
+
+   AUCTeX calculates the number of columns from the format string and
+inserts the suitable number of ampersands.
+
+   You can use 'C-c <LFD>' ('LaTeX-insert-item') to terminate rows in
+these environments.  It supplies line break macro '\\' and inserts the
+suitable number of ampersands on the next line.  AUCTeX also supports
+the '*{num}{cols}' notation (which may contain another '*'-expression)
+in the format string when calculating the number of ampersands.  Please
+note that 'num' and 'cols' must be enclosed in braces; expressions like
+'*2l' are not recognized correctly by the algorithm.
+
+ -- Command: LaTeX-insert-item
+     ('C-c <LFD>') Close the current row with '\\', move to the next
+     line and insert an appropriate number of ampersands for the current
+     environment.
+
+   Similar supports are provided for various amsmath environments such
+as 'align', 'gather', 'alignat', 'matrix' etc.  Try typing 'C-c <LFD>'
+in these environments.  It recognizes the current environment and does
+the appropriate job depending on the context.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Customizing Environments,  Prev: Tabular-like,  Up: Environments
+
+2.4.5 Customizing Environments
+------------------------------
+
+*Note Adding Environments::, for how to customize the list of known
+environments.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Mathematics,  Next: Completion,  Prev: Environments,  Up: Editing
+
+2.5 Entering Mathematics
+========================
+
+TeX is written by a mathematician, and has always contained good support
+for formatting mathematical text.  AUCTeX supports this tradition, by
+offering a special minor mode for entering text with many mathematical
+symbols.  You can enter this mode by typing 'C-c ~'.
+
+ -- Command: LaTeX-math-mode
+     ('C-c ~') Toggle LaTeX Math mode.  This is a minor mode rebinding
+     the key 'LaTeX-math-abbrev-prefix' to allow easy typing of
+     mathematical symbols.  '`' will read a character from the keyboard,
+     and insert the symbol as specified in 'LaTeX-math-default' and
+     'LaTeX-math-list'.  If given a prefix argument, the symbol will be
+     surrounded by dollar signs.
+
+   You can use another prefix key (instead of '`') by setting the
+variable 'LaTeX-math-abbrev-prefix'.
+
+   To enable LaTeX Math mode by default, add the following in your init
+file such as 'init.el' or '.emacs':
+     (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook #'LaTeX-math-mode)
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-math-abbrev-prefix
+     A string containing the prefix of 'LaTeX-math-mode' commands; This
+     value defaults to '`'.
+
+     The string has to be a key or key sequence in a format understood
+     by the 'kbd' macro.  This corresponds to the syntax usually used in
+     the manuals for Emacs Lisp.
+
+   The variable 'LaTeX-math-list' allows you to add your own mappings.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-math-list
+     A list containing user-defined keys and commands to be used in
+     LaTeX Math mode.  Each entry should be a list of two to four
+     elements.
+
+     First, the key to be used after 'LaTeX-math-abbrev-prefix' for
+     macro insertion.  The key can be a character (e.g. '?o') for a
+     single stroke or a string (e.g. '"o a"') for a multi-stroke
+     binding.  If it is nil, the symbol has no associated keystroke (it
+     is available in the menu, though).
+
+     Second, a string representing the name of the macro (without a
+     leading backslash.)
+
+     Third, a string representing the name of a submenu the command
+     should be added to.  Use a list of strings in case of nested menus.
+
+     Fourth, the position of a Unicode character to be displayed in the
+     menu alongside the macro name.  This is an integer value.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-math-menu-unicode
+     Whether the LaTeX Math menu should try using Unicode for effect.
+     Your Emacs built must be able to display include Unicode characters
+     in menus for this feature.
+
+   AUCTeX's reference card 'tex-ref.tex' includes a list of all math
+mode commands.
+
+   AUCTeX can help you write subscripts and superscripts in math
+constructs by automatically inserting a pair of braces after typing <_>
+or <^> respectively and putting point between the braces.  In order to
+enable this feature, set the variable 'TeX-electric-sub-and-superscript'
+to a non-nil value.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-electric-sub-and-superscript
+     If non-nil, insert braces after typing <^> and <_> in math mode.
+
+   You can automatically turn off input methods, used to input non-ascii
+characters, when you begin to enter math constructs.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-math-input-method-off-regexp
+     Input method matching this regular expression is turned off when
+     '$' is typed to begin math mode or a math environment is inserted
+     by 'C-c C-e' ('LaTeX-environment').
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Completion,  Next: Marking,  Prev: Mathematics,  Up: Editing
+
+2.6 Completion
+==============
+
+Emacs lisp programmers probably know the 'lisp-complete-symbol' command
+which was bound to 'M-<TAB>' until completion-at-point became the new
+standard completion facility (see below).  Users of the wonderful ispell
+mode know and love the 'ispell-complete-word' command from that package.
+Similarly, AUCTeX has a 'TeX-complete-symbol' command, by default bound
+to 'M-<TAB>' which is equivalent to 'C-M-i'.  Using
+'TeX-complete-symbol' makes it easier to type and remember the names of
+long LaTeX macros.
+
+   In order to use 'TeX-complete-symbol', you should write a backslash
+and the start of the macro.  Typing 'M-<TAB>' will now complete as much
+of the macro, as it unambiguously can.  For example, if you type
+''\renewc'' and then 'M-<TAB>', it will expand to ''\renewcommand''.
+But there's more: if point is just after '\begin{', then
+'TeX-complete-symbol' will complete LaTeX environments, etc.  This is
+controlled by 'TeX-complete-list'.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-complete-symbol
+     ('M-<TAB>') Complete TeX symbol before point.
+
+ -- Variable: TeX-complete-list
+     List of ways to complete the preceding text.
+
+     Each entry is a list with the following elements:
+
+       1. Regexp matching the preceding text or a predicate of arity 0
+          which returns non-nil and sets 'match-data' appropriately if
+          it is applicable.
+       2. A number indicating the subgroup in the regexp containing the
+          text.
+       3. A function returning an alist of possible completions.
+       4. Text to append after a succesful completion.
+
+     Or alternatively:
+
+       1. Regexp matching the preceding text.
+       2. Function to do the actual completion.
+
+   More recent Emacs versions have a new completion mechanism.  Modes
+may define and register custom 'completion-at-point' functions and when
+the user invokes 'completion-at-point' (usually bound to 'M-<TAB>'), all
+such registered functions are consulted for checking for possible
+completions.  Modern completion UIs like company-mode support this
+completion-at-point facility.
+
+ -- Function: TeX--completion-at-point
+     AUCTeX's completion-at-point function which is automatically added
+     to 'completion-at-point-functions' in TeX and LaTeX buffers.
+
+     It offers the same completion candidates as would
+     'TeX-complete-symbol' (and is also controlled by
+     'TeX-complete-list') except that it doesn't fall back on
+     'ispell-complete-word' which would be awkward with completion UIs
+     like company-mode.
+
+   A more direct way to insert a macro is with 'TeX-insert-macro', bound
+to 'C-c C-m' which is equivalent to 'C-c <RET>'.  It has the advantage
+over completion that it knows about the argument of most standard LaTeX
+macros, and will prompt for them.  It also knows about the type of the
+arguments, so it will for example give completion for the argument to
+'\include'.  Some examples are listed below.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-insert-macro
+     ('C-c C-m' or 'C-c <RET>') Prompt (with completion) for the name of
+     a TeX macro, and if AUCTeX knows the macro, prompt for each
+     argument.
+
+   As a default selection, AUCTeX will suggest the macro last inserted
+or, as the first choice the value of the variable 'TeX-default-macro'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-default-macro
+     Default macro to insert when invoking 'TeX-insert-macro' first
+     time.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-insert-macro-default-style
+     Specifies whether 'TeX-insert-macro' will ask for all optional
+     arguments.
+
+     If set to the symbol 'show-optional-args', 'TeX-insert-macro' asks
+     for optional arguments of TeX marcos, unless the previous optional
+     argument has been rejected.  If set to 'show-all-optional-args',
+     'TeX-insert-macro' asks for all optional arguments.
+     'mandatory-args-only', 'TeX-insert-macro' asks only for mandatory
+     arguments.  When 'TeX-insert-macro' is called with prefix argument
+     ('C-u'), it's the other way round.
+
+     Note that for some macros, there are special mechanisms, e.g.
+     'TeX-arg-cite-note-p' and 'LaTeX-includegraphics-options-alist'.
+
+   A faster alternative is to enable the option 'TeX-electric-escape'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-electric-escape
+     If this is non-nil, typing the TeX escape character '\' will invoke
+     the command 'TeX-electric-macro'.
+
+     In Texinfo mode, the command is invoked by '@' instead.
+
+   The difference between 'TeX-insert-macro' and 'TeX-electric-macro' is
+that space key <SPC> will complete and exit from the minibuffer in
+'TeX-electric-macro'.  Use <TAB> if you merely want to complete.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-electric-macro
+     Prompt (with completion) for the name of a TeX macro, and if AUCTeX
+     knows the macro, prompt for each argument.  Space (<SPC>) will
+     complete and exit.
+
+   By default AUCTeX will put an empty set braces '{}' after a macro
+with no arguments to stop it from eating the next whitespace.  This is
+suppressed inside math mode and can be disabled totally by setting
+'TeX-insert-braces' to nil.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-insert-braces
+     If non-nil, append a empty pair of braces after inserting a macro
+     with no arguments.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-insert-braces-alist
+     Control the insertion of a pair of braces after a macro on a per
+     macro basis.
+
+     This variable is an alist.  Each element is a cons cell, whose car
+     is the macro name, and the cdr is non-nil or nil, depending on
+     whether a pair of braces should be, respectively, appended or not
+     to the macro.
+
+     If a macro has an element in this variable, AUCTeX will use its
+     value to decide what to do, whatever the value of the variable
+     'TeX-insert-braces'.
+
+   Completions work because AUCTeX can analyze TeX files, and store
+symbols in Emacs Lisp files for later retrieval.  *Note Automatic::, for
+more information.
+
+   AUCTeX distinguishes normal and expert macros.  By default, it will
+offer completion only for normal commands.  This behavior can be
+controlled using the user option 'TeX-complete-expert-commands'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-complete-expert-commands
+     Complete macros and environments marked as expert commands.
+
+     Possible values are nil, t, or a list of style names.
+
+     nil
+          Don't complete expert commands (default).
+     t
+          Always complete expert commands.
+     (STYLES ...)
+          Only complete expert commands of STYLES.
+
+   AUCTeX will also make completion for many macro arguments, for
+example existing labels when you enter a '\ref' macro with
+'TeX-insert-macro' or 'TeX-electric-macro', and BibTeX entries when you
+enter a '\cite' macro.  For this kind of completion to work, parsing
+must be enabled as described in *note Parsing Files::.  For '\cite' you
+must also make sure that the BibTeX files have been saved at least once
+after you enabled automatic parsing on save, and that the basename of
+the BibTeX file does not conflict with the basename of one of TeX files.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Marking,  Next: Commenting,  Prev: Completion,  Up: Editing
+
+2.7 Marking Environments, Sections, or Texinfo Nodes
+====================================================
+
+You can mark the current environment by typing 'C-c .', or the current
+section by typing 'C-c *'.
+
+   In Texinfo documents you can type 'C-M-h' to mark the current node.
+
+   When the region is set, the point is moved to its beginning and the
+mark to its end.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Marking (LaTeX):: LaTeX Commands for Marking Environments and Sections
+* Marking (Texinfo):: Texinfo Commands for Marking Environments, Sections, and Nodes
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Marking (LaTeX),  Next: Marking (Texinfo),  Up: Marking
+
+2.7.1 LaTeX Commands for Marking Environments and Sections
+----------------------------------------------------------
+
+ -- Command: LaTeX-mark-section
+     ('C-c *') Set mark at end of current logical section, and point at
+     top.
+
+     With a non-nil prefix argument, mark only the region from the
+     current section start to the next sectioning command.  Thereby
+     subsections are not being marked.  Otherwise, any included
+     subsections are also marked along with current section.
+
+ -- Command: LaTeX-mark-environment
+     ('C-c .') Set mark to the end of the current environment and point
+     to the matching beginning.
+
+     If a prefix argument is given, mark the respective number of
+     enclosing environments.  The command will not work properly if
+     there are unbalanced begin-end pairs in comments and verbatim
+     environments.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Marking (Texinfo),  Prev: Marking (LaTeX),  Up: Marking
+
+2.7.2 Texinfo Commands for Marking Environments and Sections
+------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ -- Command: Texinfo-mark-section
+     ('C-c *') Mark the current section, with inclusion of any
+     containing node.
+
+     The current section is detected as starting by any of the
+     structuring commands matched by the regular expression in the
+     variable 'outline-regexp' which in turn is a regular expression
+     matching any element of the variable 'texinfo-section-list'.
+
+     With a non-nil prefix argument, mark only the region from the
+     current section start to the next sectioning command.  Thereby
+     subsections are not being marked.  Otherwise, any included
+     subsections are also marked.
+
+     Note that when the current section is starting immediately after a
+     node command, then the node command is also marked as part of the
+     section.
+
+ -- Command: Texinfo-mark-environment
+     ('C-c .') Set mark to the end of the current environment and point
+     to the matching beginning.
+
+     If a prefix argument is given, mark the respective number of
+     enclosing environments.  The command will not work properly if
+     there are unbalanced begin-end pairs in comments and verbatim
+     environments.
+
+ -- Command: Texinfo-mark-node
+     ('C-M-h') Mark the current node.  This is the node in which point
+     is located.  It is starting at the previous occurrence of the
+     keyword '@node' and ending at next occurrence of the keywords
+     '@node' or '@bye'.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Commenting,  Next: Indenting,  Prev: Marking,  Up: Editing
+
+2.8 Commenting
+==============
+
+It is often necessary to comment out temporarily a region of TeX or
+LaTeX code.  This can be done with the commands 'C-c ;' and 'C-c %'.
+'C-c ;' will comment out all lines in the current region, while 'C-c %'
+will comment out the current paragraph.  Type 'C-c ;' again to uncomment
+all lines of a commented region, or 'C-c %' again to uncomment all
+comment lines around point.  These commands will insert or remove a
+single '%' respectively.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-comment-or-uncomment-region
+     ('C-c ;') Add or remove '%' from the beginning of each line in the
+     current region.  Uncommenting works only if the region encloses
+     solely commented lines.  If AUCTeX should not try to guess if the
+     region should be commented or uncommented the commands
+     'TeX-comment-region' and 'TeX-uncomment-region' can be used to
+     explicitly comment or uncomment the region in concern.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-comment-or-uncomment-paragraph
+     ('C-c %') Add or remove '%' from the beginning of each line in the
+     current paragraph.  When removing '%' characters the paragraph is
+     considered to consist of all preceding and succeeding lines
+     starting with a '%', until the first non-comment line.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Indenting,  Next: Filling,  Prev: Commenting,  Up: Editing
+
+2.9 Indenting
+=============
+
+Indentation means the addition of whitespace at the beginning of lines
+to reflect special syntactical constructs.  This makes it easier to see
+the structure of the document, and to catch errors such as a missing
+closing brace.  Thus, the indentation is done for precisely the same
+reasons that you would indent ordinary computer programs.
+
+   Indentation is done by LaTeX environments and by TeX groups, that is
+the body of an environment is indented by the value of
+'LaTeX-indent-level' (default 2).  Also, items of an 'itemize-like'
+environment are indented by the value of 'LaTeX-item-indent', default
+-2.  (Items are identified with the help of 'LaTeX-item-regexp'.)  If
+more environments are nested, they are indented 'accumulated' just like
+most programming languages usually are seen indented in nested
+constructs.
+
+   You can explicitly indent single lines, usually by pressing <TAB>, or
+marked regions by calling 'indent-region' on it.  If you have
+'auto-fill-mode' enabled and a line is broken while you type it, Emacs
+automatically cares about the indentation in the following line.  If you
+want to have a similar behavior upon typing <RET>, you can customize the
+variable 'TeX-newline-function' and change the default of 'newline'
+which does no indentation to 'newline-and-indent' which indents the new
+line or 'reindent-then-newline-and-indent' which indents both the
+current and the new line.
+
+   There are certain LaTeX environments which should be indented in a
+special way, like 'tabular' or 'verbatim'.  Those environments may be
+specified in the variable 'LaTeX-indent-environment-list' together with
+their special indentation functions.  Taking the 'verbatim' environment
+as an example you can see that 'current-indentation' is used as the
+indentation function.  This will stop AUCTeX from doing any indentation
+in the environment if you hit <TAB> for example.
+
+   There are environments in 'LaTeX-indent-environment-list' which do
+not bring a special indentation function with them.  This is due to the
+fact that first the respective functions are not implemented yet and
+second that filling will be disabled for the specified environments.
+This shall prevent the source code from being messed up by accidently
+filling those environments with the standard filling routine.  If you
+think that providing special filling routines for such environments
+would be an appropriate and challenging task for you, you are invited to
+contribute.  (*Note Filling::, for further information about the filling
+functionality.)
+
+   The check for the indentation function may be enabled or disabled by
+customizing the variable 'LaTeX-indent-environment-check'.
+
+   For tabular-like environments, AUCTeX has a built-in function to
+indent according to preceding '&' signs and assigns it to all known
+tabular-like environments in the default value of
+'LaTeX-indent-environment-list'.
+
+   As a side note with regard to formatting special environments: Newer
+Emacsen include 'align.el' and therefore provide some support for
+formatting 'tabular' and 'tabbing' environments with the function
+'align-current' which will nicely align columns in the source code.
+
+   AUCTeX is able to format commented parts of your code just as any
+other part.  This means LaTeX environments and TeX groups in comments
+will be indented syntactically correct if the variable
+'LaTeX-syntactic-comments' is set to t.  If you disable it, comments
+will be filled like normal text and no syntactic indentation will be
+done.
+
+   Following you will find a list of most commands and variables related
+to indenting with a small summary in each case:
+
+'<TAB>'
+     'LaTeX-indent-line' will indent the current line.
+
+'<LFD>'
+'C-j'
+     'newline-and-indent' inserts a new line (much like <RET>) and moves
+     the cursor to an appropriate position by the left margin.
+
+     Most keyboards nowadays lack a linefeed key and 'C-j' may be
+     tedious to type.  Therefore you can customize AUCTeX to perform
+     indentation upon typing <RET> as well.  The respective option is
+     called 'TeX-newline-function'.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-indent-environment-list
+     List of environments with special indentation.  The second element
+     in each entry is the function to calculate the indentation level in
+     columns.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-indent-level
+     Number of spaces to add to the indentation for each '\begin' not
+     matched by a '\end'.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-item-indent
+     Number of spaces to add to the indentation for '\item''s in list
+     environments.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-brace-indent-level
+     Number of spaces to add to the indentation for each '{' not matched
+     by a '}'.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-syntactic-comments
+     If non-nil comments will be filled and indented according to LaTeX
+     syntax.  Otherwise they will be filled like normal text.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-newline-function
+     Used to specify the function which is called when <RET> is pressed.
+     This will normally be 'newline' which simply inserts a new line.
+     In case you want to have AUCTeX do indentation as well when you
+     press <RET>, use the built-in functions 'newline-and-indent' or
+     'reindent-then-newline-and-indent'.  The former inserts a new line
+     and indents the following line, i.e. it moves the cursor to the
+     right position and therefore acts as if you pressed <LFD>.  The
+     latter function additionally indents the current line.  If you
+     choose 'Other', you can specify your own fancy function to be
+     called when <RET> is pressed.
+
+   AUCTeX treats by default '\[...\]' math mode as a regular environment
+and indents it accordingly.  If you do not like such behavior you only
+need to remove '\|\[' and '\|\]' from 'LaTeX-begin-regexp' and
+'LaTeX-end-regexp' variables respectively.
+
+   A closely related topic is indenting of text enclosed in square
+brackets, parentheses and other pairs.  AUCTeX offers two variables
+which control if indentation happens inside these pairs.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-indent-open-delimiters
+     This variable contains additional opening delimiters which increase
+     indentation.  For example add '[' to this variable to get text
+     after a square bracket indented.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-indent-close-delimiters
+     This is the accompanying variable to 'TeX-indent-open-delimiters'
+     decreasing the indentation again.  This variable should contain ']'
+     if 'TeX-indent-open-delimiters' is set like described above.
+
+Note that this is an opt-in feature, both variables are initially set to
+an empty string.  That is because it introduces non-trivial side effects
+to include '[' and ']' in 'TeX-indent-open-delimiters' and
+'TeX-indent-close-delimiters'; if you only have an opening square
+bracket in your text without closing it, wrong indentation persists in
+the following text.  For example, in math expression, half-open
+intervals are frequently written as '[0,10)' or '[0,10['.  In such
+cases, you can put the closing part as a comment in the same line in
+order to have correct indentation after that:
+     $[0,10)$ % ]
+     $[0,10[$ % ]]
+
+   Another example is '\left'-'\right' pair in equations.  Similar
+workarounds are available:
+     \begin{equation}
+       \left[ % ]
+         xyz
+       \right] % [
+       abc
+     \end{equation}
+
+   You can include parens '()' also in 'TeX-indent-open-delimiters' and
+'TeX-indent-close-delimiters' to enable indent inside them.  Be prepared
+for similar side effects when you do.
+
+   Note that commented curly braces '{' and '}' aren't counted when
+AUCTeX computes indentation.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Filling,  Prev: Indenting,  Up: Editing
+
+2.10 Filling
+============
+
+Filling deals with the insertion of line breaks to prevent lines from
+becoming wider than what is specified in 'fill-column'.  The linebreaks
+will be inserted automatically if 'auto-fill-mode' is enabled.  In this
+case the source is not only filled but also indented automatically as
+you write it.
+
+   'auto-fill-mode' can be enabled for AUCTeX by calling
+'turn-on-auto-fill' in one of the hooks AUCTeX is running.  *Note Modes
+and Hooks::.  As an example, if you want to enable 'auto-fill-mode' in
+'LaTeX-mode', put the following into your init file:
+
+     (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook #'turn-on-auto-fill)
+
+   You can manually fill explicitly marked regions, paragraphs,
+environments, complete sections, or the whole buffer.  (Note that manual
+filling in AUCTeX will indent the start of the region to be filled in
+contrast to many other Emacs modes.)
+
+   There are some syntactical constructs which are handled specially
+with regard to filling.  These are so-called "code comments" and
+"paragraph commands".
+
+   Code comments are comments preceded by code or text in the same line.
+Upon filling a region, code comments themselves will not get filled.
+Filling is done from the start of the region to the line with the code
+comment and continues after it.  In order to prevent overfull lines in
+the source code, a linebreak will be inserted before the last
+non-comment word by default.  This can be changed by customizing
+'LaTeX-fill-break-before-code-comments'.  If you have overfull lines
+with code comments you can fill those explicitly by calling
+'LaTeX-fill-paragraph' or pressing 'M-q' with the cursor positioned on
+them.  This will add linebreaks in the comment and indent subsequent
+comment lines to the column of the comment in the first line of the code
+comment.  In this special case 'M-q' only acts on the current line and
+not on the whole paragraph.
+
+   Lines with '\par' are treated similarly to code comments, i.e. '\par'
+will be treated as paragraph boundary which should not be followed by
+other code or text.  But it is not treated as a real paragraph boundary
+like an empty line where filling a paragraph would stop.
+
+   Paragraph commands like '\section' or '\noindent' (the list of
+commands is defined by 'LaTeX-paragraph-commands') are often to be
+placed in their own line(s).  This means they should not be consecuted
+with any preceding or following adjacent lines of text.  AUCTeX will
+prevent this from happening if you do not put any text except another
+macro after the end of the last brace of the respective macro.  If there
+is other text after the macro, AUCTeX regards this as a sign that the
+macro is part of the following paragraph.
+
+   Here are some examples:
+
+     \begin{quote}
+       text text text text
+
+     \begin{quote}\label{foo}
+       text text text text
+
+   If you press 'M-q' on the first line in both examples, nothing will
+change.  But if you write
+
+     \begin{quote} text
+       text text text text
+and press 'M-q', you will get
+
+     \begin{quote} text text text text text
+
+   Besides code comments and paragraph commands, another speciality of
+filling in AUCTeX involves commented lines.  You should be aware that
+these comments are treated as islands in the rest of the LaTeX code if
+syntactic filling is enabled.  This means, for example, if you try to
+fill an environment with 'LaTeX-fill-environment' and have the cursor
+placed on a commented line which does not have a surrounding environment
+inside the comment, AUCTeX will report an error.
+
+   The relevant commands and variables with regard to filling are:
+
+'C-c C-q C-p'
+     'LaTeX-fill-paragraph' will fill and indent the current paragraph.
+
+'M-q'
+     Alias for 'C-c C-q C-p'
+
+'C-c C-q C-e'
+     'LaTeX-fill-environment' will fill and indent the current
+     environment.  This may e.g. be the 'document' environment, in which
+     case the entire document will be formatted.
+
+'C-c C-q C-s'
+     'LaTeX-fill-section' will fill and indent the current logical
+     sectional unit.
+
+'C-c C-q C-r'
+     'LaTeX-fill-region' will fill and indent the current region.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-fill-break-at-separators
+     List of separators before or after which respectively linebreaks
+     will be inserted if they do not fit into one line.  The separators
+     can be curly braces, brackets, switches for inline math ('$', '\(',
+     '\)') and switches for display math ('\[', '\]').  Such formatting
+     can be useful to make macros and math more visible or to prevent
+     overfull lines in the LaTeX source in case a package for displaying
+     formatted TeX output inside the Emacs buffer, like preview-latex,
+     is used.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-fill-break-before-code-comments
+     Code comments are comments preceded by some other text in the same
+     line.  When a paragraph containing such a comment is to be filled,
+     the comment start will be seen as a border after which no line
+     breaks will be inserted in the same line.  If the option
+     'LaTeX-fill-break-before-code-comments' is enabled (which is the
+     default) and the comment does not fit into the line, a line break
+     will be inserted before the last non-comment word to minimize the
+     chance that the line becomes overfull.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-fill-excluded-macros
+     A list of macro names (without leading backslash) for whose
+     arguments filling should be disabled.  Typically, you will want to
+     add macros here which have long, multi-line arguments.  An example
+     is '\pgfplotstabletypeset' from the pgfplotstable package which is
+     used as shown in the following listing:
+
+     \pgfplotstabletypeset[skip first n=4]{%
+       XYZ Format,
+       Version 1.234
+       Date 2010-09-01
+       @author Mustermann
+       A B C
+       1 2 3
+       4 5 6
+     }
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Display,  Next: Processing,  Prev: Editing,  Up: Top
+
+3 Controlling Screen Display
+****************************
+
+It is often desirable to get visual help of what markup code in a text
+actually does without having to decipher it explicitly.  For this
+purpose Emacs and AUCTeX provide font locking (also known as syntax
+highlighting) which visually sets off markup code like macros or
+environments by using different colors or fonts.  For example text to be
+typeset in italics can be displayed with an italic font in the editor as
+well, or labels and references get their own distinct color.
+
+   While font locking helps you grasp the purpose of markup code and
+separate markup from content, the markup code can still be distracting.
+AUCTeX lets you hide those parts and show them again at request with its
+built-in support for hiding macros and environments which we call
+folding here.
+
+   Besides folding of macros and environments, AUCTeX provides support
+for Emacs' outline mode which lets you narrow the buffer content to
+certain sections of your text by hiding the parts not belonging to these
+sections.
+
+   Moreover, you can focus in a specific portion of the code by
+narrowing the buffer to the desired region.  AUCTeX provides also
+functions to narrow the buffer to the current group and to LaTeX
+environments.
+
+   AUCTeX also provides some WYSIWYG features.
+
+   First, you can customize 'font-latex-fontify-script' to enable
+special formatting of '^' superscripts and '_' subscripts (*note Font
+Locking::).
+
+   Secondly, AUCTeX with GNU Emacs 25 or later can display certain math
+macros using Unicode characters, e.g., '\alpha' as α.  This is called
+prettification and is lightweight and reasonable robust (*note
+Prettifying::).
+
+   A more accurate approach is provided by preview-latex, a subsystem of
+AUCTeX, see *note Introduction: (preview-latex)Top.  This system uses
+LaTeX to generate images that are then displayed in your buffer.  It is
+extremely accurate but can be fragile with some packages (like older pgf
+versions).
+
+   Please note that you can use prettification and preview-latex
+together.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Font Locking::                Font Locking
+* Folding::                     Folding Macros and Environments
+* Outline::                     Outlining the Document
+* Narrowing::                   Restricting display and editing to a portion of the buffer
+* Prettifying::                 Displaying Greek and math macros as Unicode characters
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Font Locking,  Next: Folding,  Up: Display
+
+3.1 Font Locking
+================
+
+Font locking is supposed to improve readability of the source code by
+highlighting certain keywords with different colors or fonts.  It
+thereby lets you recognize the function of markup code to a certain
+extent without having to read the markup command.  For general
+information on controlling font locking with Emacs' Font Lock mode, see
+*note Font Lock Mode: (emacs)Font Lock.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-install-font-lock
+     Once font locking is enabled globally or for the major modes
+     provided by AUCTeX, the font locking patterns and functionality of
+     font-latex are activated by default.  You can switch to a different
+     font locking scheme or disable font locking in AUCTeX by
+     customizing the variable 'TeX-install-font-lock'.
+
+     Besides font-latex AUCTeX ships with a scheme which is derived from
+     Emacs' default LaTeX mode and activated by choosing
+     'tex-font-setup'.  Be aware that this scheme is not coupled with
+     AUCTeX's style system and not the focus of development.  Therefore
+     and due to font-latex being much more feature-rich the following
+     explanations will only cover font-latex.
+
+     In case you want to hook in your own fontification scheme, you can
+     choose 'other' and insert the name of the function which sets up
+     your font locking patterns.  If you want to disable fontification
+     in AUCTeX completely, choose 'ignore'.
+
+   font-latex provides many options for customization which are
+accessible with 'M-x customize-group <RET> font-latex <RET>'.  For this
+description the various options are explained in conceptional groups.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Fontification of macros::     Fontification of macros
+* Fontification of quotes::     Fontification of quotes
+* Fontification of math::       Fontification of math constructs
+* Verbatim content::            Verbatim macros and environments
+* Faces::                       Faces used by font-latex
+* Known problems::              Known fontification problems
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Fontification of macros,  Next: Fontification of quotes,  Up: Font Locking
+
+3.1.1 Fontification of macros
+-----------------------------
+
+Highlighting of macros can be customized by adapting keyword lists which
+can be found in the customization group 'font-latex-keywords'.
+
+   Three types of macros can be handled differently with respect to
+fontification:
+
+  1. Commands of the form '\foo[bar]{baz}' which consist of the macro
+     itself, optional arguments in square brackets and mandatory
+     arguments in curly braces.  For the command itself the face
+     'font-lock-keyword-face' will be used and for the optional
+     arguments the face 'font-lock-variable-name-face'.  The face
+     applied to the mandatory argument depends on the macro class
+     represented by the respective built-in variables.
+  2. Declaration macros of the form '{\foo text}' which consist of the
+     macro which may be enclosed in a TeX group together with text to be
+     affected by the macro.  In case a TeX group is present, the macro
+     will get the face 'font-lock-keyword-face' and the text will get
+     the face configured for the respective macro class.  If no TeX
+     group is present, the latter face will be applied to the macro
+     itself.
+  3. Simple macros of the form '\foo' which do not have any arguments or
+     groupings.  The respective face will be applied to the macro
+     itself.
+
+   Customization variables for '\foo[bar]{baz}' type macros allow both
+the macro name and the sequence of arguments to be specified.  The
+latter is done with a string which can contain the characters
+'*'
+     indicating the existence of a starred variant for the macro,
+'['
+     for optional arguments in brackets,
+'{'
+     for mandatory arguments in braces,
+'\'
+     for mandatory arguments consisting of a single macro and
+'|'
+     as a prefix indicating that two alternatives are following.
+   For example the specifier for '\documentclass' would be '[{' because
+the macro has one optional followed by one mandatory argument.  The
+specifier for '\newcommand' would be '*|{\[[{' because there is a
+starred variant, the mandatory argument following the macro name can be
+a macro or a TeX group which can be followed by two optional arguments
+and the last token is a mandatory argument in braces.
+
+   Customization variables for the '{\foo text}' and '\foo' types are
+simple lists of strings where each entry is a macro name (without the
+leading backslash).
+
+General macro classes
+---------------------
+
+font-latex provides keyword lists for different macro classes which are
+described in the following table:
+
+'font-latex-match-function-keywords'
+     Keywords for macros defining or related to functions, like
+     '\newcommand'.
+     Type: '\macro[...]{...}'
+     Face: 'font-lock-function-name-face'
+
+'font-latex-match-reference-keywords'
+     Keywords for macros defining or related to references, like '\ref'.
+     Type: '\macro[...]{...}'
+     Face: 'font-lock-constant-face'
+
+'font-latex-match-textual-keywords'
+     Keywords for macros specifying textual content, like '\caption'.
+     Type: '\macro[...]{...}'
+     Face: 'font-lock-type-face'
+
+'font-latex-match-variable-keywords'
+     Keywords for macros defining or related to variables, like
+     '\setlength'.
+     Type: '\macro[...]{...}'
+     Face: 'font-lock-variable-name-face'
+
+'font-latex-match-warning-keywords'
+     Keywords for important macros, e.g. affecting line or page break,
+     like '\clearpage'.
+     Type: '\macro'
+     Face: 'font-latex-warning-face'
+
+Sectioning commands
+-------------------
+
+Sectioning commands are macros like '\chapter' or '\section'.  For these
+commands there are two fontification schemes which may be selected by
+customizing the variable 'font-latex-fontify-sectioning'.
+
+ -- User Option: font-latex-fontify-sectioning
+     Per default sectioning commands will be shown in a larger,
+     proportional font, which corresponds to a number for this variable.
+     The font size varies with the sectioning level, e.g. '\part'
+     ('font-latex-sectioning-0-face') has a larger font than
+     '\paragraph' ('font-latex-sectioning-5-face').  Typically, values
+     from 1.05 to 1.3 for 'font-latex-fontify-sectioning' give best
+     results, depending on your font setup.  If you rather like to use
+     the base font and a different color, set the variable to the symbol
+     'color'.  In this case the face 'font-lock-type-face' will be used
+     to fontify the argument of the sectioning commands.
+
+   You can make font-latex aware of your own sectioning commands be
+adding them to the keyword lists:
+'font-latex-match-sectioning-0-keywords'
+('font-latex-sectioning-0-face') ...
+'font-latex-match-sectioning-5-keywords'
+('font-latex-sectioning-5-face').
+
+   Related to sectioning there is special support for slide titles which
+may be fontified with the face 'font-latex-slide-title-face'.  You can
+add macros which should appear in this face by customizing the variable
+'font-latex-match-slide-title-keywords'.
+
+Commands for changing fonts
+---------------------------
+
+LaTeX provides various macros for changing fonts or font attributes.
+For example, you can select an italic font with '\textit{...}' or bold
+with '\textbf{...}'.  An alternative way to specify these fonts is to
+use special macros in TeX groups, like '{\itshape ...}' for italics and
+'{\bfseries ...}' for bold.  As mentioned above, we call the former
+variants commands and the latter declarations.
+
+   Besides the macros for changing fonts provided by LaTeX there is an
+infinite number of other macros--either defined by yourself for logical
+markup or defined by macro packages--which affect the font in the
+typeset text.  While LaTeX's built-in macros and macros of packages
+known by AUCTeX are already handled by font-latex, different keyword
+lists per type style and macro type are provided for entering your own
+macros which are listed in the table below.
+
+'font-latex-match-bold-command-keywords'
+     Keywords for commands specifying a bold type style.
+     Face: 'font-latex-bold-face'
+'font-latex-match-italic-command-keywords'
+     Keywords for commands specifying an italic font.
+     Face: 'font-latex-italic-face'
+'font-latex-match-math-command-keywords'
+     Keywords for commands specifying a math font.
+     Face: 'font-latex-math-face'
+'font-latex-match-type-command-keywords'
+     Keywords for commands specifying a typewriter font.
+     Face: 'font-lock-type-face'
+'font-latex-match-bold-declaration-keywords'
+     Keywords for declarations specifying a bold type style.
+     Face: 'font-latex-bold-face'
+'font-latex-match-italic-declaration-keywords'
+     Keywords for declarations specifying an italic font.
+     Face: 'font-latex-italic-face'
+'font-latex-match-type-declaration-keywords'
+     Keywords for declarations specifying a typewriter font.
+     Face: 'font-latex-type-face'
+
+Deactivating defaults of built-in keyword classes
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+font-latex ships with predefined lists of keywords for the classes
+described above.  You can disable these defaults per class by
+customizing the variable 'font-latex-deactivated-keyword-classes'.  This
+is a list of strings for keyword classes to be deactivated.  Valid
+entries are "warning", "variable", "biblatexnoarg", "biblatex",
+"reference", "function" , "sectioning-0", "sectioning-1",
+"sectioning-2", "sectioning-3", "sectioning-4", "sectioning-5",
+"slide-title", "textual", "bold-command", "italic-command",
+"math-command", "type-command", "bold-declaration",
+"italic-declaration", "type-declaration".
+
+   You can also get rid of certain keywords only.  For example if you
+want to remove highlighting of footnotes as references you can put the
+following stanza into your init file:
+
+     (eval-after-load "font-latex"
+       '(setq-default
+         font-latex-match-reference-keywords-local
+         (remove (assoc-string "footnote"
+                 font-latex-match-reference-keywords-local)
+                     font-latex-match-reference-keywords-local)))
+
+   But note that this means fiddling with font-latex's internals and is
+not guaranteed to work in future versions of font-latex.
+
+User-defined keyword classes
+----------------------------
+
+In case the customization options explained above do not suffice for
+your needs, you can specify your own keyword classes by customizing the
+variable 'font-latex-user-keyword-classes'.
+
+ -- User Option: font-latex-user-keyword-classes
+     Every keyword class consists of four parts, a name, a list of
+     keywords, a face and a specifier for the type of macros to be
+     highlighted.
+
+     When adding new entries, you have to use unique values for the
+     class names, i.e. they must not clash with names of the built-in
+     keyword classes or other names given by you.  Additionally the
+     names must not contain spaces.
+
+     The list of keywords defines which commands and declarations should
+     be covered by the keyword class.  A keyword can either be a simple
+     command name omitting the leading backslash or a list consisting of
+     the command name and a string specifying the sequence of arguments
+     for the command.
+
+     The face argument can either be an existing face or face attributes
+     made by you.
+
+     There are three alternatives for the type of keywords--"Command
+     with arguments", "Declaration inside TeX group" and "Command
+     without arguments"--which correspond with the macro types explained
+     above.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Fontification of quotes,  Next: Fontification of math,  Prev: Fontification of macros,  Up: Font Locking
+
+3.1.2 Fontification of quotes
+-----------------------------
+
+Text in quotation marks is displayed with the face
+'font-latex-string-face'.  Besides the various forms of opening and
+closing double and single quotation marks, so-called guillemets (<<, >>)
+can be used for quoting.  Because there are two styles of using
+them--French style: << text >>; German style: >>text<<--you can
+customize the variable 'font-latex-quotes' to tell font-latex which type
+you are using if the correct value cannot be derived from document
+properties.
+
+ -- User Option: font-latex-quotes
+     The default value of 'font-latex-quotes' is 'auto' which means that
+     font-latex will try to derive the correct type of quotation mark
+     matching from document properties like the language option supplied
+     to the babel LaTeX package.
+
+     If the automatic detection fails for you and you mostly use one
+     specific style you can set it to a specific language-dependent
+     value as well.  Set the value to 'german' if you are using >>German
+     quotes<< and to 'french' if you are using << French quotes >>.
+     font-latex will recognize the different ways these quotes can be
+     given in your source code, i.e. ('"<', '">'), ('<<', '>>') and the
+     respective 8-bit variants.
+
+     If you set 'font-latex-quotes' to nil, quoted content will not be
+     fontified.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Fontification of math,  Next: Verbatim content,  Prev: Fontification of quotes,  Up: Font Locking
+
+3.1.3 Fontification of mathematical constructs
+----------------------------------------------
+
+In LaTeX mathematics can be indicated by a variety of different methods:
+toggles (like dollar signs), macros and environments.  Math constructs
+known by font-latex are displayed with the face 'font-latex-math-face'.
+Support for dollar signs and shorthands like '\(...\)' or '\[...\]' is
+built-in and not customizable.  Support for other math macros and
+environments can be adapted by customizing the variables
+'font-latex-match-math-command-keywords' and 'texmathp-tex-commands'
+respectively.  It is no longer recommended to customize
+'font-latex-math-environments'.
+
+   To convert your customization in 'font-latex-math-environments' into
+'texmathp-tex-commands', please register your own math environments,
+together with starred variants if any, as entries of 'env-on' type in
+'texmathp-tex-commands', then clear out 'font-latex-math-environments'.
+You have to restart Emacs for this new customization to take effect for
+fontification.
+
+   In order to make math constructs more readable, font-latex displays
+subscript and superscript parts in a smaller font and raised or lowered
+respectively.  This fontification feature can be controlled with the
+variables 'font-latex-fontify-script' and 'font-latex-script-display'.
+
+ -- User Option: font-latex-fontify-script
+     If non-nil, fontify subscript and superscript strings.  Concretely,
+     this means that the scripts are raised or lowered.
+
+     Another possiblity is setting this variable to the symbol
+     'multi-level'.  In this case, in a formula x^{y^z}, y is raised
+     above and smaller than x, and z is raised above and smaller than y.
+     With many script levels, the text might become too small to be
+     readable.  (See 'font-latex-fontify-script-max-level' below.)
+
+     Lastly, you can set this variable to 'invisible' whose behavior is
+     like 'multi-level', and in addition the super-/subscript characters
+     ^ and _ are not displayed.
+
+ -- User Option: font-latex-fontify-script-max-level
+     Maximum scriptification level for which script faces are applied.
+
+     The faces 'font-latex-superscript-face' and
+     'font-latex-subscript-face' define custom ':height' values < 1.0.
+     Therefore, scripts are displayed with a slightly smaller font than
+     normal math text.  If 'font-latex-fontify-script' is 'multi-level'
+     or 'invisible', the font size becomes too small to be readable
+     after a few levels.  This option allows to specify the maximum
+     level after which the size of the script text won’t be shrunken
+     anymore.
+
+     For example, in the expression x^{y^{z^a_b}}, x has scriptification
+     level 0, y has level 1, z has level 2, and both a and b have
+     scriptification level 3.
+
+     If 'font-latex-fontify-script-max-level' was 2, then z, a, and b
+     would have the same font size.  If it was 3 or more, then a and b
+     were smaller than z just in the same way as z is smaller than y and
+     y is smaller than x.
+
+   The script characters '^' and '_' themselves are also fontified with
+an own face named 'font-latex-script-char-face'.
+
+ -- User Option: font-latex-script-display
+     Display specification for subscript and superscript content.  The
+     car is used for subscript, the cdr is used for superscript.  The
+     feature is implemented using so-called display properties.  For
+     information on what exactly to specify for the values, see *note
+     Other Display Specifications: (elisp)Other Display Specs.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Verbatim content,  Next: Faces,  Prev: Fontification of math,  Up: Font Locking
+
+3.1.4 Verbatim macros and environments
+--------------------------------------
+
+Usually it is not desirable to have content to be typeset verbatim
+highlighted according to LaTeX syntax.  Therefore this content will be
+fontified uniformly with the face 'font-latex-verbatim-face'.
+
+   font-latex differentiates three different types of verbatim
+constructs for fontification.  Macros with special characters like | as
+delimiters, macros with braces, and environments.  Which macros and
+environments are recognized is controlled by the variables
+'LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-delims',
+'LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-braces', and 'LaTeX-verbatim-environments'
+respectively.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Faces,  Next: Known problems,  Prev: Verbatim content,  Up: Font Locking
+
+3.1.5 Faces used by font-latex
+------------------------------
+
+In case you want to change the colors and fonts used by font-latex
+please refer to the faces mentioned in the explanations above and use
+'M-x customize-face <RET> <face> <RET>'.  All faces defined by
+font-latex are accessible through a customization group by typing 'M-x
+customize-group <RET> font-latex-highlighting-faces <RET>'.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Known problems,  Prev: Faces,  Up: Font Locking
+
+3.1.6 Known fontification problems
+----------------------------------
+
+In certain cases the fontification machinery fails to interpret buffer
+contents correctly.  This can lead to color bleed, i.e. large parts of a
+buffer get fontified with an inappropriate face.  A typical situation
+for this to happen is the use of a dollar sign ('$') in a verbatim macro
+or environment.  If font-latex is not aware of the verbatim construct,
+it assumes the dollar sign to be a toggle for mathematics and fontifies
+the following buffer content with the respective face until it finds a
+closing dollar sign or till the end of the buffer.
+
+   As a remedy you can make the verbatim construct known to font-latex
+(*note Verbatim content::).  If this is not possible, you can insert a
+commented dollar sign ('%$') at the next suitable end of line as a quick
+workaround.  In docTeX documents, '^^A$' is also available for similar
+purpose.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Folding,  Next: Outline,  Prev: Font Locking,  Up: Display
+
+3.2 Folding Macros and Environments
+===================================
+
+A popular complaint about markup languages like TeX and LaTeX is that
+there is too much clutter in the source text and that one cannot focus
+well on the content.  There are macros where you are only interested in
+the content they are enclosing, like font specifiers where the content
+might already be fontified in a special way by font locking.  Or macros
+the content of which you only want to see when actually editing it, like
+footnotes or citations.  Similarly you might find certain environments
+or comments distracting when trying to concentrate on the body of your
+document.
+
+   With AUCTeX's folding functionality you can collapse those items and
+replace them by a fixed string, the content of one of their arguments,
+or a mixture of both.  If you want to make the original text visible
+again in order to view or edit it, move point sideways onto the
+placeholder (also called display string) or left-click with the mouse
+pointer on it.  The macro or environment will unfold automatically, stay
+open as long as point is inside of it and collapse again once you move
+point out of it.  (Note that folding of environments currently does not
+work in every AUCTeX mode.)
+
+   In order to use this feature, you have to activate 'TeX-fold-mode'
+which will activate the auto-reveal feature and the necessary commands
+to hide and show macros and environments.  You can activate the mode in
+a certain buffer by typing the command 'M-x TeX-fold-mode <RET>' or
+using the keyboard shortcut 'C-c C-o C-f'.  If you want to use it every
+time you edit a LaTeX document, add it to a hook:
+
+     (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook (lambda ()
+                                  (TeX-fold-mode 1)))
+
+   If it should be activated in all AUCTeX modes, use 'TeX-mode-hook'
+instead of 'LaTeX-mode-hook'.
+
+   Once the mode is active there are several commands available to hide
+and show macros, environments and comments:
+
+ -- Command: TeX-fold-buffer
+     ('C-c C-o C-b') Hide all foldable items in the current buffer
+     according to the setting of 'TeX-fold-type-list'.
+
+     If you want to have this done automatically every time you open a
+     file, add it to a hook and make sure the function is called after
+     font locking is set up for the buffer.  The following code should
+     accomplish this:
+
+          (add-hook 'find-file-hook #'TeX-fold-buffer t)
+
+     The command can be used any time to refresh the whole buffer and
+     fold any new macros and environments which were inserted after the
+     last invocation of the command.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-fold-type-list
+     List of symbols determining the item classes to consider for
+     folding.  This can be macros, environments and comments.  Per
+     default only macros and environments are folded.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-fold-force-fontify
+     In order for all folded content to get the right faces, the whole
+     buffer has to be fontified before folding is carried out.
+     'TeX-fold-buffer' therefore will force fontification of unfontified
+     regions.  As this will prolong the time folding takes, you can
+     prevent forced fontification by customizing the variable
+     'TeX-fold-force-fontify'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-fold-auto
+     By default, a macro inserted with 'TeX-insert-macro' ('C-c C-m')
+     will not be folded.  Set this variable to a non-nil value to
+     aumatically fold macros as soon as they are inserted.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-fold-preserve-comments
+     By default items found in comments will be folded.  If your
+     comments often contain unfinished code this might lead to problems.
+     Give this variable a non-nil value and foldable items in your
+     comments will be left alone.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-fold-unfold-around-mark
+     When this variable is non-nil and there is an active regione, text
+     around the mark will be kept unfolded.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-fold-region
+     ('C-c C-o C-r') Hide all configured macros in the marked region.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-fold-paragraph
+     ('C-c C-o C-p') Hide all configured macros in the paragraph
+     containing point.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-fold-macro
+     ('C-c C-o C-m') Hide the macro on which point currently is located.
+     If the name of the macro is found in 'TeX-fold-macro-spec-list',
+     the respective display string will be shown instead.  If it is not
+     found, the name of the macro in sqare brackets or the default
+     string for unspecified macros
+     ('TeX-fold-unspec-macro-display-string') will be shown, depending
+     on the value of the variable 'TeX-fold-unspec-use-name'.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-fold-env
+     ('C-c C-o C-e') Hide the environment on which point currently is
+     located.  The behavior regarding the display string is analogous to
+     'TeX-fold-macro' and determined by the variables
+     'TeX-fold-env-spec-list' and 'TeX-fold-unspec-env-display-string'
+     respectively.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-fold-math
+     Hide the math macro on which point currently is located.  If the
+     name of the macro is found in 'TeX-fold-math-spec-list', the
+     respective display string will be shown instead.  If it is not
+     found, the name of the macro in sqare brackets or the default
+     string for unspecified macros
+     ('TeX-fold-unspec-macro-display-string') will be shown, depending
+     on the value of the variable 'TeX-fold-unspec-use-name'.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-fold-comment
+     ('C-c C-o C-c') Hide the comment point is located on.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-fold-clearout-buffer
+     ('C-c C-o b') Permanently unfold all macros and environments in the
+     current buffer.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-fold-clearout-region
+     ('C-c C-o r') Permanently unfold all macros and environments in the
+     marked region.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-fold-clearout-paragraph
+     ('C-c C-o p') Permanently unfold all macros and environments in the
+     paragraph containing point.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-fold-clearout-item
+     ('C-c C-o i') Permanently show the macro or environment on which
+     point currently is located.  In contrast to temporarily opening the
+     macro when point is moved sideways onto it, the macro will be
+     permanently unfolded and will not collapse again once point is
+     leaving it.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-fold-dwim
+     ('C-c C-o C-o') Hide or show items according to the current
+     context.  If there is folded content, unfold it.  If there is a
+     marked region, fold all configured content in this region.  If
+     there is no folded content but a macro or environment, fold it.
+
+   In case you want to use a different prefix than 'C-c C-o' for these
+commands you can customize the variable 'TeX-fold-command-prefix'.
+(Note that this will not change the key binding for activating the
+mode.)
+
+   The commands above will only take macros or environments into
+consideration which are specified in the variables
+'TeX-fold-macro-spec-list' or 'TeX-fold-env-spec-list' respectively.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-fold-macro-spec-list
+     List of replacement specifiers and macros to fold.  The specifier
+     can be a string, an integer or a function symbol.
+
+     If you specify a string, it will be used as a display replacement
+     for the whole macro.  Numbers in braces, brackets, parens or angle
+     brackets will be replaced by the respective macro argument.  For
+     example '{1}' will be replaced by the first mandatory argument of
+     the macro.  One can also define alternatives within the specifier
+     which are used if an argument is not found.  Alternatives are
+     separated by '||'.  They are most useful with optional arguments.
+     As an example, the default specifier for '\item' is '[1]:||*' which
+     means that if there is an optional argument, its value is shown
+     followed by a colon.  If there is no optional argument, only an
+     asterisk is used as the display string.
+
+     If you specify a number as the first element, the content of the
+     respective mandatory argument of a LaTeX macro will be used as the
+     placeholder.
+
+     If the first element is a function symbol, the function will be
+     called with all mandatory arguments of the macro and the result of
+     the function call will be used as a replacement for the macro.
+
+     The placeholder is made by copying the text from the buffer
+     together with its properties, i.e. its face as well.  If
+     fontification has not happened when this is done (e.g. because of
+     lazy font locking) the intended fontification will not show up.  As
+     a workaround you can leave Emacs idle a few seconds and wait for
+     stealth font locking to finish before you fold the buffer.  Or you
+     just re-fold the buffer with 'TeX-fold-buffer' when you notice a
+     wrong fontification.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-fold-env-spec-list
+     List of display strings or argument numbers and environments to
+     fold.  Argument numbers refer to the '\begin' statement.  That
+     means if you have e.g. '\begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{XXX} ...
+     \end{tabularx}' and specify 3 as the argument number, the resulting
+     display string will be "XXX".
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-fold-math-spec-list
+     List of display strings and math macros to fold.
+
+   The variables 'TeX-fold-macro-spec-list', 'TeX-fold-env-spec-list',
+and 'TeX-fold-math-spec-list' apply to any AUCTeX mode.  If you want to
+make settings which are only applied to LaTeX mode, you can use the
+mode-specific variables 'LaTeX-fold-macro-spec-list',
+'LaTeX-fold-env-spec-list', and 'LaTeX-fold-math-spec-list'
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-fold-unspec-macro-display-string
+     Default display string for macros which are not specified in
+     'TeX-fold-macro-spec-list'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-fold-unspec-env-display-string
+     Default display string for environments which are not specified in
+     'TeX-fold-env-spec-list'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-fold-unspec-use-name
+     If non-nil the name of the macro or environment surrounded by
+     square brackets is used as display string, otherwise the defaults
+     specified in 'TeX-fold-unspec-macro-display-string' or
+     'TeX-fold-unspec-env-display-string' respectively.
+
+   When you hover with the mouse pointer over folded content, its
+original text will be shown in a tooltip or the echo area depending on
+Tooltip mode being activate.  In order to avoid exorbitantly big
+tooltips and to cater for the limited space in the echo area the content
+will be cropped after a certain amount of characters defined by the
+variable 'TeX-fold-help-echo-max-length'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-fold-help-echo-max-length
+     Maximum length of original text displayed in a tooltip or the echo
+     area for folded content.  Set it to zero in order to disable this
+     feature.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Outline,  Next: Narrowing,  Prev: Folding,  Up: Display
+
+3.3 Outlining the Document
+==========================
+
+AUCTeX supports the standard outline minor mode using LaTeX/ConTeXt
+sectioning commands as header lines.  *Note Outline Mode: (emacs)Outline
+Mode.
+
+   You can add your own headings by setting the variable
+'TeX-outline-extra'.
+
+ -- Variable: TeX-outline-extra
+     List of extra TeX outline levels.
+
+     Each element is a list with two entries.  The first entry is the
+     regular expression matching a header, and the second is the level
+     of the header.  A '^' is automatically prepended to the regular
+     expressions in the list, so they must match text at the beginning
+     of the line.
+
+     See 'LaTeX-section-list' or 'ConTeXt-INTERFACE-section-list' for
+     existing header levels.
+
+   The following example add '\item' and '\bibliography' headers, with
+'\bibliography' at the same outline level as '\section', and '\item'
+being below '\subparagraph'.
+
+     (setq TeX-outline-extra
+           '(("[ \t]*\\\\\\(bib\\)?item\\b" 7)
+             ("\\\\bibliography\\b" 2)))
+
+   You may want to check out the unbundled 'out-xtra' package for even
+better outline support.  It is available from your favorite emacs lisp
+archive.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Narrowing,  Next: Prettifying,  Prev: Outline,  Up: Display
+
+3.4 Narrowing
+=============
+
+Sometimes you want to focus your attention to a limited region of the
+code.  You can do that by restricting the text addressable by editing
+commands and hiding the rest of the buffer with the narrowing functions,
+*note (emacs)Narrowing::.  In addition, AUCTeX provides a couple of
+other commands to narrow the buffer to a group, i.e. a region enclosed
+in a pair of curly braces, and to LaTeX environments.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-narrow-to-group
+     ('C-x n g') Make text outside current group invisible.
+
+ -- Command: LaTeX-narrow-to-environment COUNT
+     ('C-x n e') Make text outside current environment invisible.  With
+     optional argument COUNT keep visible that number of enclosing
+     environmens.
+
+   Like other standard narrowing functions, the above commands are
+disabled.  Attempting to use them asks for confirmation and gives you
+the option of enabling them; if you enable the commands, confirmation
+will no longer be required for them.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Prettifying,  Prev: Narrowing,  Up: Display
+
+3.5 Prettifying
+===============
+
+Emacs 25 is able to prettify symbols in programming language buffers,
+*note (emacs)Misc for Programs::.  The canonical example is to display
+'(lambda () ...)' as '(λ () ...)' in Lisp buffers.
+
+   AUCTeX can use this feature in order to display certain math macros
+and greek letters using their Unicode representation, too.  For example,
+the TeX code '\alpha \times \beta' will be displayed as 'α × β'.  When
+point is on one of the characters, it'll be unprettified automatically,
+meaning you see the verbatim text again.  For this behaviour however you
+need to set 'prettify-symbols-unprettify-at-point' to t or 'right-edge'
+which will unprettify the symbol when point moves into or near it.
+
+   To enable prettification in AUCTeX, simply add
+'prettify-symbols-mode' to 'TeX-mode-hook'.  If you enabled
+prettification globally with 'global-prettify-symbols-mode', then it's
+automatically enabled in AUCTeX, too.
+
+   You can also add custom symbol unicode-character pairs for
+prettification by adding to 'tex--prettify-symbols-alist'.  Note that
+this variable is part of Emacs' stock 'tex-mode.el' and used by that and
+AUCTeX.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Processing,  Next: Customization,  Prev: Display,  Up: Top
+
+4 Starting Processors, Viewers and Other Programs
+*************************************************
+
+The most powerful features of AUCTeX may be those allowing you to run
+TeX, LaTeX, ConTeXt and other external commands like BibTeX and
+'makeindex' from within Emacs, viewing and printing the results, and
+moreover allowing you to _debug_ your documents.
+
+   AUCTeX comes with a special tool bar for TeX and LaTeX which provides
+buttons for the most important commands.  You can enable or disable it
+by customizing the options 'plain-TeX-enable-toolbar' and
+'LaTeX-enable-toolbar' in the 'TeX-tool-bar' customization group.  You
+can also customize the buttons by the options 'TeX-bar-TeX-buttons',
+'TeX-bar-TeX-all-button-alists', 'TeX-bar-LaTeX-buttons' and
+'TeX-bar-LaTeX-button-alist'.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Commands::                    Invoking external commands.
+* Viewing::                     Invoking external viewers.
+* Debugging::                   Debugging TeX and LaTeX output.
+* Checking::                    Checking the document.
+* Control::                     Controlling the processes.
+* Cleaning::                    Cleaning intermediate and output files.
+* Documentation::               Documentation about macros and packages.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Commands,  Next: Viewing,  Up: Processing
+
+4.1 Executing Commands
+======================
+
+Formatting the document with TeX, LaTeX or ConTeXt, viewing with a
+previewer, printing the document, running BibTeX, making an index, or
+checking the document with 'lacheck' or 'chktex' all require running an
+external command.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Starting a Command::          Starting a Command on a Document or Region
+* Selecting a Command::         Selecting and Executing a Command
+* Processor Options::           Options for TeX Processors
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Starting a Command,  Next: Selecting a Command,  Up: Commands
+
+4.1.1 Starting a Command on a Document or Region
+------------------------------------------------
+
+There are two ways to run an external command, you can either run it on
+the current document with 'TeX-command-master', or on the current region
+with 'TeX-command-region'.  A special case of running TeX on a region is
+'TeX-command-buffer' which differs from 'TeX-command-master' if the
+current buffer is not its own master file.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-command-master
+     ('C-c C-c') Query the user for a command, and run it on the master
+     file associated with the current buffer.  The name of the master
+     file is controlled by the variable 'TeX-master'.  The available
+     commands are controlled by the variable 'TeX-command-list'.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-command-region
+     ('C-c C-r') Query the user for a command, and run it on the
+     contents of the selected region.  The region contents are written
+     into the region file, after extracting the header and trailer from
+     the master file.  If mark is inactive (which can happen with
+     Transient Mark mode), use the old region.  See also the command
+     'TeX-pin-region' about how to fix a region.
+
+     The name of the region file is controlled by the variable
+     'TeX-region'.  The name of the master file is controlled by the
+     variable 'TeX-master'.  The header is all text up to the line
+     matching the regular expression 'TeX-header-end'.  The trailer is
+     all text from the line matching the regular expression
+     'TeX-trailer-start'.  The available commands are controlled by the
+     variable 'TeX-command-list'.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-command-buffer
+     ('C-c C-b') Query the user for a command, and apply it to the
+     contents of the current buffer.  The buffer contents are written
+     into the region file, after extracting the header and trailer from
+     the master file.  The command is then actually run on the region
+     file.  See above for details.
+
+ -- Command: LaTeX-command-section
+     ('C-c C-z') Query the user for a command, and apply it to the
+     current section (or part, chapter, subsection, paragraph, or
+     subparagraph).  What makes the current section is determined by
+     'LaTeX-command-section-level' which can be enlarged/shrunken using
+     'LaTeX-command-section-change-level' ('C-c M-z').  The given
+     numeric prefix arg is added to the current value of
+     'LaTeX-command-section-level'.  By default,
+     'LaTeX-command-section-level' is initialized with the current
+     document's 'LaTeX-largest-level'.  The buffer contents are written
+     into the region file, after extracting the header and trailer from
+     the master file.  The command is then actually run on the region
+     file.  See 'TeX-command-region' for details.
+
+   It is also possible to compile automatically the whole document until
+it is ready with a single command: 'TeX-command-run-all'.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-command-run-all
+     ('C-c C-a') Compile the current document until an error occurs or
+     it is finished.  If compilation finishes successfully, run the
+     viewer at the end.
+
+   Here are some relevant variables.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-region
+     The name of the file for temporarily storing the text when
+     formatting the current region.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-header-end
+     A regular expression matching the end of the header.  By default,
+     this is '\begin{document}' in LaTeX mode and '%**end of header' in
+     plain TeX mode.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-trailer-start
+     A regular expression matching the start of the trailer.  By
+     default, this is '\end{document}' in LaTeX mode and '\bye' in plain
+     TeX mode.
+
+   If you want to change the values of 'TeX-header-end' and
+'TeX-trailer-start' you can do this for all files by setting the
+variables in a mode hook or per file by specifying them as file
+variables (*note (emacs)File Variables::).
+
+ -- Command: TeX-pin-region
+     ('C-c C-t C-r') If you don't have a mode like Transient Mark mode
+     active, where marks get disabled automatically, the region would
+     need to get properly set before each call to 'TeX-command-region'.
+     If you fix the current region with 'C-c C-t C-r', then it will get
+     used for more commands even though mark and point may change.  An
+     explicitly activated mark, however, will always define a new region
+     when calling 'TeX-command-region'.
+
+   If the last process you started was on the region, the commands
+described in *note Debugging:: and *note Control:: will work on that
+process, otherwise they will work on the process associated with the
+current document.
+
+   Don't run more than one process at the same time.  AUCTeX doesn't
+support simultaneous typeset including region typeset.  Wait for the
+previous process to finish before you start a new process, in particular
+when you are editing multiple documents in parallel.  This limitation
+applies for preview by preview-latex as well.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Selecting a Command,  Next: Processor Options,  Prev: Starting a Command,  Up: Commands
+
+4.1.2 Selecting and Executing a Command
+---------------------------------------
+
+Once you started the command selection with 'C-c C-c', 'C-c C-r' or 'C-c
+C-b' you will be prompted for the type of command.  AUCTeX will try to
+guess which command is appropriate in the given situation and propose it
+as default.  Usually this is a processor like 'TeX' or 'LaTeX' if the
+document was changed or a viewer if the document was just typeset.
+Other commands can be selected in the minibuffer with completion support
+by typing <TAB>.
+
+   The available commands are defined by the variable
+'TeX-command-list'.  Per default it includes commands for typesetting
+the document (e.g. 'LaTeX'), for viewing the output ('View'), for
+printing ('Print'), for generating an index ('Index') or for spell
+checking ('Spell') to name but a few.  You can also add your own
+commands by adding entries to 'TeX-command-list'.  Refer to its doc
+string for information about its syntax.  You might also want to look at
+'TeX-expand-list' to learn about the expanders you can use in
+'TeX-command-list'.
+
+   Note that the default of the variable occasionally changes.
+Therefore it is advisable to add to the list rather than overwriting it.
+You can do this with a call to 'add-to-list' in your init file.  For
+example, if you wanted to add a command for running a program called
+'foo' on the master or region file, you could do this with the following
+form.
+
+     (eval-after-load "tex"
+       '(add-to-list 'TeX-command-list
+                     '("Foo" "foo %s" TeX-run-command t t :help "Run foo")
+                     t))
+
+   As mentioned before, AUCTeX will try to guess what command you want
+to invoke.  If you want to use another command than 'TeX', 'LaTeX' or
+whatever processor AUCTeX thinks is appropriate for the current mode,
+set the variable 'TeX-command-default'.  You can do this for all files
+by setting it in a mode hook or per file by specifying it as a file
+variable (*note (emacs)File Variables::).
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-command-default
+     The default command to run in this buffer.  Must be an entry in
+     'TeX-command-list'.
+
+   In case you use biblatex in a document, when automatic parsing is
+enabled AUCTeX checks the value of 'backend' option given to biblatex at
+load time to decide whether to use BibTeX or Biber for bibliography
+processing.  Should AUCTeX fail to detect the right backend, you can use
+the file local 'LaTeX-biblatex-use-Biber' variable.
+ -- Variable: LaTeX-biblatex-use-Biber
+     If this boolean variable is set as file local, it tells to AUCTeX
+     whether to use Biber with biblatex.  In this case, the
+     autodetection of the biblatex backend will be overridden.  You may
+     want to set locally this variable if automatic parsing is not
+     enabled.
+
+   After confirming a command to execute, AUCTeX will try to save any
+buffers related to the document, and check if the document needs to be
+reformatted.  If the variable 'TeX-save-query' is non-nil, AUCTeX will
+query before saving each file.  By default AUCTeX will check emacs
+buffers associated with files in the current directory, in one of the
+'TeX-macro-private' directories, and in the 'TeX-macro-global'
+directories.  You can change this by setting the variable
+'TeX-check-path'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-check-path
+     Directory path to search for dependencies.
+
+     If nil, just check the current file.  Used when checking if any
+     files have changed.
+
+   When performing spell checking on a document or a region (invoked
+through AUCTeX's 'Spell' command or 'M-x ispell <RET>'), you want the
+spell checking program to skip certain macro arguments and environments,
+most notably the arguments of referencing macros and the contents of
+verbatim environments.  The skipped parts are controlled by variable
+'ispell-tex-skip-alists' provided by 'ispell.el'.  AUCTeX has a library
+which can be added to this variable depending on the value of
+'TeX-ispell-extend-skip-list' which is set to 't' by default.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-ispell-extend-skip-list
+     This boolean option controls whether AUCTeX activates its extension
+     for skipping certain macro arguments and environments when spell
+     checking.
+
+     When non-'nil', AUCTeX loads the file 'tex-ispell.el' and adds its
+     content to 'ispell-tex-skip-alists'.  This library can and will
+     never be complete, but the interface can be used to add selected
+     and private macro names within your init file or on a file local
+     basis.
+
+     'ispell-tex-skip-alists' has the following structure:
+          (defvar ispell-tex-skip-alists
+            '((;; First list
+               ("\\\\addcontentsline"         ispell-tex-arg-end 2)
+               ("\\\\\\([aA]lph\\|arabic\\)"  ispell-tex-arg-end)
+               ("\\\\makebox"                 ispell-tex-arg-end 0)
+               ("\\\\documentclass" . "\\\\begin{document}"))
+              (;; Second list
+               ("\\(figure\\|table\\)\\*?"  ispell-tex-arg-end 0)
+               ("list"                      ispell-tex-arg-end 2)
+               ("verbatim\\*?" . "\\\\end{verbatim\\*?}")))
+            "Lists of regions to be skipped in TeX mode.
+          First list is used raw.
+          Second list has key placed inside \\begin{}.")
+     Each item is an alist and the structure of it is described in
+     'ispell-skip-region-alist':
+          (defvar ispell-skip-region-alist
+            '((...))
+            "Alist expressing beginning and end of regions not to spell check.
+          The alist key must be a regular expression.
+          Valid forms include:
+            (KEY) - just skip the key.
+            (KEY . REGEXP) - skip to the end of REGEXP.
+                             REGEXP may be string or symbol.
+            (KEY REGEXP) - skip to end of REGEXP.  REGEXP must be a string.
+            (KEY FUNCTION ARGS) - FUNCTION called with ARGS
+                                  returns end of region.")
+
+     Let's go through the first list of 'ispell-tex-skip-alists' line by
+     line:
+          ("\\\\addcontentsline"         ispell-tex-arg-end 2)
+     'KEY' is the string '"\\\\addcontentsline"', 'FUNCTION' is
+     'ispell-tex-arg-end' called with 'ARGS', here '2'.
+     'ispell-tex-arg-end' is a function provided by 'ispell.el' which
+     skips as many subsequent optional arguments in square brackets as
+     it sees and then skips 'ARGS' number of mandatory arguments in
+     braces.  Omitting 'ARGS' means skip '1' mandatory argument.  In
+     practice, when you have something like this in your document:
+          \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Some text}
+     The first two arguments are left out and 'Some text' will be spell
+     checked.  For the next line
+          ("\\\\\\([aA]lph\\|arabic\\)"  ispell-tex-arg-end)
+     the name of the counter as argument is skipped.  Next line is
+          ("\\\\makebox"                 ispell-tex-arg-end 0)
+     where only optional arguments are skipped, the first mandatory
+     argument is checked, e.g.
+          \makebox[0pt][l]{Some text}
+     Finally, the next line
+          ("\\\\documentclass" . "\\\\begin{document}"))
+     ensures that the entire preamble of a document is discarded.
+     Second list works the same; it is more convenient for environments
+     since 'KEY' is wrapped inside '\begin{}'.
+
+     AUCTeX provides two functions to add items to car and cdr of
+     'ispell-tex-arg-end', namely 'TeX-ispell-skip-setcar' and
+     'TeX-ispell-skip-setcdr'.  The argument of these functions is
+     exactly as in 'ispell-tex-skip-alists'.  Additions can be done via
+     init file, e.g.:
+          (eval-after-load "tex-ispell"
+            '(progn
+               (TeX-ispell-skip-setcar
+                '(("\\\\mymacro" ispell-tex-arg-end)))
+               (TeX-ispell-skip-setcdr
+                '(("myverbatim" . "\\\\end{myverbatim}")))))
+
+     Another possibility is to use file local additions at the end of
+     your TeX file, e.g.:
+          %%% Local Variables:
+          %%% mode: latex
+          %%% TeX-master: t
+          %%% eval: (TeX-ispell-skip-setcar '(("\\\\mymacro" . "{[-0-9]+}")))
+          %%% End:
+
+     Finally, AUCTeX provides a function called 'TeX-ispell-tex-arg-end'
+     which sees more arguments than 'ispell-tex-arg-end'.  Refer to its
+     doc string for more information.
+
+   AUCTeX also provides a facility to skip the argument of in-line
+verbatim macros like '\Verb' from 'fancyvrb.sty' or '\mintinline' from
+'minted.sty'.  Characters delimiting the verbatim text are stored in
+'TeX-ispell-verb-delimiters'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-ispell-verb-delimiters
+     String with delimiters recognized for in-line verbatim macros.
+     This variable is initialized to '!|#~"*/+^-'.  Since this string is
+     used to build a character alternative inside a regular expression,
+     special characters '^' and '-' should come last.  Other characters
+     like opening brace '{', asterisk '*' or at sign '@' should be
+     avoided as they are not recognized by 'font-latex.el'.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Processor Options,  Prev: Selecting a Command,  Up: Commands
+
+4.1.3 Options for TeX Processors
+--------------------------------
+
+There are some options you can customize affecting which processors are
+invoked or the way this is done and which output they produce as a
+result.  These options control if DVI or PDF output should be produced,
+if TeX should be started in interactive or nonstop mode, if source
+specials or a SyncTeX file should be produced for making inverse and
+forward search possible or which TeX engine should be used instead of
+regular TeX, like PDFTeX, Omega or XeTeX, and the style error messages
+are printed with.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-PDF-mode
+     ('C-c C-t C-p') This command toggles the PDF mode of AUCTeX, a
+     buffer-local minor mode which is enabled by default.  You can
+     customize 'TeX-PDF-mode' to give it a different default or set it
+     as a file local variable on a per-document basis.  This option
+     usually results in calling either PDFTeX or ordinary TeX.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-DVI-via-PDFTeX
+     If this is set, DVI will also be produced by calling PDFTeX,
+     setting '\pdfoutput=0'.  This makes it possible to use PDFTeX
+     features like character protrusion even when producing DVI files.
+     Contemporary TeX distributions do this anyway, so that you need not
+     enable the option within AUCTeX.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-interactive-mode
+     ('C-c C-t C-i') This command toggles the interactive mode of
+     AUCTeX, a global minor mode.  You can customize
+     'TeX-interactive-mode' to give it a different default.  In
+     interactive mode, TeX will pause with an error prompt when errors
+     are encountered and wait for the user to type something.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-source-correlate-mode
+     ('C-c C-t C-s') Toggles support for forward and inverse search.
+     Forward search refers to jumping to the place in the previewed
+     document corresponding to where point is located in the document
+     source and inverse search to the other way round.  *Note I/O
+     Correlation::.
+
+     You can permanently activate 'TeX-source-correlate-mode' by
+     customizing the variable 'TeX-source-correlate-mode'.  There is a
+     bunch of customization options for the mode, use 'M-x
+     customize-group <RET> TeX-view <RET>' to find out more.
+
+     AUCTeX is aware of three different means to do I/O correlation:
+     source specials (only DVI output), the pdfsync LaTeX package (only
+     PDF output) and SyncTeX.  The choice between source specials and
+     SyncTeX can be controlled with the variable
+     'TeX-source-correlate-method'.
+
+     Should you use source specials it has to be stressed _very_
+     strongly however, that source specials can cause differences in
+     page breaks and spacing, can seriously interfere with various
+     packages and should thus _never_ be used for the final version of a
+     document.  In particular, fine-tuning the page breaks should be
+     done with source specials switched off.
+
+   Sometimes you are requested, by journal rules or packages, to compile
+the document into DVI output.  Thus, if you want a PDF document in the
+end you can either use XeTeX engine, see below for information about how
+to set engines, or compile the document with 'tex' and then convert to
+PDF with 'dvips'-'ps2pdf' before viewing it.  In addition, current
+Japanese TeX engines cannot generate PDF directly so they rely on
+DVI-to-PDF converters.  Usually 'dvipdfmx' command is used for this
+purpose.  You can use the 'TeX-PDF-from-DVI' variable to let AUCTeX know
+you want to generate the final PDF by converting a DVI file.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-PDF-from-DVI
+     This option controls if and how to produce a PDF file by converting
+     a DVI file.
+
+     When 'TeX-PDF-mode' is non-nil, if 'TeX-PDF-from-DVI' is non-nil
+     too the document is compiled to DVI instead of PDF.  When the
+     document is ready, 'C-c C-c' will suggest to run the converter to
+     PDF or an intermediate format.
+
+     If non-nil, 'TeX-PDF-from-DVI' should be the name of the command in
+     'TeX-command-list', as a string, used to convert the DVI file to
+     PDF or to an intermediate format.  Values currently supported are:
+        * '"Dvips"': the DVI file is converted to PS with 'dvips'.
+          After successfully running it, 'ps2pdf' will be the default
+          command to convert the PS file to PDF.
+        * '"Dvipdfmx"': the DVI file is converted to PDF with
+          'dvipdfmx'.
+     (case is significant; note the uppercase 'D' in both strings) When
+     the PDF file is finally ready, the next suggested command will be
+     'View' to open the viewer.
+
+     This option can also be set as a file local variable, in order to
+     use this conversion on a per-document basis.
+
+     Recall the whole sequence of 'C-c C-c' commands can be replaced by
+     the single 'C-c C-a'.
+
+   AUCTeX also allows you to easily select different TeX engines for
+processing, either by using the entries in the 'TeXing Options' submenu
+below the 'Command' menu or by calling the function 'TeX-engine-set'.
+These eventually set the variable 'TeX-engine' which you can also modify
+directly.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-engine
+     This variable allows you to choose which TeX engine should be used
+     for typesetting the document, i.e. the executables which will be
+     used when you invoke the 'TeX' or 'LaTeX' commands.  The value
+     should be one of the symbols defined in 'TeX-engine-alist-builtin'
+     or 'TeX-engine-alist'.  The symbols 'default', 'xetex', 'luatex'
+     and 'omega' are available from the built-in list.
+
+   Note that 'TeX-engine' is buffer-local, so setting the variable
+directly or via the above mentioned menu or function will not take
+effect in other buffers.  If you want to activate an engine for all
+AUCTeX modes, set 'TeX-engine' in your init file, e.g. by using 'M-x
+customize-option <RET>'.  If you want to activate it for a certain
+AUCTeX mode only, set the variable in the respective mode hook.  If you
+want to activate it for certain files, set it through file variables
+(*note (emacs)File Variables::).
+
+   Should you need to change the executable names related to the
+different engine settings, there are some variables you can tweak.
+Those are 'TeX-command', 'LaTeX-command', 'TeX-Omega-command',
+'LaTeX-Omega-command', 'ConTeXt-engine' and 'ConTeXt-Omega-engine'.  The
+rest of the executables is defined directly in
+'TeX-engine-alist-builtin'.  If you want to override an entry from that,
+add an entry to 'TeX-engine-alist' that starts with the same symbol as
+that the entry in the built-in list and specify the executables you want
+to use instead.  You can also add entries to 'TeX-engine-alist' in order
+to add support for engines not covered per default.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-engine-alist
+     Alist of TeX engines and associated commands.  Each entry is a list
+     with a maximum of five elements.  The first element is a symbol
+     used to identify the engine.  The second is a string describing the
+     engine.  The third is the command to be used for plain TeX.  The
+     fourth is the command to be used for LaTeX.  The fifth is the
+     command to be used for the '--engine' parameter of ConTeXt's
+     'texexec' program.  Each command can either be a variable or a
+     string.  An empty string or nil means there is no command
+     available.
+
+   In some systems, Emacs cannot inherit the 'PATH' environment variable
+from the shell and thus AUCTeX may not be able to run TeX commands.
+Before running them, AUCTeX checks if it is able to find those commands
+and will warn you in case it fails.  You can skip this test by changing
+the option 'TeX-check-TeX'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-check-TeX
+     If non-nil, AUCTeX will check if it is able to find a working TeX
+     distribution before running TeX, LaTeX, ConTeXt, etc.  It actually
+     checks if can run 'TeX-command' command or the shell returns a
+     command not found error.  The error code returned by the shell in
+     this case can be set in 'TeX-check-TeX-command-not-found' option.
+
+   Some LaTeX packages requires the document to be compiled with a
+specific engine.  Notable examples are 'fontspec' and 'polyglossia'
+packages, which require LuaTeX and XeTeX engines.  If you try to compile
+a document which loads one of such packages and the set engine is not
+one of those allowed you will be asked to select a different engine
+before running the LaTeX command.  If you do not want to be warned by
+AUCTeX in these cases, customize the option 'TeX-check-engine'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-check-engine
+     This boolean option controls whether AUCTeX should check the
+     correct engine has been set before running LaTeX commands.
+
+   As shown above, AUCTeX handles in a special way most of the main
+options that can be given to the TeX processors.  When you need to pass
+to the TeX processor arbitrary options not handled by AUCTeX, you can
+use the file local variable 'TeX-command-extra-options'.
+ -- User Option: TeX-command-extra-options
+     String with the extra options to be given to the TeX processor.
+     For example, if you need to enable the shell escape feature to
+     compile a document, add the following line to the list of local
+     variables of the source file:
+          %%% TeX-command-extra-options: "-shell-escape"
+     By default this option is not safe as a file-local variable because
+     a specially crafted document compiled with shell escape enabled can
+     be used for malicious purposes.
+
+   You can customize AUCTeX to show the processor output as it is
+produced.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-show-compilation
+     If non-nil, the output of TeX compilation is shown in another
+     window.
+
+   You can instruct TeX to print error messages in the form
+'file:line:error' which is similar to the way many compilers format
+them.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-file-line-error
+     If non-nil, TeX will produce 'file:line:error' style error
+     messages.
+
+   ConTeXt users can choose between Mark II and Mark IV versions.  This
+is controlled by 'ConTeXt-Mark-version' option.
+
+ -- User Option: ConTeXt-Mark-version
+     This variables specifies which version of Mark should be used.
+     Values currently supported are '"II"', the default, and '"IV"'.  It
+     can be set globally using customization interface or on a per-file
+     basis, by specifying it as a file variable.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Viewing,  Next: Debugging,  Prev: Commands,  Up: Processing
+
+4.2 Viewing the Formatted Output
+================================
+
+AUCTeX allows you to start external programs for previewing the
+formatted output of your document.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Starting Viewers::            Starting viewers
+* I/O Correlation::             Forward and inverse search
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Starting Viewers,  Next: I/O Correlation,  Up: Viewing
+
+4.2.1 Starting Viewers
+----------------------
+
+Viewers are normally invoked by pressing 'C-c C-c' once the document is
+formatted, which will propose the 'View' command, or by activating the
+respective entry in the Command menu.  Alternatively you can type 'C-c
+C-v' which calls the function 'TeX-view'.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-view
+     ('C-c C-v') Start a viewer without confirmation.  The viewer is
+     started either on a region or the master file, depending on the
+     last command issued.  This is especially useful for jumping to the
+     location corresponding to point in the viewer when using
+     'TeX-source-correlate-mode'.
+
+   AUCTeX will try to guess which type of viewer (DVI, PostScript or
+PDF) has to be used and what options are to be passed over to it.  This
+decision is based on the output files present in the working directory
+as well as the class and style options used in the document.  For
+example, if there is a DVI file in your working directory, a DVI viewer
+will be invoked.  In case of a PDF file it will be a PDF viewer.  If you
+specified a special paper format like 'a5paper' or use the 'landscape'
+option, this will be passed to the viewer by the appropriate options.
+Especially some DVI viewers depend on this kind of information in order
+to display your document correctly.  In case you are using 'pstricks' or
+'psfrag' in your document, a DVI viewer cannot display the contents
+correctly and a PostScript viewer will be invoked instead.
+
+   The association between the tests for the conditions mentioned above
+and the viewers is made in the variable 'TeX-view-program-selection'.
+Therefore this variable is the starting point for customization if you
+want to use other viewers than the ones suggested by default.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-view-program-selection
+     This is a list of predicates and viewers which is evaluated from
+     front to back in order to find out which viewer to call under the
+     given conditions.  In the first element of each list item you can
+     reference one or more predicates defined in
+     'TeX-view-predicate-list' or 'TeX-view-predicate-list-builtin'.  In
+     the second element you can reference a viewer defined in
+     'TeX-view-program-list' or 'TeX-view-program-list-builtin'.  The
+     viewer of the first item with a positively evaluated predicate is
+     selected.
+
+   So 'TeX-view-program-selection' only contains references to the
+actual implementations of predicates and viewer commands respectively
+which can be found elsewhere.  AUCTeX comes with a set of preconfigured
+predicates and viewer commands which are stored in the variables
+'TeX-view-predicate-list-builtin' and 'TeX-view-program-list-builtin'
+respectively.  If you are not satisfied with those and want to overwrite
+one of them or add your own definitions, you can do so via the variables
+'TeX-view-predicate-list' and 'TeX-view-program-list'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-view-predicate-list
+     This is a list of predicates for viewer selection and invocation.
+     The first element of each list item is a symbol and the second
+     element a Lisp form to be evaluated.  The form should return nil if
+     the predicate is not fulfilled.
+
+     A built-in predicate from 'TeX-view-predicate-list-builtin' can be
+     overwritten by defining a new predicate with the same symbol.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-view-program-list
+     This is a list of viewer specifications each consisting of a
+     symbolic name and either a command line or a function to be invoked
+     when the viewer is called.  If a command line is used, parts of it
+     can be conditionalized by prefixing them with predicates from
+     'TeX-view-predicate-list' or 'TeX-view-predicate-list-builtin'.
+     (See the doc string for the exact format to use.)  The command line
+     can also contain placeholders as defined in 'TeX-expand-list' and
+     'TeX-expand-list-builtin' which are expanded before the viewer is
+     called.
+
+     The third element of each item is a string, or a list of strings,
+     with the name of the executable, or executables, needed to open the
+     output file in the viewer.  Placeholders defined in
+     'TeX-expand-list' and 'TeX-expand-list-builtin' can be used here.
+     This element is optional and is used to check whether the viewer is
+     actually available on the system.
+
+     A built-in viewer spec from 'TeX-view-program-list-builtin' can be
+     overwritten by defining a new viewer spec with the same name.
+
+   After the viewer is called via either the 'View' command or the key
+stroke 'C-c C-v', the window system focus goes and stays on the viewer.
+If you prefer that the focus is pulled back to Emacs immediately after
+that and you are using evince-compatible viewer, customize the option
+'TeX-view-enince-keep-focus'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-view-evince-keep-focus
+     When this option is non-nil and the viewer is compatible with
+     evince, the focus is pulled back to Emacs immediately after the
+     viewer is invoked or refreshed from within AUCTeX.
+
+   Note that the viewer selection and invocation as described above will
+only work if certain default settings in AUCTeX are intact.  For one,
+the whole viewer selection machinery will only be triggered if there is
+no '%V' expander in 'TeX-expand-list'.  So if you have trouble with the
+viewer invocation you might check if there is an older customization of
+the variable in place.  In addition, the use of a function in
+'TeX-view-program-list' only works if the 'View' command in
+'TeX-command-list' makes use of the hook 'TeX-run-discard-or-function'.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: I/O Correlation,  Prev: Starting Viewers,  Up: Viewing
+
+4.2.2 Forward and Inverse Search
+--------------------------------
+
+Forward and inverse search refer to the correlation between the document
+source in the editor and the typeset document in the viewer.  Forward
+search allows you to jump to the place in the previewed document
+corresponding to a certain line in the document source and inverse
+search vice versa.
+
+   AUCTeX supports three methods for forward and inverse search: source
+specials (only DVI output), the pdfsync LaTeX package (only PDF output)
+and SyncTeX (any type of output).  If you want to make use of forward
+and inverse searching with source specials or SyncTeX, switch on
+'TeX-source-correlate-mode'.  *Note Processor Options::, on how to do
+that.  The use of the pdfsync package is detected automatically if
+document parsing is enabled.  Customize the variable
+'TeX-source-correlate-method' to select the method to use.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-source-correlate-method
+     Method to use for enabling forward and inverse search.  This can be
+     'source-specials' if source specials should be used, 'synctex' if
+     SyncTeX should be used, or 'auto' if AUCTeX should decide.
+
+     When the variable is set to 'auto', AUCTeX will always use SyncTeX
+     if your 'latex' processor supports it, source specials otherwise.
+     You must make sure your viewer supports the same method.
+
+     It is also possible to specify a different method depending on the
+     output, either DVI or PDF, by setting the variable to an alist of
+     the kind
+          ((dvi . '<source-specials or synctex>')
+           (pdf . '<source-specials or synctex>'))
+     in which the CDR of each entry is a symbol specifying the method to
+     be used in the corresponding mode.  The default value of the
+     variable is
+          ((dvi . source-specials)
+           (pdf . synctex))
+     which is compatible with the majority of viewers.
+
+   Forward search happens automatically upon calling the viewer, e.g. by
+typing 'C-c C-v' ('TeX-view').  This will open the viewer or bring it to
+front and display the output page corresponding to the position of point
+in the source file.  AUCTeX will automatically pass the necessary
+command line options to the viewer for this to happen.
+
+   You can also make special mouse event do forward search at the
+clicked position.  Use 'TeX-source-correlate-map'(1) and
+'TeX-view-mouse' like this:
+     (eval-after-load "tex"
+       '(define-key TeX-source-correlate-map [C-down-mouse-1]
+                    #'TeX-view-mouse))
+   This example binds 'C-down-mouse-1', which usually opens a concise
+menu to select buffer, to the command to do forward search.
+
+   Upon opening the viewer you will be asked if you want to start a
+server process (Gnuserv or Emacs server) which is necessary for inverse
+search.  This happens only if there is no server running already.  You
+can customize the variable 'TeX-source-correlate-start-server' to
+inhibit the question and always or never start the server respectively.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-source-correlate-start-server
+     If 'TeX-source-correlate-mode' is active and a viewer is invoked,
+     the default behavior is to ask if a server process should be
+     started.  Set this variable to 't' if the question should be
+     inhibited and the server should always be started.  Set it to 'nil'
+     if the server should never be started.  Inverse search will not be
+     available in the latter case.
+
+   Inverse search, i.e. jumping to the part of your document source in
+Emacs corresponding to a certain position in the viewer, is triggered
+from the viewer, typically by a mouse click.  Refer to the documentation
+of your viewer to find out how it has to be configured and what you have
+to do exactly.  In xdvi you normally have to use 'C-down-mouse-1'.
+
+   Note that inverse search with the Evince PDF viewer or its MATE fork
+Atril might fail in raising the Emacs frame after updating point in your
+document's buffer.  There is simply no way to raise the Emacs frame
+reliably accross different operating systems and different window
+managers with their different focus stealing policies.  If the Emacs
+frame is not raised after performing an inverse search from Evince or
+Atril, you can customize the following option.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-raise-frame-function
+     A function that will be called after performing an inverse search
+     from Evince or Atril in order to raise the current Emacs frame.
+
+     If your Emacs frame is already raised in that situation, just leave
+     this variable set to its default value 'raise-frame'.  Otherwise,
+     here are some alternative settings that work for some users.
+
+          ;; Alternative 1: For some users, `x-focus-frame' works.
+          (setq TeX-raise-frame-function #'x-focus-frame)
+
+          ;; Alternative 2: Under GNOME 3.20 (and probably others), it
+          ;; seems some focus stealing prevention policy prohibits that
+          ;; some window gets the focus immediately after the user has
+          ;; clicked in some other window.  Here waiting a bit before
+          ;; issuing the request seems to work.
+          (setq TeX-raise-frame-function
+                (lambda ()
+                  (run-at-time 0.5 nil #'x-focus-frame)))
+
+          ;; Alternative 3: Use the external wmctrl tool in order to
+          ;; force Emacs into the focus.
+          (setq TeX-raise-frame-function
+                (lambda ()
+                  (call-process
+                   "wmctrl" nil nil nil "-i" "-R"
+                   (frame-parameter (selected-frame) 'outer-window-id))))
+
+   ---------- Footnotes ----------
+
+   (1) The keymap name is 'TeX-source-correlate-map', not
+'TeX-source-correlate-mode-map'.  Actually, this keymap isn't
+implemented as minor mode map of 'TeX-source-correlate-mode', in order
+that its bindings don't affect buffers outside of AUCTeX.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Debugging,  Next: Checking,  Prev: Viewing,  Up: Processing
+
+4.3 Catching the errors
+=======================
+
+Once you've formatted your document you may 'debug' it, i.e. browse
+through the errors (La)TeX reported.  You may also have a look at a
+nicely formatted list of all errors and warnings reported by the
+compiler.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-next-error ARG REPARSE
+     ('C-c `') Go to the next error reported by TeX.  The view will be
+     split in two, with the cursor placed as close as possible to the
+     error in the top view.  In the bottom view, the error message will
+     be displayed along with some explanatory text.
+
+     An optional numeric ARG, positive or negative, specifies how many
+     error messages to move.  A negative ARG means to move back to
+     previous error messages, see also 'TeX-previous-error'.
+
+     The optional REPARSE argument makes AUCTeX reparse the error
+     message buffer and start the debugging from the first error.  This
+     can also be achieved by calling the function with a prefix argument
+     ('C-u').
+
+ -- Command: TeX-previous-error ARG
+     ('M-g p') Go to the previous error reported by TeX.  An optional
+     numeric ARG specifies how many error messages to move backward.
+     This is like calling 'TeX-next-error' with a negative argument.
+
+   The command 'TeX-previous-error' works only if AUCTeX can parse the
+whole TeX log buffer.  This is controlled by the 'TeX-parse-all-errors'
+variable.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-parse-all-errors
+     If t, AUCTeX automatically parses the whole output log buffer right
+     after running a TeX command, in order to collect all warnings and
+     errors.  This makes it possible to navigate back and forth between
+     the error messages using 'TeX-next-error' and 'TeX-previous-error'.
+     This is the default.  If nil, AUCTeX does not parse the whole
+     output log buffer and 'TeX-previous-error' cannot be used.
+
+   As default, AUCTeX will display a special help buffer containing the
+error reported by TeX along with the documentation.  There is however an
+'expert' option, which allows you to display the real TeX output.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-display-help
+     If t AUCTeX will automatically display a help text whenever an
+     error is encountered using 'TeX-next-error' ('C-c `').  If nil a
+     terse information about the error is displayed in the echo area.
+     If 'expert' AUCTeX will display the output buffer with the raw TeX
+     output.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Ignoring warnings::         Controlling warnings to be reported
+* Error overview::            List of all errors and warnings
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Ignoring warnings,  Next: Error overview,  Up: Debugging
+
+4.3.1 Controlling warnings to be reported
+-----------------------------------------
+
+Normally AUCTeX will only report real errors, but you may as well ask it
+to report 'bad boxes' and warnings as well.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-toggle-debug-bad-boxes
+     ('C-c C-t C-b') Toggle whether AUCTeX should stop at bad boxes
+     (i.e. overfull and underfull boxes) as well as normal errors.  The
+     boolean option 'TeX-debug-bad-boxes' is set accordingly.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-toggle-debug-warnings
+     ('C-c C-t C-w') Toggle whether AUCTeX should stop at warnings as
+     well as normal errors.  The boolean option 'TeX-debug-warnings' is
+     set accordingly.
+
+   While many users desire to have warnings reported after compilation,
+there are certain warnings that are considered unimportant and users
+want to ignore them.  For a more fine-grained control of what kinds of
+warnings should be shown after compilation, AUCTeX provides other
+options.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-ignore-warnings
+     Controls which warnings are to be ignored.
+
+     It can be a regexp matching the message of the warnings to be
+     ignored.
+
+     More advanced users can set also this option to a symbol with the
+     name of a custom function taking as arguments all the information
+     of the warning listed in 'TeX-error-list' variable, except the last
+     one about whether to ignore the warning.  See the code of
+     'TeX-warning' function and the documentation of 'TeX-error-list'
+     for more details.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-toggle-suppress-ignored-warnings
+     ('C-c C-t C-x') Toggle whether AUCTeX should actually hide the
+     ignored warnings specified with 'TeX-ignore-warnings'.  The boolean
+     option 'TeX-suppress-ignored-warnings' is set accordingly.  If this
+     is nil, all warnings are shown, even those matched by
+     'TeX-ignore-warnings', otherwise these are hidden.
+
+     Note that 'TeX-debug-warnings' takes the precedence: if it is nil,
+     all warnings are hidden in any case.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Error overview,  Prev: Ignoring warnings,  Up: Debugging
+
+4.3.2 List of all errors and warnings
+-------------------------------------
+
+When the option 'TeX-parse-all-errors' is non-nil, you will be also able
+to open an overview of all errors and warnings reported by the TeX
+compiler.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-error-overview
+     Show an overview of the errors and warnings occurred in the last
+     TeX run.
+
+     In this window you can visit the error on which point is by
+     pressing <RET>, and visit the next or previous issue by pressing
+     <n> or <p> respectively.  A prefix argument to these keys specifies
+     how many errors to move forward or backward.  You can visit an
+     error also by clicking on its message.  Jump to error point in the
+     source code with <j>, and use <l> see the error in the log buffer.
+     In addition, you can toggle visibility of bad boxes, generic
+     warnings, and ignored warnings with <b>, <w>, and <x>, respectively
+     (see *note Ignoring warnings:: for details).  Press <q> to quit the
+     overview.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-error-overview-open-after-TeX-run
+     When this boolean variable is non-nil, the error overview will be
+     automatically opened after running TeX if there are errors or
+     warnings to show.
+
+   The error overview is opened in a new window of the current frame by
+default, but you can change this behavior by customizing the option
+'TeX-error-overview-setup'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-error-overview-setup
+     Controls the frame setup of the error overview.  The possible value
+     is: 'separate-frame'; with a nil value the current frame is used
+     instead.
+
+     The parameters of the separate frame can be set with the
+     'TeX-error-overview-frame-parameters' option.
+
+     If the display does not support multi frame, the current frame will
+     be used regardless of the value of this variable.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Checking,  Next: Control,  Prev: Debugging,  Up: Processing
+
+4.4 Checking for problems
+=========================
+
+Running TeX or LaTeX will only find regular errors in the document, not
+examples of bad style.  Furthermore, description of the errors may often
+be confusing.  The utilities 'lacheck' and 'chktex' can be used to find
+style errors, such as forgetting to escape the space after an
+abbreviation or using '...' instead of '\ldots' and other similar
+problems.  You start 'lacheck' with 'C-c C-c Check <RET>' and 'chktex'
+with 'C-c C-c ChkTeX <RET>'.  The result will be a list of errors in the
+'*compilation*' buffer.  You can go through the errors with 'C-x `'
+('next-error', *note (emacs)Compilation::), which will move point to the
+location of the next error.
+
+   Alternatively, you may want in-buffer notation.  AUCTeX provides
+support for this using the Flymake package in Emacs 26 or newer (*note
+(Flymake)Using Flymake:: for details).  To enable, call 'M-x
+flymake-mode <RET>' in the buffer or enable it in all buffers by adding
+this to your init file:
+     (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook #'flymake-mode)
+   Note that AUCTeX currently only provides support for using 'chktex'
+as the flymake backend.
+
+   Each of the two utilities 'lacheck' and 'chktex' will find some
+errors the other doesn't, but 'chktex' is more configurable, allowing
+you to create your own errors.  You may need to install the programs
+before using them.  You can get 'lacheck' from
+URL:<https://www.ctan.org/pkg/lacheck> and 'chktex' from
+URL:<https://www.ctan.org/pkg/chktex>.  TeX Live contains both.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Control,  Next: Cleaning,  Prev: Checking,  Up: Processing
+
+4.5 Controlling the output
+==========================
+
+A number of commands are available for controlling the output of an
+application running under AUCTeX
+
+ -- Command: TeX-kill-job
+     ('C-c C-k') Kill currently running external application.  This may
+     be either of TeX, LaTeX, previewer, BibTeX, etc.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-recenter-output-buffer
+     ('C-c C-l') Recenter the output buffer so that the bottom line is
+     visible.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-home-buffer
+     ('C-c ^') Go to the 'master' file in the document associated with
+     the current buffer, or if already there, to the file where the
+     current process was started.
+
+   Additionally, output files produced by AUCTeX can be placed in a
+separate directory.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-output-dir
+     Set this option to the path of a directory where output files will
+     be placed.  The output files include those that are produced by
+     applications running under AUCTeX, temporary files related to
+     region processing and the preview-latex files.  If a relative path
+     is specified, it is interpreted as being relative to the master
+     file in a mutlifile document.
+
+     This is a buffer local variable and must be set separately for all
+     documents and all files in a multifile document.  For example,
+
+          %%% Local Variables:
+          %%% mode: latex
+          %%% TeX-output-dir: "build"
+          %%% End:
+
+     Alternatively, you may use 'setq-default' to set the default value
+     of this option or set it as a directory local variable (*note
+     (emacs)Directory Variables::).
+
+     Note that a non-nil value of 'TeX-output-dir' might be incompatible
+     with some TeX commands and macros.  In particular, the LaTeX macro
+     '\include' is known to not work with this option.  Some TeX
+     packages which produce intermediary files might also be
+     incompatible.  A possible workaround for those packages is to
+     append the value of 'TeX-output-dir' to the environment variables
+     'TEXINPUTS' and 'BIBINPUTS'.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Cleaning,  Next: Documentation,  Prev: Control,  Up: Processing
+
+4.6 Cleaning intermediate and output files
+==========================================
+
+ -- Command: TeX-clean
+     Remove generated intermediate files.  In case a prefix argument is
+     given, remove output files as well.
+
+     Canonical access to the function is provided by the 'Clean' and
+     'Clean All' entries in 'TeX-command-list', invokable with 'C-c C-c'
+     or the Command menu.
+
+     The patterns governing which files to remove can be adapted
+     separately for each AUCTeX mode by means of the following
+     variables:
+        * 'plain-TeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes'
+        * 'plain-TeX-clean-output-suffixes'
+        * 'LaTeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes'
+        * 'LaTeX-clean-output-suffixes'
+        * 'docTeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes'
+        * 'docTeX-clean-output-suffixes'
+        * 'Texinfo-clean-intermediate-suffixes'
+        * 'Texinfo-clean-output-suffixes'
+        * 'ConTeXt-clean-intermediate-suffixes'
+        * 'ConTeXt-clean-output-suffixes'
+        * 'AmSTeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes'
+        * 'AmSTeX-clean-output-suffixes'
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-clean-confirm
+     Control if deletion of intermediate and output files has to be
+     confirmed before it is actually done.  If non-nil, ask before
+     deleting files.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Documentation,  Prev: Cleaning,  Up: Processing
+
+4.7 Documentation about macros and packages
+===========================================
+
+ -- Command: TeX-documentation-texdoc
+     ('C-c ?') Get documentation about the packages installed on your
+     system, using 'texdoc' to find the manuals.  The function will
+     prompt for the name of packages.  If point is on a word, this will
+     be suggested as default.
+
+     If the command is called with a prefix argument, you will be shown
+     a list of manuals of the given package among to choose.
+
+     The command can be invoked by the key binding mentioned above as
+     well as the 'Find Documentation...' entry in the mode menu.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Customization,  Next: Appendices,  Prev: Processing,  Up: Top
+
+5 Customization and Extension
+*****************************
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Modes and Hooks::             Modes and Hooks
+* Multifile::                   Multifile Documents
+* Parsing Files::               Automatic Parsing of TeX Files
+* Internationalization::        Language Support
+* Automatic::                   Automatic Customization
+* Style Files::                 Writing Your Own Style Support
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Modes and Hooks,  Next: Multifile,  Up: Customization
+
+5.1 Modes and Hooks
+===================
+
+AUCTeX supports a wide variety of derivatives and extensions of TeX.
+Besides plain TeX those are LaTeX, AMS-TeX, ConTeXt, Texinfo and docTeX.
+For each of them there is a separate major mode in AUCTeX and each major
+mode runs 'text-mode-hook', 'TeX-mode-hook' as well as a hook special to
+the mode in this order.  (As an exception, Texinfo mode does not run
+'TeX-mode-hook'.)  The following table provides an overview of the
+respective mode functions and hooks.
+
+Type        Mode function      Hook
+-------------------------------------------------------
+Plain TeX   'plain-tex-mode'   'plain-TeX-mode-hook'
+LaTeX       'latex-mode'       'LaTeX-mode-hook'
+AMS-TeX     'ams-tex-mode'     'AmS-TeX-mode-hook'
+ConTeXt     'context-mode'     'ConTeXt-mode-hook'
+Texinfo     'texinfo-mode'     'Texinfo-mode-hook'
+DocTeX      'doctex-mode'      'docTeX-mode-hook'
+
+   If you need to make a customization via a hook which is only relevant
+for one of the modes listed above, put it into the respective mode hook,
+if it is relevant for any AUCTeX mode, add it to 'TeX-mode-hook' and if
+it is relevant for all text modes, append it to 'text-mode-hook'.
+
+   Other useful hooks are listed below.
+
+ -- Variable: TeX-after-compilation-finished-functions
+     Hook which is run after the TeX/LaTeX processor has successfully
+     finished compiling your document.  (*Note Processing::, for finding
+     out how to compile your document.)  Each function in the hook is
+     run with the compiled output document as its argument.
+
+     This is useful for automatically refreshing the viewer after
+     re-compilation especially when using Emacs viewers such as DocView
+     or PDF Tools.  The function 'TeX-revert-document-buffer' can be
+     added to the hook for this purpose.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Multifile,  Next: Parsing Files,  Prev: Modes and Hooks,  Up: Customization
+
+5.2 Multifile Documents
+=======================
+
+You may wish to spread a document over many files (as you are likely to
+do if there are multiple authors, or if you have not yet discovered the
+power of the outline commands (*note Outline::)).  This can be done by
+having a "master" file in which you include the various files with the
+TeX macro '\input' or the LaTeX macro '\include'.  These files may also
+include other files themselves.  However, to format the document you
+must run the commands on the top level master file.
+
+   When you, for example, ask AUCTeX to run a command on the master
+file, it has no way of knowing the name of the master file.  By default,
+it will assume that the current file is the master file.  If you insert
+the following in your init file ('init.el' or '.emacs'), AUCTeX will use
+a more advanced algorithm.
+
+     (setq-default TeX-master nil) ; Query for master file.
+
+   In this case, AUCTeX will ask for the name of the master file
+associated with the buffer.  To avoid asking you again, AUCTeX will
+automatically insert the name of the master file as a file variable
+(*note (emacs)File Variables::).  You can also insert the file variable
+yourself, by putting the following text at the end of your files.
+
+     %%% Local Variables:
+     %%% TeX-master: "master"
+     %%% End:
+
+   You should always set this variable to the name of the top level
+document.  If you always use the same name for your top level documents,
+you can set 'TeX-master' in your init file such as 'init.el' or
+'.emacs'.
+
+     (setq-default TeX-master "master") ; All master files called "master".
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-master
+     The master file associated with the current buffer.  If the file
+     being edited is actually included from another file, then you can
+     tell AUCTeX the name of the master file by setting this variable.
+     If there are multiple levels of nesting, specify the top level
+     file.
+
+     If this variable is 'nil', AUCTeX will query you for the name.
+
+     If the variable is 't', then AUCTeX will assume the file is a
+     master file itself.
+
+     If the variable is 'shared', then AUCTeX will query for the name,
+     but will not change the file.
+
+     If the variable is 'dwim', AUCTeX will try to avoid querying by
+     attempting to "do what I mean"; and then change the file.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-one-master
+     Regular expression matching ordinary TeX files.
+
+     You should set this variable to match the name of all files, for
+     which it is a good idea to append a 'TeX-master' file variable
+     entry automatically.  When AUCTeX adds the name of the master file
+     as a file variable, it does not need to ask next time you edit the
+     file.
+
+     If you dislike AUCTeX automatically modifying your files, you can
+     set this variable to '"<none>"'.  By default, AUCTeX will modify
+     any file with an extension of '.tex', '.texi' or '.dtx'.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-master-file-ask
+     ('C-c _') Query for the name of a master file and add the
+     respective File Variables (*note (emacs)File Variables::) to the
+     file for setting this variable permanently.
+
+     AUCTeX will not ask for a master file when it encounters existing
+     files.  This function shall give you the possibility to insert the
+     variable manually.
+
+   AUCTeX keeps track of macros, environments, labels, and style files
+that are used in a given document.  For this to work with multifile
+documents, AUCTeX has to have a place to put the information about the
+files in the document.  This is done by having an 'auto' subdirectory
+placed in the directory where your document is located.  Each time you
+save a file, AUCTeX will write information about the file into the
+'auto' directory.  When you load a file, AUCTeX will read the
+information in the 'auto' directory about the file you loaded _and the
+master file specified by 'TeX-master'_.  Since the master file (perhaps
+indirectly) includes all other files in the document, AUCTeX will get
+information from all files in the document.  This means that you will
+get from each file, for example, completion for all labels defined
+anywhere in the document.
+
+   AUCTeX will create the 'auto' directory automatically if
+'TeX-auto-save' is non-nil.  Without it, the files in the document will
+not know anything about each other, except for the name of the master
+file.  *Note Automatic Local::.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-save-document
+     ('C-c C-d') Save all buffers known to belong to the current
+     document.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-save-query
+     If non-nil, then query the user before saving each file with
+     'TeX-save-document'.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Parsing Files,  Next: Internationalization,  Prev: Multifile,  Up: Customization
+
+5.3 Automatic Parsing of TeX Files
+==================================
+
+AUCTeX depends heavily on being able to extract information from the
+buffers by parsing them.  Since parsing the buffer can be somewhat slow,
+the parsing is initially disabled.  You are encouraged to enable them by
+adding the following lines to your init file such as 'init.el' or
+'.emacs'.
+
+     (setq TeX-parse-self t) ; Enable parse on load.
+     (setq TeX-auto-save t) ; Enable parse on save.
+
+   The latter command will make AUCTeX store the parsed information in
+an 'auto' subdirectory in the directory each time the TeX files are
+stored, *note Automatic Local::.  If AUCTeX finds the pre-parsed
+information when loading a file, it will not need to reparse the buffer.
+The information in the 'auto' directory is also useful for multifile
+documents, *note Multifile::, since it allows each file to access the
+parsed information from all the other files in the document.  This is
+done by first reading the information from the master file, and then
+recursively the information from each file stored in the master file.
+
+   The variables can also be set on a per file basis, by changing the
+file local variables.
+
+     %%% Local Variables:
+     %%% TeX-parse-self: t
+     %%% TeX-auto-save: t
+     %%% End:
+
+   Even when you have disabled the automatic parsing, you can force the
+generation of style information by pressing 'C-c C-n'.  This is often
+the best choice, as you will be able to decide when it is necessary to
+reparse the file.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-parse-self
+     Parse file after loading it if no style hook is found for it.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-auto-save
+     Automatically save style information when saving the buffer.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-normal-mode ARG
+     ('C-c C-n') Remove all information about this buffer, and apply the
+     style hooks again.  Save buffer first including style information.
+     With optional argument, also reload the style hooks.
+
+   When AUCTeX saves your buffer, it can optionally convert all tabs in
+your buffer into spaces.  Tabs confuse AUCTeX's error message parsing
+and so should generally be avoided.  However, tabs are significant in
+some environments, and so by default AUCTeX does not remove them.  To
+convert tabs to spaces when saving a buffer, insert the following in
+your init file such as 'init.el' or '.emacs':
+
+     (setq TeX-auto-untabify t)
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-auto-untabify
+     Automatically remove all tabs from a file before saving it.
+
+   Instead of disabling the parsing entirely, you can also speed it
+significantly up by limiting the information it will search for (and
+store) when parsing the buffer.  You can do this by setting the default
+values for the buffer local variables 'TeX-auto-regexp-list' and
+'TeX-auto-parse-length' in your init file such as 'init.el' or '.emacs'.
+
+     ;; Only parse LaTeX class and package information.
+     (setq-default TeX-auto-regexp-list 'LaTeX-auto-minimal-regexp-list)
+     ;; The class and package information is usually near the beginning.
+     (setq-default TeX-auto-parse-length 2000)
+
+   This example will speed the parsing up significantly, but AUCTeX will
+no longer be able to provide completion for labels, macros,
+environments, or bibitems specified in the document, nor will it know
+what files belong to the document.
+
+   These variables can also be specified on a per file basis, by
+changing the file local variables.
+
+     %%% Local Variables:
+     %%% TeX-auto-regexp-list: TeX-auto-full-regexp-list
+     %%% TeX-auto-parse-length: 999999
+     %%% End:
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-auto-regexp-list
+     List of regular expressions used for parsing the current file.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-auto-parse-length
+     Maximal length of TeX file that will be parsed.
+
+   The pre-specified lists of regexps are defined below.  You can use
+these before loading AUCTeX by quoting them, as in the example above.
+
+ -- Constant: TeX-auto-empty-regexp-list
+     Parse nothing
+
+ -- Constant: LaTeX-auto-minimal-regexp-list
+     Only parse LaTeX class and packages.
+
+ -- Constant: LaTeX-auto-label-regexp-list
+     Only parse LaTeX labels.
+
+ -- Constant: LaTeX-auto-index-regexp-list
+     Only parse LaTeX index and glossary entries.
+
+ -- Constant: LaTeX-auto-class-regexp-list
+     Only parse macros in LaTeX classes and packages.
+
+ -- Constant: LaTeX-auto-pagestyle-regexp-list
+     Only parse LaTeX pagestyles.
+
+ -- Constant: LaTeX-auto-counter-regexp-list
+     Only parse LaTeX counters.
+
+ -- Constant: LaTeX-auto-length-regexp-list
+     Only parse LaTeX lengths.
+
+ -- Constant: LaTeX-auto-savebox-regexp-list
+     Only parse LaTeX saveboxes.
+
+ -- Constant: LaTeX-auto-regexp-list
+     Parse common LaTeX commands.
+
+ -- Constant: plain-TeX-auto-regexp-list
+     Parse common plain TeX commands.
+
+ -- Constant: TeX-auto-full-regexp-list
+     Parse all TeX and LaTeX commands that AUCTeX can use.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Internationalization,  Next: Automatic,  Prev: Parsing Files,  Up: Customization
+
+5.4 Language Support
+====================
+
+TeX and Emacs are usable for European (Latin, Cyrillic, Greek) based
+languages.  Some LaTeX and EmacsLisp packages are available for easy
+typesetting and editing documents in European languages.
+
+   All Emacs versions supported by current AUCTeX can handle CJK
+(Chinese, Japanese, and Korean) languages by default.
+
+   In most cases, special versions of TeX engines are needed for
+high-quality typesetting of CJK languages: CTeX and ChinaTeX for
+Chinese, ASCII pTeX, upTeX and NTT jTeX for Japanese, HLaTeX and kTeX
+for Korean.  They are necessary as well when you want to typeset
+documents saved in their domestic encodings such as 'Shift-JIS'.
+Currently, AUCTeX offers native support for pTeX, upTeX and jTeX only.
+
+   If you don't need fine tuning in the result with respect to the
+typesetting rules of their respective national standards, most unicode
+based TeX engines, e.g. LuaTeX and XeTeX, can handle CJK languages by
+default if they are encoded in UTF-8.  The CJK-LaTeX package is provided
+for supporting CJK scripts in a standard LaTeX document.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* European::                    Using AUCTeX with European Languages
+* Japanese::                    Using AUCTeX with Japanese
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: European,  Next: Japanese,  Up: Internationalization
+
+5.4.1 Using AUCTeX with European Languages
+------------------------------------------
+
+5.4.1.1 Typing and Displaying Non-ASCII Characters
+..................................................
+
+First you will need a way to write non-ASCII characters.  You can either
+use macros, or teach TeX about the ISO character sets.  I prefer the
+latter, it has the advantage that the usual standard emacs word movement
+and case change commands will work.
+
+   Recommended encoding for LaTeX document is UTF-8.  Recent LaTeX2e has
+native support for UTF-8.  If your LaTeX2e is not recent enough, just
+add '\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}'.
+
+   You can still use ISO 8859 Latin 1 encoding with
+'\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}'.
+
+   To be able to display non-ASCII characters you will need an
+appropriate font.  All Emacs versions supported by current AUCTeX can
+display 8-bit characters, provided that suitable fonts are installed.
+
+   A compromise is to use an European character set when editing the
+file, and convert to TeX macros when reading and writing the files.
+
+'iso-cvt.el'
+     Much like 'iso-tex.el' but is bundled with Emacs 19.23 and later.
+
+'X-Symbol'
+     a much more complete package for Emacs that can also handle a lot
+     of mathematical characters and input methods.
+
+5.4.1.2 Style Files for Different Languages
+...........................................
+
+AUCTeX supports style files for several languages.  Each style file may
+modify AUCTeX to better support the language, and will run a language
+specific hook that will allow you to for example change ispell
+dictionary, or run code to change the keyboard remapping.  The following
+will for example choose a Danish dictionary for documents including
+'\usepackage[danish]{babel}'.  This requires parsing to be enabled,
+*note Parsing Files::.
+
+     (add-hook 'TeX-language-dk-hook
+               (lambda () (ispell-change-dictionary "danish")))
+
+   The following style files are recognized:
+
+'brazilian'
+'brazil'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-pt-br-hook'.  Gives '"' word syntax,
+     makes the <"> key inserts '``' or '''' depending on context.
+     Typing <"> twice will insert a literal '"'.  Typing <-> twice will
+     insert '"=', three times '--'.
+
+'bulgarian'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-bg-hook'.  Gives '"' word syntax,
+     makes the <"> key insert a literal '"'.  Typing <"> twice will
+     insert '"`' or '"'' depending on context.  Typing <-> twice will
+     insert '"=', three times '--'.
+
+'czech'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-cz-hook'.  Pressing <"> will insert
+     '\uv{' and '}' depending on context.
+
+'danish'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-dk-hook'.  Pressing <"> will insert
+     '"`' and '"'' depending on context.  Typing <-> twice will insert
+     '"=', i.e. a hyphen string allowing hyphenation in the composing
+     words.
+
+'dutch'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-nl-hook'.
+
+'english'
+'australian'
+'canadian'
+'newzealand'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-en-hook'.
+
+'frenchb'
+'francais'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-fr-hook'.  Pressing <"> will insert
+     '\og' and '\fg' depending on context.  Note that the language name
+     for customizing 'TeX-quote-language-alist' is 'french'.
+
+'german'
+'ngerman'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-de-hook'.  Gives '"' word syntax,
+     makes the <"> key insert a literal '"'.  Pressing the key twice
+     will give you opening or closing German quotes ('"`' or '"'').
+     Typing <-> twice will insert '"=', three times '--'.
+
+'icelandic'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-is-hook'.  Gives '"' word syntax,
+     makes the <"> key insert a literal '"'.  Typing <"> twice will
+     insert '"`' or '"'' depending on context.  Typing <-> twice will
+     insert '"=', three times '--'.
+
+'italian'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-it-hook'.  Pressing <"> will insert
+     '"<' and '">' depending on context.
+
+'polish'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-pl-hook'.  Gives '"' word syntax and
+     makes the <"> key insert a literal '"'.  Pressing <"> twice will
+     insert '"`' or '"'' depending on context.
+
+'polski'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-pl-hook'.  Makes the <"> key insert a
+     literal '"'.  Pressing <"> twice will insert ',,' or '''' depending
+     on context.
+
+'portuguese'
+'portuges'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-pt-hook'.  Gives '"' word syntax,
+     makes the <"> key inserts '"<' or '">' depending on context.
+     Typing <"> twice will insert a literal '"'.  Typing <-> twice will
+     insert '"=', three times '--'.  Note that the language name for
+     customizing 'TeX-quote-language-alist' is 'portuguese'.
+
+'slovak'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-sk-hook'.  Pressing <"> will insert
+     '\uv{' and '}' depending on context.
+
+'swedish'
+     Runs style hook 'TeX-language-sv-hook'.  Pressing <"> will insert
+     ''''.  Typing <-> twice will insert '"=', three times '--'.
+
+   Replacement of language-specific hyphen strings like '"=' with dashes
+does not require to type <-> three times in a row.  You can put point
+after the hypen string anytime and trigger the replacement by typing
+<->.
+
+   In case you are not satisfied with the suggested behavior of quote
+and hyphen insertion you can change it by customizing the variables
+'TeX-quote-language-alist' and 'LaTeX-babel-hyphen-language-alist'
+respectively.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-quote-language-alist
+     Used for overriding the default language-specific quote insertion
+     behavior.  This is an alist where each element is a list consisting
+     of four items.  The first item is the name of the language in
+     concern as a string.  See the list of supported languages above.
+     The second item is the opening quotation mark.  The third item is
+     the closing quotation mark.  Opening and closing quotation marks
+     can be specified directly as strings or as functions returning a
+     string.  The fourth item is a boolean controlling quote insertion.
+     It should be non-nil if if the special quotes should only be used
+     after inserting a literal '"' character first, i.e. on second key
+     press.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-babel-hyphen-language-alist
+     Used for overriding the behavior of hyphen insertion for specific
+     languages.  Every element in this alist is a list of three items.
+     The first item should specify the affected language as a string.
+     The second item denotes the hyphen string to be used as a string.
+     The third item, a boolean, controls the behavior of hyphen
+     insertion and should be non-nil if the special hyphen should be
+     inserted after inserting a literal '-' character, i.e. on second
+     key press.
+
+   The defaults of hyphen insertion are defined by the variables
+'LaTeX-babel-hyphen' and 'LaTeX-babel-hyphen-after-hyphen' respectively.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-babel-hyphen
+     String to be used when typing <->.  This usually is a hyphen
+     alternative or hyphenation aid provided by 'babel' and the related
+     language style files, like '"=', '"~' or '"-'.
+
+     Set it to an empty string or nil in order to disable
+     language-specific hyphen insertion.
+
+ -- User Option: LaTeX-babel-hyphen-after-hyphen
+     Control insertion of hyphen strings.  If non-nil insert normal
+     hyphen on first key press and swap it with the language-specific
+     hyphen string specified in the variable 'LaTeX-babel-hyphen' on
+     second key press.  If nil do it the other way round.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Japanese,  Prev: European,  Up: Internationalization
+
+5.4.2 Using AUCTeX with Japanese TeX
+------------------------------------
+
+To write Japanese text with AUCTeX, you need the versions of TeX and
+Emacs that support Japanese.  AUCTeX supports three Japanese TeX engines
+by default: NTT jTeX, ASCII pTeX and upTeX.
+
+   Activate 'japanese-plain-tex-mode' or 'japanese-latex-mode' to use
+the Japanese TeX engines.  If it doesn't work, send mail to Masayuki
+Ataka <masayuki.ataka@gmail.com> or Ikumi Keita
+<ikumikeita@jcom.home.ne.jp>, who currently concern with stuff related
+to Japanese in AUCTeX.  None of the primary AUCTeX maintainers
+understand Japanese, so they cannot help you.
+
+   It is recommended to enable 'TeX-parse-self' for typical Japanese
+LaTeX users.  When enabled, 'japanese-latex-mode' selects the suitable
+Japanese TeX engine automatically based on the class file name (such as
+'jbook', 'jsarticle' and 'tjreport') and its option.  *Note Parsing
+Files::.
+
+   It is important to select the suitable Japanese TeX engine because
+the selected engine determines the command name such as 'platex' and
+'uptex' to typeset the document.  If you find that wrong command is
+used, check the value of 'TeX-engine' on that buffer.  If the value does
+not suit the current document, change the value by the 'TeXing Options'
+submenu below the 'Command' menu.  *Note Processor Options::.
+
+   To make the selected engine to persist across Emacs sessions, there
+are two ways from which you can choose one according to your needs:
+
+  1. If you use a specific engine (almost) exclusively, customize the
+     option 'japanese-TeX-engine-default'.
+
+      -- User Option: japanese-TeX-engine-default
+          The default 'TeX-engine' in Japanese TeX mode.
+
+          The default value is 'ptex'.
+  2. If you want to set the engine on a per file basis, use the file
+     local variables to set 'TeX-engine'.
+
+     Here is a sample code to set 'TeX-engine' to 'uptex':
+
+          %%% Local Variables:
+          %%% mode: japanese-latex
+          %%% TeX-engine: uptex
+          %%% End:
+
+   In the both cases above, the valid value is one of 'ptex', 'jtex' and
+'uptex'.
+
+   You can override the command names associated with the above three
+engines or define your own engine by customizing 'TeX-engine-alist'.
+*Note Processor Options::.
+
+   It is sometimes necessary to use an engine which differs from the one
+AUCTeX selects automatically.  For example, even when you want to use
+'j-article' document class deliberately with ASCII pLaTeX, AUCTeX
+selects NTT jLaTeX command if 'TeX-parse-self' is enabled, because
+'j-article' originally belongs to NTT jLaTeX.  In such cases, use the
+file local variable method above to select the engine you intend to use.
+
+   If you usually use AUCTeX in Japanese, setting the following
+variables is useful.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-default-mode
+     Mode to enter for a new file when it cannot be determined whether
+     the file is plain TeX or LaTeX or what.
+
+     If you want to enter Japanese LaTeX mode whenever this may happen,
+     set the variable like this:
+          (setq TeX-default-mode 'japanese-latex-mode)
+
+ -- User Option: japanese-LaTeX-default-style
+     The default style/class when creating a new Japanese LaTeX
+     document.
+
+     The default value is '"jarticle"'.
+
+   It is recommended also for Japanese users to customize the option
+'TeX-PDF-from-DVI' to '"Dvipdfmx"'.  *Note Processor Options::.
+
+   There are three customize options with regard to the encoding of
+Japanese text.
+
+ -- User Option: japanese-TeX-use-kanji-opt-flag
+     If non-nil, AUCTeX adds '-kanji' option to the typesetting command
+     when 'TeX-engine' is 'ptex'.
+
+   Usually AUCTeX guesses the right coding systems for input to and
+output from the Japanese TeX process, but you can override them by the
+following two customize options.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-japanese-process-input-coding-system
+     If non-nil, used for encoding input to Japanese TeX process.  When
+     'nil', AUCTeX tries to choose suitable coding system.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-japanese-process-output-coding-system
+     If non-nil, used for decoding output from Japanese TeX process.
+     When 'nil', AUCTeX tries to choose suitable coding system.
+
+   The former customize options 'japanese-TeX-command-default',
+'japanese-LaTeX-command-default' and 'japanese-TeX-command-list' are
+removed from AUCTeX.  Use 'japanese-TeX-engine-default' instead.  If you
+need to customize the executable file name such as '"latex"', the
+options for them, or both, customize 'TeX-engine-alist'.
+
+   The following two additional font commands are available in LaTeX
+mode buffer.
+
+'C-c C-f g'
+     Insert gothic font command '\textgt{-!-}' or '\mathgt{-!-}'
+     depending on the context.
+
+'C-c C-f m'
+     Insert mincho font command '\textmc{-!-}' or '\mathmc{-!-}'
+     depending on the context.
+
+   Although they are meaningful only with 'ptex' and 'uptex' engines, it
+won't matter in buffers with other engines.
+
+   See 'tex-jp.el' for more information.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Automatic,  Next: Style Files,  Prev: Internationalization,  Up: Customization
+
+5.5 Automatic Customization
+===========================
+
+Since AUCTeX is so highly customizable, it makes sense that it is able
+to customize itself.  The automatic customization consists of scanning
+TeX files and extracting symbols, environments, and things like that.
+
+   The automatic customization is done on three different levels.  The
+global level is the level shared by all users at your site, and consists
+of scanning the standard TeX style files, and any extra styles added
+locally for all users on the site.  The private level deals with those
+style files you have written for your own use, and use in different
+documents.  You may have a '~/lib/TeX/' directory where you store useful
+style files for your own use.  The local level is for a specific
+directory, and deals with writing customization for the files for your
+normal TeX documents.
+
+   If compared with the environment variable 'TEXINPUTS', the global
+level corresponds to the directories built into TeX.  The private level
+corresponds to the directories you add yourself, except for '.', which
+is the local level.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Automatic Global::            Automatic Customization for the Site
+* Automatic Private::           Automatic Customization for a User
+* Automatic Local::             Automatic Customization for a Directory
+
+   By default AUCTeX will search for customization files in all the
+global, private, and local style directories, but you can also set the
+path directly.  This is useful if you for example want to add another
+person's style hooks to your path.  Please note that all matching files
+found in 'TeX-style-path' are loaded, and all hooks defined in the files
+will be executed.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-style-path
+     List of directories to search for AUCTeX style files.
+
+   By default, when AUCTeX searches a directory for files, it will
+recursively search through subdirectories.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-file-recurse
+     Whether to search TeX directories recursively: nil means do not
+     recurse, a positive integer means go that far deep in the directory
+     hierarchy, t means recurse indefinitely.
+
+   By default, AUCTeX will ignore files named '.', '..', 'SCCS', 'RCS',
+and 'CVS'.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-ignore-file
+     Regular expression matching file names to ignore.
+
+     These files or directories will not be considered when searching
+     for TeX files in a directory.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Automatic Global,  Next: Automatic Private,  Up: Automatic
+
+5.5.1 Automatic Customization for the Site
+------------------------------------------
+
+Assuming that the automatic customization at the global level was done
+when AUCTeX was installed, your choice is now: will you use it?  If you
+use it, you will benefit by having access to all the symbols and
+environments available for completion purposes.  The drawback is slower
+load time when you edit a new file and perhaps too many confusing
+symbols when you try to do a completion.
+
+   You can disable the automatic generated global style hooks by setting
+the variable 'TeX-auto-global' to nil.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-macro-global
+     Directories containing the site's TeX style files.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-style-global
+     Directory containing hand generated TeX information.
+
+     These correspond to TeX macros shared by all users of a site.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-auto-global
+     Directory containing automatically generated information.
+
+     For storing automatic extracted information about the TeX macros
+     shared by all users of a site.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Automatic Private,  Next: Automatic Local,  Prev: Automatic Global,  Up: Automatic
+
+5.5.2 Automatic Customization for a User
+----------------------------------------
+
+You should specify where you store your private TeX macros, so AUCTeX
+can extract their information.  The extracted information will go to the
+directories listed in 'TeX-auto-private'
+
+   Use 'M-x TeX-auto-generate <RET>' to extract the information.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-macro-private
+     Directories where you store your personal TeX macros.  The value
+     defaults to the directories listed in the 'TEXINPUTS' and
+     'BIBINPUTS' environment variables or to the respective directories
+     in '$TEXMFHOME' of 'kpsewhich' setting if no results can be
+     obtained from the environment variables.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-auto-private
+     List of directories containing automatically generated AUCTeX style
+     files.  These correspond to the personal TeX macros.
+
+ -- Command: TeX-auto-generate TEX AUTO
+     ('M-x TeX-auto-generate <RET>') Generate style hook for TEX and
+     store it in AUTO.  If TEX is a directory, generate style hooks for
+     all files in the directory.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-style-private
+     List of directories containing hand generated AUCTeX style files.
+     These correspond to the personal TeX macros.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Automatic Local,  Prev: Automatic Private,  Up: Automatic
+
+5.5.3 Automatic Customization for a Directory
+---------------------------------------------
+
+AUCTeX can update the style information about a file each time you save
+it, and it will do this if the directory 'TeX-auto-local' exists.
+'TeX-auto-local' is by default set to '"auto"', so simply creating an
+'auto' directory will enable automatic saving of style information.
+
+   The advantage of doing this is that macros, labels, etc. defined in
+any file in a multifile document will be known in all the files in the
+document.  The disadvantage is that saving will be slower.  To disable,
+set 'TeX-auto-local' to nil.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-style-local
+     Directory containing hand generated TeX information.
+
+     These correspond to TeX macros found in the current directory.
+
+ -- User Option: TeX-auto-local
+     Directory containing automatically generated TeX information.
+
+     These correspond to TeX macros found in the current directory.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Style Files,  Prev: Automatic,  Up: Customization
+
+5.6 Writing Your Own Style Support
+==================================
+
+*Note Automatic::, for a discussion about automatically generated
+global, private, and local style files.  The hand generated style files
+are equivalent, except that they by default are found in 'style'
+directories instead of 'auto' directories.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Simple Style::                A Simple Style File
+* Adding Macros::               Adding Support for Macros
+* Adding Environments::         Adding Support for Environments
+* Adding Other::                Adding or Examining Other Information
+* Hacking the Parser::          Automatic Extraction of New Things
+
+   If you write some useful support for a public TeX style file, please
+send it to us.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Simple Style,  Next: Adding Macros,  Up: Style Files
+
+5.6.1 A Simple Style File
+-------------------------
+
+Here is a simple example of a style file.
+
+     ;;; book.el - Special code for book style.
+
+     (TeX-add-style-hook
+      "book"
+      (lambda ()
+        (LaTeX-largest-level-set "part"))
+      TeX-dialect)
+
+   The example is from the AUCTeX sources and is loaded for any LaTeX
+document using the book document class (or style before LaTeX2e).  (Note
+that the above code is much simplified for explanatory purpose.)  The
+file specifies that the largest kind of section in such a document is
+'part'.  The interesting thing to notice is that the style file defines
+an (anonymous) function, and adds it to the list of loaded style hooks
+by calling 'TeX-add-style-hook'.
+
+   The first time the user indirectly tries to access some
+style-specific information, such as the largest sectioning command
+available, the style hooks for all files directly or indirectly read by
+the current document are executed.  The actual files will only be
+evaluated once, but the hooks will be called for each buffer using the
+style file.
+
+   Note that the basename of the style file and the name of the style
+hook should usually be identical.
+
+ -- Function: TeX-add-style-hook STYLE HOOK &optional DIALECT-EXPR
+     Add HOOK to the list of functions to run when we use the TeX file
+     STYLE and the current dialect is one in the set derived from
+     DIALECT-EXPR.  When DIALECT-EXPR is omitted, then HOOK is allowed
+     to be run whatever the current dialect is.
+
+     DIALECT-EXPR may be one of:
+
+        * A symbol indicating a singleton containing one basic TeX
+          dialect, this symbol shall be selected among:
+          ':latex'
+               For all files in LaTeX mode, or any mode derived thereof.
+          ':bibtex'
+               For all files in BibTeX mode, or any mode derived
+               thereof.
+          ':texinfo'
+               For all files in Texinfo mode.
+          ':plain-tex'
+               For all files in plain-TeX mode, or any mode derived
+               thereof.
+          ':context'
+               For all files in ConTeXt mode.
+          ':classopt'
+               For class options of LaTeX document.  This is provided as
+               pseudo-dialect for style hooks associated with class
+               options.
+        * A logical expression like:
+          '(or DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 ... DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N)'
+               For union of the sets of dialects corresponding to
+               DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 through DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N
+          '(and DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 ... DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N)'
+               For intersection of the sets of dialects corresponding to
+               DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 through DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N
+          '(nor DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 ... DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N)'
+               For complement of the union sets of dialects
+               corresponding to DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 through
+               DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N relatively to the set of all
+               supported dialects
+          '(not DIALECT-EXPR)'
+               For complement set of dialect corresponding to
+               DIALECT-EXPR relatively to the set of all supported
+               dialects
+
+   In case of adding a style hook for LaTeX, when calling function
+'TeX-add-style-hook' it is thought more futureproof for argument
+DIALECT-EXPR to pass constant 'TeX-dialect' currently defined to
+':latex', rather than passing ':latex' directly.
+
+ -- Constant: TeX-dialect
+     Default dialect for use with function 'TeX-add-style-hook' for
+     argument DIALECT-EXPR when the hook is to be run only on LaTeX
+     file, or any mode derived thereof.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Adding Macros,  Next: Adding Environments,  Prev: Simple Style,  Up: Style Files
+
+5.6.2 Adding Support for Macros
+-------------------------------
+
+The most common thing to define in a style hook is new symbols (TeX
+macros).  Most likely along with a description of the arguments to the
+function, since the symbol itself can be defined automatically.
+
+   Here are a few examples from 'latex.el'.
+
+     (TeX-add-style-hook
+      "latex"
+      (lambda ()
+        (TeX-add-symbols
+         '("arabic" TeX-arg-counter)
+         '("label" TeX-arg-define-label)
+         '("ref" TeX-arg-ref)
+         '("newcommand" TeX-arg-define-macro [ "Number of arguments" ] t)
+         '("newtheorem" TeX-arg-define-environment
+           [ TeX-arg-environment "Numbered like" ]
+           t [ TeX-arg-counter "Within counter" ]))))
+
+ -- Function: TeX-add-symbols SYMBOL ...
+     Add each SYMBOL to the list of known symbols.
+
+   Each argument to 'TeX-add-symbols' is a list describing one symbol.
+The head of the list is the name of the symbol, the remaining elements
+describe each argument.
+
+   If there are no additional elements, the symbol will be inserted with
+point inside braces.  Otherwise, each argument of this function should
+match an argument of the TeX macro.  What is done depends on the
+argument type.
+
+   If a macro is defined multiple times, AUCTeX will choose the one with
+the longest definition (i.e. the one with the most arguments).
+
+   Thus, to overwrite
+             '("tref" 1) ; one argument
+   you can specify
+             '("tref" TeX-arg-ref ignore) ; two arguments
+
+   'ignore' is a function that does not do anything, so when you insert
+a 'tref' you will be prompted for a label and no more.
+
+   You can use the following types of specifiers for arguments:
+
+'string'
+     Use the string as a prompt to prompt for the argument.
+
+'number'
+     Insert that many braces, leave point inside the first.  0 and -1
+     are special.  0 means that no braces are inserted.  -1 means that
+     braces are inserted around the macro and an active region (e.g.
+     '{\tiny foo}').  If there is no active region, no braces are
+     inserted.
+
+'nil'
+     Insert empty braces.
+
+'t'
+     Insert empty braces, leave point between the braces.
+
+'other symbols'
+     Call the symbol as a function.  You can define your own hook, or
+     use one of the predefined argument hooks.
+
+'list'
+     If the car is a string, insert it as a prompt and the next element
+     as initial input.  Otherwise, call the car of the list with the
+     remaining elements as arguments.
+
+'vector'
+     Optional argument.  If it has more than one element, parse it as a
+     list, otherwise parse the only element as above.  Use square
+     brackets instead of curly braces, and is not inserted on empty user
+     input.
+
+   A lot of argument hooks have already been defined.  The first
+argument to all hooks is a flag indicating if it is an optional
+argument.  It is up to the hook to determine what to do with the
+remaining arguments, if any.  Typically the next argument is used to
+overwrite the default prompt.
+
+'TeX-arg-conditional'
+     Implements if EXPR THEN ELSE.  If EXPR evaluates to true, parse
+     THEN as an argument list, else parse ELSE as an argument list.
+
+'TeX-arg-literal'
+     Insert its arguments into the buffer.  Used for specifying extra
+     syntax for a macro.
+
+'TeX-arg-free'
+     Parse its arguments but use no braces when they are inserted.
+
+'TeX-arg-eval'
+     Evaluate arguments and insert the result in the buffer.
+
+'TeX-arg-label'
+     Prompt for a label completing with known labels.  If RefTeX is
+     active, prompt for the reference format.
+
+'TeX-arg-ref'
+     Prompt for a label completing with known labels.  If RefTeX is
+     active, do not prompt for the reference format.  Usually, reference
+     macros should use this function instead of 'TeX-arg-label'.
+
+'TeX-arg-index-tag'
+     Prompt for an index tag.  This is the name of an index, not the
+     entry.
+
+'TeX-arg-index'
+     Prompt for an index entry completing with known entries.
+
+'TeX-arg-length'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX length completing with known lengths.
+
+'TeX-arg-macro'
+     Prompt for a TeX macro with completion.
+
+'TeX-arg-date'
+     Prompt for a date, defaulting to the current date.  The format of
+     the date is specified by the 'TeX-date-format' option.  If you want
+     to change the format when the 'babel' package is loaded with a
+     specific language, set 'TeX-date-format' inside the appropriate
+     language hook (for details *note European::).
+
+'TeX-arg-version'
+     Prompt for the version of a file, using as initial input the
+     current date.
+
+'TeX-arg-environment'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX environment with completion.
+
+'TeX-arg-cite'
+     Prompt for a BibTeX citation.  If the variable
+     'TeX-arg-cite-note-p' is non-nil, ask also for optional note in
+     citations.
+
+'TeX-arg-counter'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX counter completing with known counters.
+
+'TeX-arg-savebox'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX savebox completing with known saveboxes.
+
+'TeX-arg-file'
+     Prompt for a filename in the current directory, and use it with the
+     extension.
+
+'TeX-arg-file-name'
+     Prompt for a filename and use as initial input the name of the file
+     being visited in the current buffer, with extension.
+
+'TeX-arg-file-name-sans-extension'
+     Prompt for a filename and use as initial input the name of the file
+     being visited in the current buffer, without extension.
+
+'TeX-arg-input-file'
+     Prompt for the name of an input file in TeX's search path, and use
+     it without the extension.  Run the style hooks for the file.  (Note
+     that the behavior (type of prompt and inserted file name) of the
+     function can be controlled by the variable
+     'TeX-arg-input-file-search'.)
+
+'TeX-arg-define-label'
+     Prompt for a label completing with known labels.  Add label to list
+     of defined labels.
+
+'TeX-arg-define-length'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX length completing with known lengths.  Add
+     length to list of defined lengths.
+
+'TeX-arg-define-macro'
+     Prompt for a TeX macro with completion.  Add macro to list of
+     defined macros.
+
+'TeX-arg-define-environment'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX environment with completion.  Add environment to
+     list of defined environments.
+
+'TeX-arg-define-cite'
+     Prompt for a BibTeX citation.
+
+'TeX-arg-define-counter'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX counter.
+
+'TeX-arg-define-savebox'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX savebox.
+
+'TeX-arg-document'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX document class, using 'LaTeX-default-style' as
+     default value and 'LaTeX-default-options' as default list of
+     options.  If the variable 'TeX-arg-input-file-search' is t, you
+     will be able to complete with all LaTeX classes available on your
+     system, otherwise classes listed in the variable 'LaTeX-style-list'
+     will be used for completion.  It is also provided completion for
+     options of many common classes.
+
+'LaTeX-arg-usepackage'
+     Prompt for LaTeX packages.  If the variable
+     'TeX-arg-input-file-search' is t, you will be able to complete with
+     all LaTeX packages available on your system.  It is also provided
+     completion for options of many common packages.
+
+'TeX-arg-bibstyle'
+     Prompt for a BibTeX style file completing with all style available
+     on your system.
+
+'TeX-arg-bibliography'
+     Prompt for BibTeX database files completing with all databases
+     available on your system.
+
+'TeX-arg-corner'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX side or corner position with completion.
+
+'TeX-arg-lr'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX side with completion.
+
+'TeX-arg-tb'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX side with completion.
+
+'TeX-arg-pagestyle'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX pagestyle with completion.
+
+'TeX-arg-verb'
+     Prompt for delimiter and text.
+
+'TeX-arg-verb-delim-or-brace'
+     Prompt for delimiter and text.  This function is similar to
+     'TeX-arg-verb', but is intended for macros which take their
+     argument enclosed in delimiters or in braces.
+
+'TeX-arg-pair'
+     Insert a pair of numbers, use arguments for prompt.  The numbers
+     are surrounded by parentheses and separated with a comma.
+
+'TeX-arg-size'
+     Insert width and height as a pair.  No arguments.
+
+'TeX-arg-coordinate'
+     Insert x and y coordinates as a pair.  No arguments.
+
+'LaTeX-arg-author'
+     Prompt for document author, using 'LaTeX-default-author' as initial
+     input.
+
+'TeX-read-hook'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX hook and return it.
+
+'TeX-arg-hook'
+     Prompt for a LaTeX hook and insert it as a TeX macro argument.
+
+'TeX-read-key-val'
+     Prompt for a 'key=value' list of options and return them.
+
+'TeX-arg-key-val'
+     Prompt for a 'key=value' list of options and insert it as a TeX
+     macro argument.
+
+   If you add new hooks, you can assume that point is placed directly
+after the previous argument, or after the macro name if this is the
+first argument.  Please leave point located after the argument you are
+inserting.  If you want point to be located somewhere else after all
+hooks have been processed, set the value of 'TeX-exit-mark'.  It will
+point nowhere, until the argument hook sets it.
+
+   Some packages provide macros that are rarely useful to non-expert
+users.  Those should be marked as expert macros using
+'TeX-declare-expert-macros'.
+
+ -- Function: TeX-declare-expert-macros STYLE MACROS...
+     Declare MACROS as expert macros of STYLE.
+
+     Expert macros are completed depending on
+     'TeX-complete-expert-commands'.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Adding Environments,  Next: Adding Other,  Prev: Adding Macros,  Up: Style Files
+
+5.6.3 Adding Support for Environments
+-------------------------------------
+
+Adding support for environments is very much like adding support for TeX
+macros, except that each environment normally only takes one argument,
+an environment hook.  The example is again a short version of
+'latex.el'.
+
+     (TeX-add-style-hook
+      "latex"
+      (lambda ()
+        (LaTeX-add-environments
+         '("document" LaTeX-env-document)
+         '("enumerate" LaTeX-env-item)
+         '("itemize" LaTeX-env-item)
+         '("list" LaTeX-env-list))))
+
+   It is completely up to the environment hook to insert the
+environment, but the function 'LaTeX-insert-environment' may be of some
+help.  The hook will be called with the name of the environment as its
+first argument, and extra arguments can be provided by adding them to a
+list after the hook.
+
+   For simple environments with arguments, for example defined with
+'\newenvironment', you can make AUCTeX prompt for the arguments by
+giving the prompt strings in the call to 'LaTeX-add-environments'.  The
+fact that an argument is optional can be indicated by wrapping the
+prompt string in a vector.
+
+   For example, if you have defined a 'loop' environment with the three
+arguments FROM, TO, and STEP, you can add support for them in a style
+file.
+
+     %% loop.sty
+
+     \newenvironment{loop}[3]{...}{...}
+
+     ;; loop.el
+
+     (TeX-add-style-hook
+      "loop"
+      (lambda ()
+        (LaTeX-add-environments
+         '("loop" "From" "To" "Step"))))
+
+   If an environment is defined multiple times, AUCTeX will choose the
+one with the longest definition.  Thus, if you have an enumerate style
+file, and want it to replace the standard LaTeX enumerate hook above,
+you could define an 'enumerate.el' file as follows, and place it in the
+appropriate style directory.
+
+     (TeX-add-style-hook
+      "latex"
+      (lambda ()
+        (LaTeX-add-environments
+         '("enumerate" LaTeX-env-enumerate foo))))
+
+     (defun LaTeX-env-enumerate (environment &optional _ignore) ...)
+
+   The symbol 'foo' will be passed to 'LaTeX-env-enumerate' as the
+second argument, but since we only added it to overwrite the definition
+in 'latex.el' it is just ignored.
+
+ -- Function: LaTeX-add-environments ENV ...
+     Add each ENV to list of loaded environments.
+
+ -- Function: LaTeX-insert-environment ENV [ EXTRA ]
+     Insert environment of type ENV, with optional argument EXTRA.
+
+   Following is a list of available hooks for 'LaTeX-add-environments':
+
+'LaTeX-env-item'
+     Insert the given environment and the first item.
+
+'LaTeX-env-figure'
+     Insert the given figure-like environment with a caption and a
+     label.
+
+'LaTeX-env-array'
+     Insert the given array-like environment with position and column
+     specifications.
+
+'LaTeX-env-label'
+     Insert the given environment with a label.
+
+'LaTeX-env-list'
+     Insert the given list-like environment, a specifier for the label
+     and the first item.
+
+'LaTeX-env-minipage'
+     Insert the given minipage-like environment with position and width
+     specifications.
+
+'LaTeX-env-tabular*'
+     Insert the given tabular*-like environment with width, position and
+     column specifications.
+
+'LaTeX-env-picture'
+     Insert the given environment with width and height specifications.
+
+'LaTeX-env-bib'
+     Insert the given environment with a label for a bibitem.
+
+'LaTeX-env-contents'
+     Insert the given environment with a filename as its argument.
+
+'LaTeX-env-args'
+     Insert the given environment with arguments.  You can use this as a
+     hook in case you want to specify multiple complex arguments just
+     like in elements of 'TeX-add-symbols'.  This is most useful if the
+     specification of arguments to be prompted for with strings and
+     strings wrapped in a vector as described above is too limited.
+
+     Here is an example from 'listings.el' which calls a function with
+     one argument in order to prompt for a 'key=value' list to be
+     inserted as an optional argument of the 'lstlisting' environment:
+
+          (LaTeX-add-environments
+           '("lstlisting" LaTeX-env-args
+             [TeX-arg-key-val LaTeX-listings-key-val-options]))
+
+   Some packages provide environments that are rarely useful to
+non-expert users.  Those should be marked as expert environments using
+'LaTeX-declare-expert-environments'.
+
+ -- Function: LaTeX-declare-expert-environments STYLE ENVIRONMENTS...
+     Declare ENVIRONMENTS as expert environments of STYLE.
+
+     Expert environments are completed depending on
+     'TeX-complete-expert-commands'.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Adding Other,  Next: Hacking the Parser,  Prev: Adding Environments,  Up: Style Files
+
+5.6.4 Adding or Examining Other Information
+-------------------------------------------
+
+5.6.4.1 Adding bibliographies in style hooks
+............................................
+
+You can also specify bibliographical databases and labels in the style
+file.  This is probably of little use, since this information will
+usually be automatically generated from the TeX file anyway.
+
+ -- Function: LaTeX-add-bibliographies BIBLIOGRAPHY ...
+     Add each BIBLIOGRAPHY to list of loaded bibliographies.
+
+ -- Function: LaTeX-add-labels LABEL ...
+     Add each LABEL to the list of known labels.
+
+5.6.4.2 Examining Package/Class Options
+.......................................
+
+In LaTeX documents, style hooks can find the package names and those
+options given as optional argument(s) of '\usepackage' in
+'LaTeX-provided-package-options'.
+
+ -- Variable: LaTeX-provided-package-options
+     Buffer local variable holding alist of options provided to LaTeX
+     packages.  Each element is a cons cell '(PACKAGE . OPTION-LIST)'.
+     For example, its value will be
+            (("babel" . ("german"))
+             ("geometry" . ("a4paper" "top=2cm" "left=2.5cm" "right=2.5cm"))
+             ...)
+
+   You can examine whether there is a specific package-option pair by
+'LaTeX-provided-package-options-member'.
+
+ -- Function: LaTeX-provided-package-options-member PACKAGE OPTION
+     Return non-'nil' if OPTION has been given to PACKAGE.  The value is
+     actually the tail of the list of options given to PACKAGE.
+
+   There are similar facilities for class names and those options given
+in '\documentclass' declaration.
+
+ -- Variable: LaTeX-provided-class-options
+     Buffer local variable holding alist of options provided to LaTeX
+     classes.  Each element is a cons cell '(CLASS . OPTION-LIST)'.  For
+     example, its value will be
+            (("book" . ("a4paper" "11pt" "openany" "fleqn"))
+             ...)
+
+ -- Function: LaTeX-provided-class-options-member CLASS OPTION
+     Return non-'nil' if OPTION has been given to CLASS.  The value is
+     actually the tail of the list of options given to CLASS.
+
+ -- Function: LaTeX-match-class-option REGEXP
+     Check if a documentclass option matching REGEXP is active.  Return
+     first found class option matching REGEXP, or nil if not found.
+
+   These functions are also useful to implement customized predicate(s)
+in 'TeX-view-predicate-list'.  *Note Starting Viewers::.
+
+5.6.4.3 Adding Support for Option Completion
+............................................
+
+When the user inserts '\usepackage' by 'C-c C-m', AUCTeX asks for the
+optional arguments after the package name is given.  The style file of
+that package can provide completion support for the optional arguments.
+
+ -- Variable: LaTeX-PACKAGENAME-package-options
+     List of optional arguments available for the package.
+
+   Here is an excerption from 'acronym.el':
+     (defvar LaTeX-acronym-package-options
+       '("footnote" "nohyperlinks" "printonlyused" "withpage"
+         "smaller" "dua" "nolist")
+       "Package options for the acronym package.")
+
+   When the package accepts key-value style optional arguments, more
+sophisticated completion support is needed.  The package style file can
+provide dynamic completion support by custom elisp function.
+
+ -- Function: LaTeX-PACKAGENAME-package-options
+     This function should ask the user for optional arguments and return
+     them as a string, instead of built-in option query facility.  When
+     this function is defined, AUCTeX calls it with no argument.
+
+   Here is an excerption from 'acro.el':
+     (defun LaTeX-acro-package-options ()
+       "Prompt for package options for the acro package."
+       (TeX-read-key-val t LaTeX-acro-package-options-list))
+
+   As you can see in the above example, a utility function
+'TeX-read-key-val' is available to read key-value pair(s) from users.
+
+   Note that 'defvar' or 'defun' of 'LaTeX-PACKAGENAME-package-options'
+should be at the top level of the style file and not inside the style
+hook, because the style hook is not yet called when the user inputs the
+optional arguments in response to 'C-c C-m'.
+
+   There are similar facilities for class options.  When the user
+inserts '\documentclass' by 'C-c C-e', the respective class style file
+can provide completion support for the optional arguments.
+
+ -- Variable: LaTeX-CLASSNAME-class-options
+     List of optional arguments available for the class.
+
+ -- Function: LaTeX-CLASSNAME-class-options
+     Which see.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Hacking the Parser,  Prev: Adding Other,  Up: Style Files
+
+5.6.5 Automatic Extraction of New Things
+----------------------------------------
+
+The automatic TeX information extractor works by searching for regular
+expressions in the TeX files, and storing the matched information.  You
+can add support for new constructs to the parser, something that is
+needed when you add new commands to define symbols.
+
+   For example, in the file 'macro.tex' I define the following macro.
+
+     \newcommand{\newmacro}[5]{%
+     \def#1{#3\index{#4@#5~cite{#4}}\nocite{#4}}%
+     \def#2{#5\index{#4@#5~cite{#4}}\nocite{#4}}%
+     }
+
+   AUCTeX will automatically figure out that 'newmacro' is a macro that
+takes five arguments.  However, it is not smart enough to automatically
+see that each time we use the macro, two new macros are defined.  We can
+specify this information in a style hook file.
+
+     ;;; macro.el --- Special code for my own macro file.
+
+     ;;; Code:
+
+     (defvar TeX-newmacro-regexp
+       '("\\\\newmacro{\\\\\\([a-zA-Z]+\\)}{\\\\\\([a-zA-Z]+\\)}"
+         (1 2) TeX-auto-multi)
+       "Matches \\newmacro definitions.")
+
+     (defvar TeX-auto-multi nil
+       "Temporary for parsing \\newmacro definitions.")
+
+     (defun TeX-macro-cleanup ()
+       "Move symbols from `TeX-auto-multi' to `TeX-auto-symbol'."
+       (mapc (lambda (list)
+               (mapc (lambda (symbol)
+                       (setq TeX-auto-symbol
+                             (cons symbol TeX-auto-symbol)))
+                     list))
+             TeX-auto-multi))
+
+     (defun TeX-macro-prepare ()
+       "Clear `Tex-auto-multi' before use."
+       (setq TeX-auto-multi nil))
+
+     (add-hook 'TeX-auto-prepare-hook #'TeX-macro-prepare)
+     (add-hook 'TeX-auto-cleanup-hook #'TeX-macro-cleanup)
+
+     (TeX-add-style-hook
+      "macro"
+      (lambda ()
+        (TeX-auto-add-regexp TeX-newmacro-regexp)
+        (TeX-add-symbols '("newmacro"
+                           TeX-arg-macro
+                           (TeX-arg-macro "Capitalized macro: \\")
+                           t
+                           "BibTeX entry: "
+                           nil))))
+
+     ;;; macro.el ends here
+
+   When this file is first loaded, it adds a new entry to
+'TeX-newmacro-regexp', and defines a function to be called before the
+parsing starts, and one to be called after the parsing is done.  It also
+declares a variable to contain the data collected during parsing.
+Finally, it adds a style hook which describes the 'newmacro' macro, as
+we have seen it before.
+
+   So the general strategy is: Add a new entry to 'TeX-newmacro-regexp'.
+Declare a variable to contain intermediate data during parsing.  Add
+hook to be called before and after parsing.  In this case, the hook
+before parsing just initializes the variable, and the hook after parsing
+collects the data from the variable, and adds them to the list of
+symbols found.
+
+ -- Variable: TeX-auto-regexp-list
+     List of regular expressions matching TeX macro definitions.
+
+     The list has the following format ((REGEXP MATCH TABLE) ...), that
+     is, each entry is a list with three elements.
+
+     REGEXP.  Regular expression matching the macro we want to parse.
+
+     MATCH.  A number or list of numbers, each representing one
+     parenthesized subexpression matched by REGEXP.
+
+     TABLE.  The symbol table to store the data.  This can be a
+     function, in which case the function is called with the argument
+     MATCH.  Use 'TeX-match-buffer' to get match data.  If it is not a
+     function, it is presumed to be the name of a variable containing a
+     list of match data.  The matched data (a string if MATCH is a
+     number, a list of strings if MATCH is a list of numbers) is put in
+     front of the table.
+
+ -- Variable: TeX-auto-prepare-hook nil
+     List of functions to be called before parsing a TeX file.
+
+ -- Variable: TeX-auto-cleanup-hook nil
+     List of functions to be called after parsing a TeX file.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Appendices,  Next: Indices,  Prev: Customization,  Up: Top
+
+Appendix A Copying, Changes, Development, FAQ, Texinfo Mode
+***********************************************************
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Copying this Manual::
+* Changes::
+* Development::
+* FAQ::
+* Texinfo mode::
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Copying this Manual,  Next: Changes,  Up: Appendices
+
+A.1 Copying this Manual
+=======================
+
+The copyright notice for this manual is:
+
+   This manual is for AUCTeX (version 13.1.3 from 2022-04-16), a
+sophisticated TeX environment for Emacs.
+
+   Copyright (C) 1992-1995, 2001, 2002, 2004-2022 Free Software
+Foundation, Inc.
+
+     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+     document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+     Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
+     Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts and no
+     Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section
+     entitled "GNU Free Documentation License."
+
+   The full license text can be read here:
+
+* Menu:
+
+* GNU Free Documentation License:: License for copying this manual.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Copying this Manual
+
+A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
+------------------------------------
+
+                     Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
+
+     Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software
+     Foundation, Inc.  <https://fsf.org/>
+
+     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+  0. PREAMBLE
+
+     The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
+     functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
+     assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
+     with or without modifying it, either commercially or
+     noncommercially.  Secondarily, this License preserves for the
+     author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
+     being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
+
+     This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
+     works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
+     It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
+     license designed for free software.
+
+     We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
+     free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
+     free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
+     that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
+     software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
+     of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.  We
+     recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
+     instruction or reference.
+
+  1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
+
+     This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
+     that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can
+     be distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice
+     grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
+     to use that work under the conditions stated herein.  The
+     "Document", below, refers to any such manual or work.  Any member
+     of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you".  You accept
+     the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way
+     requiring permission under copyright law.
+
+     A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
+     Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
+     modifications and/or translated into another language.
+
+     A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
+     of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
+     publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
+     subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
+     fall directly within that overall subject.  (Thus, if the Document
+     is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
+     explain any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of
+     historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
+     of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
+     regarding them.
+
+     The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
+     titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
+     notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
+     If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it
+     is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.  The Document may
+     contain zero Invariant Sections.  If the Document does not identify
+     any Invariant Sections then there are none.
+
+     The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
+     listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
+     that says that the Document is released under this License.  A
+     Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
+     be at most 25 words.
+
+     A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+     represented in a format whose specification is available to the
+     general public, that is suitable for revising the document
+     straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed
+     of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely
+     available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text
+     formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats
+     suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an otherwise
+     Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has
+     been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by
+     readers is not Transparent.  An image format is not Transparent if
+     used for any substantial amount of text.  A copy that is not
+     "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
+
+     Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
+     ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
+     SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming
+     simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification.
+     Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG.
+     Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and
+     edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which
+     the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and
+     the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
+     processors for output purposes only.
+
+     The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+     plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
+     material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
+     works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
+     Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
+     work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+
+     The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies
+     of the Document to the public.
+
+     A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document
+     whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
+     following text that translates XYZ in another language.  (Here XYZ
+     stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
+     "Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".)
+     To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when you modify the
+     Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according
+     to this definition.
+
+     The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
+     which states that this License applies to the Document.  These
+     Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
+     this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
+     implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
+     has no effect on the meaning of this License.
+
+  2. VERBATIM COPYING
+
+     You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
+     commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
+     copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
+     applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
+     add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
+     may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
+     or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
+     you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
+     distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the
+     conditions in section 3.
+
+     You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
+     and you may publicly display copies.
+
+  3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
+
+     If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
+     have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
+     the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
+     enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
+     these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
+     Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
+     and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
+     front cover must present the full title with all words of the title
+     equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material on the
+     covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the covers, as
+     long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these
+     conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
+
+     If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
+     legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
+     reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
+     adjacent pages.
+
+     If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
+     numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable
+     Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with
+     each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general
+     network-using public has access to download using public-standard
+     network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free
+     of added material.  If you use the latter option, you must take
+     reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque
+     copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will
+     remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one
+     year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or
+     through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
+
+     It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
+     the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies,
+     to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
+     Document.
+
+  4. MODIFICATIONS
+
+     You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
+     under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
+     release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the
+     Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing
+     distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever
+     possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these things in
+     the Modified Version:
+
+       A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
+          distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous
+          versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
+          History section of the Document).  You may use the same title
+          as a previous version if the original publisher of that
+          version gives permission.
+
+       B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
+          entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
+          the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
+          principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
+          authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
+          from this requirement.
+
+       C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
+          Modified Version, as the publisher.
+
+       D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
+
+       E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
+          adjacent to the other copyright notices.
+
+       F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
+          notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
+          Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
+          the Addendum below.
+
+       G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
+          Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
+          license notice.
+
+       H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
+
+       I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title,
+          and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
+          authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the
+          Title Page.  If there is no section Entitled "History" in the
+          Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and
+          publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add
+          an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the
+          previous sentence.
+
+       J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
+          for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
+          likewise the network locations given in the Document for
+          previous versions it was based on.  These may be placed in the
+          "History" section.  You may omit a network location for a work
+          that was published at least four years before the Document
+          itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers
+          to gives permission.
+
+       K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
+          Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section
+          all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
+          acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
+
+       L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered
+          in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers or the
+          equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
+
+       M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements".  Such a section
+          may not be included in the Modified Version.
+
+       N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
+          "Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant
+          Section.
+
+       O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+     If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
+     appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
+     material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate
+     some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this, add their
+     titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's
+     license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any other
+     section titles.
+
+     You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
+     nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
+     parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
+     has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
+     definition of a standard.
+
+     You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
+     and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of
+     the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one passage
+     of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
+     through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the Document
+     already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added
+     by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on
+     behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old
+     one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added
+     the old one.
+
+     The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
+     License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
+     assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
+
+  5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
+
+     You may combine the Document with other documents released under
+     this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
+     modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all
+     of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
+     unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
+     combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
+     their Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+     The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
+     multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
+     copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
+     but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
+     by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
+     original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
+     unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
+     the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
+     combined work.
+
+     In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
+     "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
+     Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
+     "Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications".  You
+     must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements."
+
+  6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
+
+     You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
+     documents released under this License, and replace the individual
+     copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
+     that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
+     rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents
+     in all other respects.
+
+     You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
+     distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
+     a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this
+     License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that
+     document.
+
+  7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
+
+     A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
+     separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a
+     storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the
+     copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
+     legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
+     works permit.  When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
+     License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
+     are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
+
+     If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
+     copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
+     of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed
+     on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
+     electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
+     form.  Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
+     the whole aggregate.
+
+  8. TRANSLATION
+
+     Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
+     distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
+     4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
+     permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
+     translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
+     original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
+     translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
+     Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
+     include the original English version of this License and the
+     original versions of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a
+     disagreement between the translation and the original version of
+     this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
+     prevail.
+
+     If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
+     "Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to
+     Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
+     actual title.
+
+  9. TERMINATION
+
+     You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
+     except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
+     otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void,
+     and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+
+     However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
+     license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
+     provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
+     finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
+     copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
+     reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
+
+     Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
+     reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
+     violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
+     received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
+     that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
+     after your receipt of the notice.
+
+     Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
+     the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you
+     under this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not
+     permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the
+     same material does not give you any rights to use it.
+
+  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
+
+     The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
+     the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
+     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
+     <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+     Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
+     number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
+     version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
+     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
+     that specified version or of any later version that has been
+     published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If the
+     Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may
+     choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free
+     Software Foundation.  If the Document specifies that a proxy can
+     decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
+     proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
+     authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
+
+  11. RELICENSING
+
+     "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any
+     World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
+     provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works.  A
+     public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
+     A "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the
+     site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
+     site.
+
+     "CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
+     license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
+     corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
+     California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
+     published by that same organization.
+
+     "Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
+     in part, as part of another Document.
+
+     An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this
+     License, and if all works that were first published under this
+     License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
+     incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
+     texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior
+     to November 1, 2008.
+
+     The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the
+     site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1,
+     2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
+
+ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
+----------------------------------------------------
+
+To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
+the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
+notices just after the title page:
+
+       Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
+       Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+       under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
+       or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+       with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
+       Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
+       Free Documentation License''.
+
+   If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
+Texts, replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
+
+         with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
+         the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
+         being LIST.
+
+   If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
+combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
+situation.
+
+   If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
+recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free
+software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit
+their use in free software.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Changes,  Next: Development,  Prev: Copying this Manual,  Up: Appendices
+
+A.2 Changes and New Features
+============================
+
+News since last release
+-----------------------
+
+   * AUCTeX now requires GNU Emacs 25.1 or higher.
+
+   * AUCTeX tracks the change in Emacs where initial inputs in the
+     minibuffer during queries are getting phased out.  Queries for the
+     mandatory arguments of macros and environments are adjusted where
+     applicable.  The value which will be used after hitting 'RET'
+     without other input is shown in the prompt in parentheses prefixed
+     with 'default'.  For this change the signature of the function
+     'TeX-arg-length' is altered.  The old argument list was:
+          (defun TeX-arg-length (optional &optional prompt
+                                          initial-input definition default)
+
+     whereas the new one is:
+          (defun TeX-arg-length (optional &optional prompt
+                                          default initial-input definition)
+
+     Note the position change of 'DEFAULT'.
+
+   * Indenting of conditionals is improved.  Code inside constructs like
+     '\ifx . \else . \fi' is correctly indented.  An interface for style
+     files is also introduced which can add their macros to the
+     indentation engine.  Check the file 'algpseudocode.el' for an
+     example.
+
+   * You can optionally enable indent inside square brackets '[]' by new
+     user options 'TeX-indent-open-delimiters' and
+     'TeX-indent-close-delimiters'.  *Note Indenting::.
+
+   * Now 'tex-buf.el' is merged into 'tex.el' and no longer exists.  If
+     your personal code has '(require 'tex-buf)', one of the following
+     prescriptions would serve.
+       1. Remove '(require 'tex-buf)'.
+       2. Replace it with '(require 'tex)'.
+       3. Replace it with '(require 'latex)'.
+
+News in 13.1
+------------
+
+   * In math environments 'gather', 'gather*', 'gathered', 'multline'
+     and 'multline*', fill commands such as 'M-q' and 'C-c C-q C-e' are
+     disabled.  This sorts out the inconsistency between those and
+     'equation', 'displaymath' environments, in latter of which filling
+     is already disabled.
+
+     If you want filling in such environments, customize
+     'LaTeX-indent-environment-list' to remove them.
+
+     Auto fill continues to work in such environment anyway.
+
+     In addition, AUCTeX adds support of alignment at '&' sign in
+     'align'-like environments such as 'alignat', 'aligned' and so on,
+     as well as 'matrix'-like environments such as 'pmatrix', 'bmatrix'
+     and so on.
+
+   * Now two commands 'Texindex' and 'Texi2dvi' are available when you
+     type 'C-c C-c' in Texinfo mode.  The command 'Texindex' runs
+     'texindex' on index files and 'Texi2dvi' runs 'pdftexi2dvi' or
+     'texi2dvi' according to the value of 'TeX-PDF-mode'.
+
+     So you can typeset Texinfo documents into PDF or DVI format from
+     within AUCTeX.
+
+   * AUCTeX's own help messages for LaTeX errors are now shown only for
+     LaTeX runs.  AUCTeX shows raw error/warning messages found in
+     '.log' files for runs of formats other than LaTeX, such as plain
+     TeX, ConTeXt and Texinfo, as it does even for LaTeX runs when it
+     can't find a matching entry in its own help message catalogue.
+
+     Due to this change, customize option 'TeX-error-description-list'
+     can no longer have a fallback entry that matches any error.  If
+     your customized value includes such entry, typically '(".*" . "No
+     help available")', please remove it.
+
+   * Two functions 'TeX-split-string' and 'TeX-assoc' are now obsolete
+     and will be removed in future release.  If your personal code uses
+     these functions, use 'split-string' and 'assoc-string' instead.
+
+   * The function 'TeX-read-key-val' now accepts a function call as
+     second argument.  This change should help AUCTeX style writers who
+     use 'TeX-arg-key-val' and have to deal with dynamic key-values.
+     Example of usage:
+          (TeX-add-style-hook "foo"
+           (lambda ()
+             (TeX-add-symbols
+              '("bar" (TeX-arg-key-val (function-returning-key-val))))))
+
+   * Since AUCTeX 12.2, 'C-x C-w' accidentally disabled the parse on
+     save in that buffer, even when you enabled 'TeX-auto-save' option.
+     This bug was fixed.
+
+   * AUCTeX now requires GNU Emacs 24.3 or higher.
+
+   * Old implementations for viewers were discarded, as announced long
+     before.  The variables 'TeX-output-view-style' and 'TeX-view-style'
+     have no effect now.  The former placeholders '%v' and '%vv' in
+     'TeX-command-list' are ignored.
+
+   * AUCTeX now uses lexical binding which has been introduced in Emacs
+     24.  This change should have no user-visible effect and require no
+     manual adaptions except in the following cases.
+
+        - Entries added to the customization variable 'TeX-expand-list'
+          also had access to variables 'command' and 'pos'.  Those are
+          now properly declared and named 'TeX-expand-command' and
+          'TeX-expand-pos'.
+
+        - Entries added to the customization variable 'TeX-expand-list'
+          had access to a variable 'file' which was bound to
+          'TeX-active-master', i.e., it evaluated to either the master
+          or region file.  This usage must be replaced with either
+          'TeX-active-master' or 'TeX-active-master-with-quotes'.
+
+        - Viewer entries in 'TeX-view-program-list' also had access to a
+          variable 'file' which was bound to the name of the master or
+          region file without extension.  Instead, the function
+          'TeX-active-master' has to be used now.
+
+        - Macro argument parsing functions could set a variable
+          'exit-mark' to the buffer position where point should be left
+          after all arguments have been read.  This variable is now
+          named 'TeX-exit-mark'.
+
+        - The functions in 'LaTeX-section-hook' had access or modified
+          the previously undeclared variables 'title', 'name', 'level',
+          'done-mark', and 'toc'.  These variables are now properly
+          declared and have the 'LaTeX-' prefix, e.g.,
+          'LaTeX-done-mark'.
+
+        - The functions in 'ConTeXt-numbered-section-hook' and
+          'ConTeXt-unnumbered-section-hook' had access or modified the
+          previously undeclared variables 'title', 'name', 'level',
+          'done-mark', and 'reference'.  These variables are now
+          properly declared and have the 'ConTeXt-' prefix, e.g.,
+          'ConTeXt-title'.
+
+        - The functions in 'TeX-translate-location-hook' could access
+          and modify the free variables 'file', 'line', 'error',
+          'offset', 'context', and 'string'.  Those are now properly
+          declared variables with the prefix 'TeX-translate-location-',
+          e.g., 'TeX-translate-location-file'.
+
+   * The constant 'LaTeX-dialect' has been renamed to 'TeX-dialect' and
+     moved from 'latex.el' to 'tex.el'.  'LaTeX-dialect' now is an
+     obsolete alias.
+
+   * The style 'latexinfo.el' is removed from AUCTeX.  'latexinfo.el'
+     was meant to support latexinfo which in return was a LaTeX-2.09
+     extension of Texinfo, but didn't manage to replace Texinfo.
+
+   * The style 'siunitx.el' is updated to support package version 3.
+     Key-value options provided by older package versions are removed,
+     deprecated macros and units are not supported anymore.
+
+   * AUCTeX has preliminary support for LaTeX-hooks.  Hooks provided by
+     LaTeX kernel are known and available for completion in
+     '\AddToHook', '\RemoveFromHook' and '\AddToHookNext'.
+
+   * AUCTeX is now able to place all generated output files, including
+     those that are produced by applications running under AUCTeX,
+     temporary files related to region processing and preview-latex
+     files, in an output directory.  To use this feature, set the new
+     user option 'TeX-output-dir' to the absolute path of the output
+     directory or a relative path which would be interpreted as being
+     relative to the master file in a multifile document.
+
+     Note that this feature doesn't work if the document includes sub
+     file placed in sub directory below the main file via '\include'
+     command.
+
+   * Many other bugs were fixed.
+
+News in 12.3
+------------
+
+   * Support for 'PSTricks' is now PDF-oriented.  AUCTeX no longer turns
+     off PDF mode for 'PSTricks' documents even without 'pst-pdf'.  It
+     now sets up 'TeX-PDF-from-DVI' option so that PDF output is
+     generated when 'TeX-PDF-mode' is enabled (default).  Users who want
+     DVI output should disable PDF mode explicitly by file local
+     variable, or customize 'TeX-PDF-mode' to 'nil'.
+
+   * The function 'font-latex-update-font-lock' has been obsoleted in
+     order to fix 'bug#37945'.  That function was used by several style
+     files in order to refresh fontification after adding new symbols or
+     verbatim constructs.  It is better to call 'font-lock-flush' in the
+     former case and 'font-latex-set-syntactic-keywords' in the latter
+     case.  The function 'font-latex-update-font-lock' still exists as a
+     no-op which only shows a warning explaining how to update font-lock
+     as mentioned above.
+
+   * Math expression highlighting was improved.  Highlighting for
+     documents with a lot of inline math expressions '$...$' won't get
+     scrambled now ('bug#33139').
+
+     In addition, it is no longer recommended to customize
+     'font-latex-math-environments'.  Use 'texmathp-tex-commands'
+     instead.  *Note Fontification of math::.
+
+   * AUCTeX tracks changes in LaTeX2e 2020-02-02 release.  AUCTeX
+     supports the improvements to LaTeX font selection mechanism (NFSS).
+     New macros like '\textsw' or '\textulc' are added to font insertion
+     keyboard commands.  *Note Font Specifiers::, for details.  Further,
+     the entries in the menu 'LaTeX', 'Insert Font' are reorganized and
+     adjusted accordingly.
+
+     Macros previously provided by 'textcomp.sty' are now part of LaTeX
+     kernel.  AUCTeX tracks this change as well and support for the new
+     macro '\legacyoldstylenums' is added.
+
+   * Insertion of environments in LaTeX documents (i.e. 'C-c C-e') was
+     improved.  The former code had a few bugs, which sometimes resulted
+     in either spurious empty line or spurious comment prefix, or both,
+     especially when the region is active.  Those bugs are now fixed.
+
+   * More bugs fixed, other minor features implemented.
+
+News in 12.2
+------------
+
+   * AUCTeX reflects the changes in LaTeX2e 2019-10-01 release.
+     'filecontents' environment now takes an optional argument and can
+     be used anywhere in a document.  The macros '\Ref' and
+     '\labelformat' are moved from 'varioref.sty' to LaTeX kernel.
+     'amsmath' has a new macro '\overunderset'.
+
+   * A new method is implemented in preview-latex to adjust the
+     foreground colors of generated images to those of Emacs, when the
+     LaTeX command produces PDF.  The traditional method became invalid
+     because of the change introduced in Ghostscript 9.27.
+     Unfortunately, the new method doesn't work due to a bug in
+     Ghostscript 9.27 and is valid only for Ghostscript > 9.27.  There
+     is also a fallback method for gs 9.27 users which displays plain
+     "black on white" images.  For successful function of preview-latex,
+     the users are encouraged to set up the new user option
+     'preview-pdf-color-adjust-method' to choose appropriate option
+     among the three: new, traditional and fallback method.
+
+   * AUCTeX has support for the Flymake package in Emacs 26 or newer.
+     To enable, call 'M-x flymake-mode <RET>' or add this to your
+     '.emacs' file:
+          (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook #'flymake-mode)
+
+   * The way the option 'TeX-record-buffer' is used was corrected.  It
+     was used in just the opposite way as the document says.  Erase the
+     customization if you have customized this option since it now acts
+     in reverse to your expectation.
+
+   * A former customize option 'japanese-TeX-command-list' is removed.
+     Use 'japanese-TeX-engine-default', or if it's really necessary,
+     customize 'TeX-command-list' directly if the task which the option
+     used to carry is required.
+
+   * Support for standard LaTeX without e-TeX extension is now very
+     limited.  It doesn't work if raw TeX code is put on the command
+     line to invoke 'latex' command.  It also fails for region
+     compilation ('C-c C-r' and so on) with documents of non-ascii file
+     name.  In addition, it no longer works with preview-latex.  We
+     consider this incompatibility is permissible because e-TeX
+     extension is enabled for standard LaTeX by default long ago.  LaTeX
+     variants such as XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX are not affected.
+
+   * Key binds in Texinfo mode are improved.  Typing '$', '^', '_' and
+     '\' now just self-inserts without pointless side effects in Texinfo
+     mode.
+
+     In addition, the option 'TeX-electric-escape' is now effective in
+     Texinfo mode.  When it is enabled, typing '@' will invoke
+     'TeX-electric-macro' offering completion in similar style with
+     other TeX modes of AUCTeX.
+
+   * Fontification support for 'biblatex' package is improved and
+     updated to macros provided by package version 3.12.  For qualified
+     lists, at least 2 mandatory arguments are fontified.
+
+   * Support for column specifiers 'w' and 'W' provided by 'array'
+     package is added to 'array.el'.  The correct counting of columns
+     only works when the 'align' parameter is enclosed in braces, e.g.,
+     'w{l}{3cm}'.  The short version 'wl{3cm}' is not supported.
+
+   * Entries for 'PDF Tools' are added in
+     'TeX-view-program-list-builtin' for Windows and macOS. This viewer
+     can be configured under these operating systems with an entry like
+     this in an init file:
+          (setq TeX-view-program-selection '((output-pdf "PDF Tools")))
+
+   * Several other bugs were fixed, many minor features were added.
+
+News in 12.1
+------------
+
+   * AUCTeX now requires GNU Emacs 24 or higher.  Support for XEmacs has
+     been dropped.
+
+   * Besides the change in the supported version of Emacs, there has
+     been no functional change in this release, which is equivalent to
+     version 11.92.
+
+News in 11.92
+-------------
+
+   * preview-latex is compatible with Ghostscript 9.22 where the
+     operator '.runandhide' is removed.  All occurrences of
+     '.runandhide' in preview-latex are replaced by alternative code
+     making it work with Ghostscript 9.22 again.
+
+   * AUCTeX has a new customize option
+     'TeX-math-input-method-off-regexp'.  When you begin to input a math
+     formula, the current input method is turned off if its name matches
+     this regular expression.
+
+     In fact this variable was introduced long before, but has not been
+     documented in info files nor turned into a customize option with
+     'defcustom' until this release.
+
+   * The window system focus is pulled back to Emacs when viewing with
+     evince-compatible viewers if a new customize option
+     'TeX-view-evince-keep-focus' is non-nil.
+
+   * The usual dose of bug fixes was administered.
+
+News in 11.91
+-------------
+
+   * Now AUCTeX has a logo.  The LaTeX code to create it is available in
+     the 'etc/' directory of the package.
+
+   * Add support for 'upmendex', an extension of 'makeindex' capable of
+     sorting indexes by unicode based ICU.
+
+   * Fix preview-latex to interact correctly with Japanese LaTeX.  The
+     parsing routine was made robust not to be confused by the 7-bit
+     encoding of Japanese text and the necessary option to LaTeX command
+     is kept even when preamble caching is enabled.
+
+   * The new "Glossaries" entry in 'TeX-command-list' runs the command
+     'makeglossaries'.
+
+   * Fontification of control symbols has been improved.  Characters
+     defined in 'font-latex-match-simple-exclude-list' do not receive
+     any fontification.  In DocTeX mode, the character '_' is removed
+     from 'font-latex-match-simple-exclude-list' in order to fontify
+     macros like '\__module_foo:nnn' correctly.
+
+   * Fontification of math environments has been improved.  Optional
+     and/or mandatory argument(s) to environments are not fontified.
+
+   * 'preview.sty' loads 'luatex85.sty' if possible and should be
+     compatible with newer luaTeX versions.
+
+   * AUCTeX has a new customize option 'TeX-ispell-verb-delimiters'.
+     This string contains usual characters used as delimiters for
+     in-line verbatim macros like '\verb'.  Text between delimiters
+     after an in-line verbatim macro will be skipped during spell
+     checking.
+
+   * Fontification of in-line verbatim macros has been improved.
+     'font-latex.el' recognizes an optional or a mandatory argument for
+     macros like '\Verb' from 'fancyvrb.sty', '\mint' and '\mintinline'
+     from 'minted.sty' and fontifies verbatim content correctly.
+
+   * AUCTeX can put and parse labels in optional argument of
+     environments.  Inserting labels is done by new function
+     'LaTeX-env-label-as-keyval'.  A new customize option
+     'LaTeX-listing-label' is available as prefix to labels in code
+     typesetting environments, e.g. 'lstlisting' environment provided by
+     'listings' package.  'LaTeX-listing-label' defaults to 'lst:'.
+     Parsing of labels for later referencing relies on two requirements:
+       1. Label should come as last key-value argument, and
+       2. label must be enclosed in braces, e.g.
+               \begin{lstlisting}[caption=Some Caption,label={lst:foo}]
+               ...
+               \end{lstlisting}
+
+   * The function 'LaTeX-label' now takes a second optional argument
+     'NO-INSERT'.  When non-'nil', 'LaTeX-label' reads a label and
+     returns it as a string.  This argument is also passed to any
+     function bound to 'LaTeX-label-function' (see next item).
+
+   * *Incompatible change:* The signature for the function passed with
+     the customize option 'LaTeX-label-function' has changed.  The
+     function bound to this variable is now expected to take an optional
+     second argument 'NO-INSERT'.  When this argument is non-'nil', the
+     function should read and only return a label as a string; insertion
+     is done by another function.
+
+   * Directory local variables were ineffective for
+     'japanese-latex-mode' and 'japanese-plain-tex-mode'.  This bug was
+     fixed.  (This was actually done in AUCTeX 11.90, but not
+     advertised)
+
+   * The output of Japanese text from Japanese TeX engines is decoded
+     correctly for most cases, according to the encoding of the TeX
+     documents and the locale.  The difference between MS Windows, macOS
+     and unix-like OS is taken into account.  (This was actually done in
+     AUCTeX 11.90, but not advertised)
+
+   * Quite a few new LaTeX packages are supported.
+
+   * As usual, many bugs were fixed.
+
+News in 11.90
+-------------
+
+   * In addition to the completion performed by 'TeX-complete-symbol',
+     AUCTeX now also supports the new Emacs standard completion-at-point
+     facility (see the Emacs command 'completion-at-point').  This also
+     means that modern completion UIs like company-mode work out of the
+     box in TeX and LaTeX buffers.  *Note Completion::, for details.
+
+   * Completion is now aware of being inside a math environment and then
+     completes math macros.
+
+   * AUCTeX is able to display several levels of super- and subscripts,
+     each one raised above and a bit smaller than its basis.  For this
+     feature, have a look at the customize options
+     'font-latex-fontify-script' (especially the new values
+     'multi-level' and 'invisible') and
+     'font-latex-fontify-script-max-level'.  Also, the script characters
+     '^' and '_' are also fontified with a special face named
+     'font-latex-script-char-face'.  *Note Fontification of math::, for
+     details.
+
+   * Parsing of format specification in various tabular environments has
+     been improved.  The function 'LaTeX-insert-item' ('C-c <LFD>')
+     inserts suitable number of ampersands for '*{num}{cols}'
+     constructs.  Style files for LaTeX packages 'tabularx', 'tabulary',
+     'longtable', 'dcolumn' and 'siunitx' are adapted to take advantage
+     of this improvement.
+
+   * AUCTeX has a new Ispell dictionary 'tex-ispell.el' for macros and
+     environments which will be skipped during spell checking.  The
+     activiation of this feature is controlled by a new customize option
+     'TeX-ispell-extend-skip-list', which is set to 't' and activated by
+     default.
+
+   * AUCTeX has a new customize option 'TeX-raise-frame-function' that
+     is currently only used by Evince and Atril inverse search to raise
+     the Emacs frame.
+
+   * When inserting a new float, AUCTeX will now prompt for a
+     short-caption if the length of the caption provided is greater than
+     a certain size.  This size is controlled via a new user option
+     'LaTeX-short-caption-prompt-length'.
+
+   * Parsing of the compilation log has been reworked.  You should
+     encounter fewer mistaken files while navigating through errors and
+     warnings.
+
+   * Two new user options, 'TeX-ignore-warnings' and
+     'TeX-suppress-ignored-warnings', allow ignoring certain warnings
+     after compilation of the document.  *Note Ignoring warnings::, for
+     details.
+
+   * A new option, 'TeX-PDF-from-DVI', controls if and how to produce a
+     PDF file by converting a DVI file.  This supersedes
+     'TeX-PDF-via-dvips-ps2pdf' which is still recognized but marked as
+     obsolete and may be removed in future releases.
+
+   * Support for a number of external viewers has been added:
+        * Atril viewer.  Forward and inverse search requires version
+          1.9.1 or later to work.
+
+        * dviout viewer on Windows.  Note that this setup works when
+          'TeX-source-correlate-method' is set to use 'source-specials'
+          for DVI, e.g.:
+               (setq TeX-source-correlate-method
+                     '((dvi . source-specials)
+                       (pdf . synctex)))
+          which is the default.
+
+        * SumatraPDF viewer on Windows.
+
+        * Zathura viewer.  Forward and inverse search requires a recent
+          version of the program to work (3.4 or later).
+
+   * A new function, 'TeX-documentation-texdoc', for reading
+     documentation with 'texdoc' has been added.  'TeX-doc' is still
+     available but now 'C-c ?' runs 'TeX-documentation-texdoc'.
+
+   * AUCTeX has a new custom option
+     'LaTeX-reftex-cite-format-auto-activate' which controls the
+     automatic activation of citation formats provided by RefTeX when a
+     style file is loaded and RefTeX is enabled.  Currently,
+     'biblatex.el', 'harvard.el', 'jurabib.el' and 'natbib.el' use this
+     feature.  If you have customized 'reftex-cite-format' and want to
+     use your settings, you should set this variable to 'nil'.
+
+   * AUCTeX now has limited support for the TikZ package.  For the
+     moment, this includes some basic support for prompting the user of
+     arguments to the '\draw' macro.
+
+   * The style 'graphicx.el' went through a bigger overhaul.  The
+     optional argument of command '\includegraphics' now supports
+     key-val query; keys can independently be chosen anytime by pressing
+     the <,> key.  As a side effect, the variable
+     'LaTeX-includegraphics-options-alist' is now no-op and is removed
+     from 'tex-style.el'.  You can safely remove any customization of it
+     from your init file.  The mandatory argument of '\includegraphics'
+     knows about image file extensions supported by the used engine and
+     offers them for inclusion.
+
+   * Support for other LaTeX packages was improved, and style files for
+     several new packages were added.
+
+   * Many bugs were crushed along the way.
+
+News in 11.89
+-------------
+
+   * You can now run all commands needed to compile a document and then
+     open the viewer with a single command: 'TeX-command-run-all', bound
+     to 'C-c C-a'.
+
+   * Commands such as 'LaTeX' and 'View' can now be executed
+     conveniently on the current section (or part, chapter, subsection,
+     etc).  See 'LaTeX-command-section' and
+     'LaTeX-command-section-change-level'.  *Note Starting a Command::,
+     for details.
+
+   * Forward and backward search with Evince now also work when only a
+     region of the document is compiled/viewed.
+
+   * To open the PDF output file you can now use also PDF Tools, a
+     document viewer for Emacs.  With it, as a plus, forward and
+     backward search is accurate at word level.
+
+   * With new option 'TeX-PDF-via-dvips-ps2pdf' it is possible to
+     compile a document to DVI and then convert it to PDF using
+     'dvips'-'ps2pdf' before viewing it.
+
+   * New option 'TeX-file-line-error' allows to select file:line:error
+     style for error messages.
+
+   * Indent '\[...\]' math mode as a regular environment by default.
+
+   * Now AUCTeX suggests to run 'makeindex' when appropriate.
+
+   * 'TeX-view-program-list' can contain, as third optional element of
+     each item, the name of the executable(s) needed to open the viewer.
+
+   * 'TeX-expand-list' variable has been split into 'TeX-expand-list'
+     and 'TeX-expand-list-builtin'.  Only the former is intended to be
+     customized by the user, the latter contains built-in expanders.
+     You might want to keep in 'TeX-expand-list' only new expansion
+     strings.
+
+   * Before running commands like TeX and LaTeX, now AUCTeX performs
+     some checks.  If 'TeX-check-TeX' is non-nil, it will test whether a
+     working TeX distribution is actually present in the system and
+     available to Emacs.  Instead, when 'TeX-check-engine' is non-nil,
+     before running LaTeX commands AUCTeX will check whether the correct
+     engine has been set, based upon known restrictions posed by LaTeX
+     packages.
+
+   * Basic support to ConTeXt Mark IV has been added.  Users can now
+     select the Mark version to be used with new option
+     'ConTeXt-Mark-version', and AUCTeX is able to catch error messages
+     in the output log of a Mark IV document.
+
+   * Support for tons of LaTeX packages has been added.
+
+   * Numbers of bugs have been fixed, many minor features have been
+     added.
+
+News in 11.88
+-------------
+
+   * 'TeX-PDF-mode' is now enabled by default.
+
+   * Now 'TeX-previous-error' works with TeX commands if the new option
+     'TeX-parse-all-errors' is non-nil, which is the default.  When this
+     option is non-nil, an overview of errors and warnings reported by
+     the TeX compiler can be opened with 'M-x TeX-error-overview <RET>'.
+     *Note Debugging::, for details.
+
+   * Style file authors are encouraged to distinguish common from expert
+     macros and environments, and mark the latter using
+     'TeX-declare-expert-macros' and
+     'LaTeX-declare-expert-environments'.
+
+     Users can then restrict completion using
+     'TeX-complete-expert-commands'.
+
+   * Management of LaTeX package options in the parser was improved.
+     You might need to reparse your documents, especially if you loaded
+     the 'babel' package with language options.
+
+   * Now you can insert '$...$' or '\(...\)' by typing a single '$'.  To
+     do this, customize the new option 'TeX-electric-math'.
+     'TeX-math-close-double-dollar' was removed.  *Note Quotes::, for
+     details.
+
+   * 'C-c <RET> documentclass <RET>' completes with all available LaTeX
+     classes, if the 'TeX-arg-input-file-search' variable is non-nil.
+     Completion for class options of the standard LaTeX classes is
+     provided as well.
+
+   * New user options 'LaTeX-default-author',
+     'LaTeX-fontspec-arg-font-search',
+     'LaTeX-fontspec-font-list-default', 'TeX-date-format', and
+     'TeX-insert-braces-alist'.  A new possible value
+     ('show-all-optional-args') for 'TeX-insert-macro-default-style' was
+     added.  The default value of 'TeX-source-correlate-method' has been
+     changed.
+
+   * 'biblatex' support was greatly expanded.  If parsing is enabled,
+     AUCTeX looks at 'backend' option to decide whether to use Biber or
+     BibTeX.  The 'LaTeX-biblatex-use-Biber' variable was changed to be
+     file local only and is no more customizable.
+
+   * With some LaTeX classes, the default environment suggested by
+     'LaTeX-environment' ('C-c C-e') when the current environment is
+     'document' was changed.  With 'beamer' class the default
+     environment is 'frame', with 'letter' it is 'letter', with 'slides'
+     it is 'slide'.
+
+   * Brace pairing feature was enhanced in LaTeX documents.  Support for
+     '\bigl', '\Bigl', '\biggl' and '\Biggl', the same as the one for
+     '\left', was added to 'TeX-insert-macro'.  For example, 'C-c <RET>
+     bigl <RET> ( <RET>' inserts '\bigl(\bigr)'.
+
+     You can insert brace pair '()', '{}' and '[]' by typing a single
+     left brace if the new user option 'LaTeX-electric-left-right-brace'
+     is enabled.
+
+     Macros '\langle', '\lfloor' and '\lceil', which produce the left
+     part of the paired braces, are treated similarly as '(', '{' and
+     '[' during the course of 'TeX-insert-macro'.  *Note Quotes::, for
+     details.
+
+   * Support for dozens of LaTeX packages was added.
+
+   * Tabular-like environments ('tabular', 'tabular*', 'tabularx',
+     'tabulary', 'array', 'align', ...)  are indented in a nicer and
+     more informative way when the column values of a table line are
+     written across multiple lines in the tex file.
+
+   * The suitable number of ampersands are inserted when you insert
+     'array', 'tabular' and 'tabular*' environments with 'C-c C-e'.
+     Similar experience is obtained if you terminate rows in these
+     environments with 'C-c <LFD>'.  It supplies line break macro '\\'
+     and inserts the suitable number of ampersands on the next line.
+
+     Similar supports are provided for various 'amsmath' environments.
+
+     *Note Tabular-like::, for details.
+
+   * Commands for narrowing to a group ('TeX-narrow-to-group') and to
+     LaTeX environments ('LaTeX-narrow-to-environment') were added.
+
+   * Now arbitrary options can be passed to the TeX processor on a per
+     file basis using the 'TeX-command-extra-options' option.  *Note
+     Processor Options::, for details.
+
+   * Now 'C-c C-e document <RET>', in an empty document, prompts for
+     '\usepackage' macros in addition to '\documentclass'.
+
+   * 'TeX-add-style-hook' has now a third argument to tell AUCTeX for
+     which dialect (LaTeX, Texinfo or BibTeX) the style hook is
+     registers.  Labelling style hook by dialect will avoid applying
+     them not in the right context.
+
+   * There have been lots of bug fixes and feature additions.
+
+News in 11.87
+-------------
+
+   * AUCTeX now supports Biber in conjunction with biblatex in addition
+     to BibTeX.
+
+   * Each AUCTeX mode now has its own abbrev table.  On Emacsen which
+     provide the possibility to inherit abbrevs from other tables, the
+     abbrevs from the Text mode abbrev table are available as well.
+     Newly defined abbrevs are written to the mode-specific tables,
+     though.
+
+   * The file 'tex-fptex.el' was removed.
+
+   * Forward/backward search for Evince has been improved.  If Emacs is
+     compiled with DBUS support and a recent Evince version (3.x) is
+     installed, the communication goes over the desktop bus instead of
+     the command line, resulting in more accurate positioning of point
+     in Emacs and highlighting of the target paragraph in Evince.
+
+   * A problem where Ghostscript threw an '/invalidfileaccess' error
+     when running preview-latex was fixed.
+
+   * A lot of smaller fixes and additions have been made.
+
+News in 11.86
+-------------
+
+   * Parsing of LaTeX output was improved.  It is now less likely that
+     AUCTeX opens a non-existent file upon calling 'TeX-next-error'; a
+     problem for example encountered when using MiKTeX 2.8.  In addition
+     quoted file names as emitted by MiKTeX are now supported.
+
+   * A new framework for the definition and selection of viewers was
+     implemented.  If you have customizations regarding viewers you will
+     have to redo them in this new framework or reenable the old one.
+     *Note Starting Viewers::, for details.
+
+   * Comprehensive editing support for PSTricks was added.
+
+   * Support for various LaTeX packages was added, e.g. 'tabularx',
+     'CJK', and 'hyperref'.
+
+   * An easy way to switch between TeX engines (PDFTeX, LuaTeX, XeTeX,
+     Omega) was added.
+
+   * Support for SyncTeX was added.  This involves the command line
+     options for LaTeX and the viewer.
+
+   * Folding can now be customized to use macro arguments as replacement
+     text.
+
+   * 'preview.sty' now works with XeTeX.
+
+   * A lot of smaller and larger bugs have been squashed.
+
+News in 11.85
+-------------
+
+   * Font locking has been improved significantly.  It is now less prone
+     to color bleeding which could lead to high resource usage.  In
+     addition it now includes information about LaTeX macro syntax and
+     can indicate syntactically incorrect macros in LaTeX mode.
+
+   * The license was updated to GPLv3.
+
+   * Support for the nomencl, flashcards and comment LaTeX packages as
+     well as the Icelandic language option of babel were added.
+
+   * Support for folding of math macros was added.
+
+   * Lots of minor bugs in features and documentation fixed.
+
+News in 11.84
+-------------
+
+   * There have been problems with the '-without-texmf-dir' option to
+     'configure' when the value of '-with-kpathsea-sep' was set or
+     determined for an installation system with a default different from
+     that of the runtime system.  'with-kpathsea-sep' has been removed;
+     the setting is now usually determined at runtime.
+
+     Due to this and other problems, preview-latex in the released
+     XEmacs package failed under Windows or with anything except recent
+     21.5 XEmacsen.
+
+   * AUCTeX and preview-latex have been changed in order to accommodate
+     file names containing spaces.  preview-latex now tolerates bad
+     PostScript code polluting the stack (like some Omega fonts).
+
+   * 'preview.sty' had in some cases failed to emit PostScript header
+     specials.
+
+   * Support for folding of comments was added.
+
+   * The 'polish' language option of the babel LaTeX package as well as
+     the polski LaTeX package are now supported.  Most notably this
+     means that AUCTeX will help to insert quotation marks as defined by
+     'polish.sty' ('"`..."'') and 'polski.sty' (',,...''').
+
+   * The TeX tool bar is now available and enabled by default in plain
+     TeX mode.  *Note Processing Facilities::.
+
+   * Bug fix in the display of math subscripts and superscripts.
+
+   * Bug fix 'TeX-doc' for Emacs 21.
+
+   * There has been quite a number of other bug fixes to various
+     features and documentation across the board.
+
+News in 11.83
+-------------
+
+   * The new function 'TeX-doc' provides easy access to documentation
+     about commands and packages or information related to TeX and
+     friends in general.  *Note Documentation::.
+
+   * You can now get rid of generated intermediate and output files by
+     means of the new 'Clean' and 'Clean All' entries in
+     'TeX-command-list' accessible with 'C-c C-c' or the Command menu.
+     *Note Cleaning::.
+
+   * Support for forward search with PDF files was added.  That means
+     you can jump to a place in the output file corresponding to the
+     position in the source file.  *Note Viewing::.
+
+     Adding support for this feature required the default value of the
+     variable 'TeX-output-view-style' to be changed.  Please make sure
+     you either remove any customizations overriding the new default or
+     incorporate the changes into your customizations if you want to use
+     this feature.
+
+   * TeX error messages of the '-file-line-error' kind are now
+     understood in AUCTeX and preview-latex (parsers are still
+     separate).
+
+   * Bug fix in XyMTeX support.
+
+   * The LaTeX tool bar is now enabled by default.  *Note Processing
+     Facilities::.
+
+News in 11.82
+-------------
+
+   * Support for the MinionPro LaTeX package was added.
+
+   * Warnings and underfull/overfull boxes are now being indicated in
+     the echo area after a LaTeX run, if the respective debugging
+     options are activated with 'TeX-toggle-debug-warnings' ('C-c C-t
+     C-w') or 'TeX-toggle-debug-bad-boxes' ('C-c C-t C-b').  In this
+     case 'TeX-next-error' will find these warnings in addition to
+     normal errors.
+
+     The key binding 'C-c C-w' for 'TeX-toggle-debug-bad-boxes' (which
+     was renamed from 'TeX-toggle-debug-boxes') now is deprecated.
+
+   * AUCTeX now can automatically insert a pair of braces after typing
+     <_> or <^> in math constructs if the new variable
+     'TeX-electric-sub-and-superscript' is set to a non-nil value.
+
+   * Some language-specific support for French was added.  There now is
+     completion support for the commands provided by the 'frenchb' (and
+     'francais') options of the babel LaTeX package and easier input of
+     French quotation marks ('\og ...\fg') which can now be inserted by
+     typing <">.
+
+   * Completion support for options of some LaTeX packages was added.
+
+   * Already in version 11.81 the way to activate AUCTeX changed
+     substantially.  This should now be done with '(load "auctex.el" nil
+     t t)' instead of the former '(require 'tex-site)'.  Related to this
+     change 'tex-mik.el' does not load 'tex-site.el' anymore.  That
+     means if you used only '(require 'tex-mik)' in order to activate
+     AUCTeX, you have to add '(load "auctex.el" nil t t)' before the
+     latter statement.  *Note Loading the package::.
+
+   * Handling of verbatim constructs was consolidated across AUCTeX.
+     This resulted in the font-latex-specific variables
+     'font-latex-verb-like-commands', 'font-latex-verbatim-macros', and
+     'font-latex-verbatim-environments' being removed and the more
+     general variables 'LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-delims',
+     'LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-braces', and
+     'LaTeX-verbatim-environments' being added.
+
+   * The output of a BibTeX run is now checked for warnings and errors,
+     which are reported in the echo area.
+
+   * The aliases for 'font-latex-title-fontify' were removed.  Use
+     'font-latex-fontify-sectioning' instead.
+
+   * The problem that Japanese macros where broken across lines was
+     fixed.
+
+   * Various bug fixes.
+
+News in 11.81
+-------------
+
+   * 'LaTeX-mark-section' now marks subsections of a given section as
+     well.  The former behavior is available via the prefix argument.
+
+   * preview-latex which was previously available separately became a
+     subsystem of AUCTeX.  There is no documented provision for building
+     or installing preview-latex separately.  It is still possible to
+     use and install AUCTeX without preview-latex, however.
+
+   * The installation procedures have been overhauled and now also
+     install startup files as part of the process (those had to be
+     copied manually previously).  You are advised to remove previous
+     installations of AUCTeX and preview-latex before starting the
+     installation procedure.  A standard installation from an unmodified
+     tarball no longer requires Makeinfo or Perl.
+
+     Also note that the way AUCTeX is supposed to be activated changed.
+     Instead of '(require 'tex-site)' you should now use '(load
+     "auctex.el" nil t t)'.  While the former method may still work, the
+     new method has the advantage that you can deactivate a preactivated
+     AUCTeX with the statement '(unload-feature 'tex-site)' before any
+     of its modes have been used.  This may be important especially for
+     site-wide installations.
+
+   * Support for the babel LaTeX package was added.
+
+   * Folding a buffer now ensures that the whole buffer is fontified
+     before the actual folding is carried out.  If this results in
+     unbearably long execution times, you can fall back to the old
+     behavior of relying on stealth font locking to do this job in the
+     background by customizing the variable 'TeX-fold-force-fontify'.
+
+   * Folded content now reveals part of its original text in a tooltip
+     or the echo area when hovering with the mouse pointer over it.
+
+   * The language-specific insertion of quotation marks was generalized.
+     The variables 'LaTeX-german-open-quote',
+     'LaTeX-german-close-quote', 'LaTeX-german-quote-after-quote',
+     'LaTeX-italian-open-quote', 'LaTeX-italian-close-quote', and
+     'LaTeX-italian-quote-after-quote' are now obsolete.  If you are not
+     satisfied with the default settings, you should customize
+     'TeX-quote-language-alist' instead.
+
+   * Similar to language-specific quote insertion, AUCTeX now helps you
+     with hyphens in different languages as well.  *Note European::, for
+     details.
+
+   * Fill problems in Japanese text introduced in AUCTeX 11.55 were
+     fixed.  AUCTeX tries not to break lines between 1-byte and 2-byte
+     chars.  These features will work in Chinese text, too.
+
+   * The scaling factor of the fontification of sectioning commands can
+     now be customized using the variable
+     'font-latex-fontify-sectioning'.  This variable was previously
+     called 'font-latex-title-fontify'; In this release we provide an
+     alias but this will disappear in one of the the next releases.  The
+     faces for the sectioning commands are now called
+     'font-latex-sectioning-N-face' (N=0...5) instead of
+     'font-latex-title-N-face' (N=1...4).  Analogously the names of the
+     variables holding the related keyword lists were changed from
+     'font-latex-title-N-keywords' to
+     'font-latex-sectioning-N-keywords'.  *Note Font Locking::, for
+     details.  Make sure to adjust your customizations.
+
+   * Titles in beamer slides marked by the "\frametitle" command are
+     know displayed with the new face 'font-latex-slide-title-face'.
+     You can add macros to be highlighted with this face to
+     'font-latex-match-slide-title-keywords'.
+
+   * Of course a lot of bugs have been fixed.
+
+News in 11.55
+-------------
+
+   * A bug was fixed which lead to the insertion of trailing whitespace
+     during filling.  In particular extra spaces were added to sentence
+     endings at the end of lines.  You can make this whitespace visible
+     by setting the variable 'show-trailing-whitespace' to 't'.  If you
+     want to delete all trailing whitespace in a buffer, type 'M-x
+     delete-trailing-whitespace <RET>'.
+
+   * A bug was fixed which lead to a '*Compile-Log*' buffer popping up
+     when the first LaTeX file was loaded in an Emacs session.
+
+   * On some systems the presence of an outdated Emacspeak package lead
+     to the error message 'File mode specification error: (error
+     "Variable binding depth exceeds max-specpdl-size")'.  Precautions
+     were added which prevent this error from happening.  But
+     nevertheless, it is advised to upgrade or uninstall the outdated
+     Emacspeak package.
+
+   * The value of 'TeX-macro-global' is not determined during
+     configuration anymore but at load time of AUCTeX.  Consequently the
+     associated configuration option '--with-tex-input-dirs' was
+     removed.
+
+   * Support for the LaTeX Japanese classes 'jsarticle' and 'jsbook' was
+     added.
+
+News in 11.54
+-------------
+
+   * The parser (used e.g. for 'TeX-auto-generate-global') was extended
+     to recognize keywords common in LaTeX packages and classes, like
+     "\DeclareRobustCommand" or "\RequirePackage".  Additionally a bug
+     was fixed which led to duplicate entries in AUCTeX style files.
+
+   * Folding can now be done for paragraphs and regions besides single
+     constructs and the whole buffer.  With the new 'TeX-fold-dwim'
+     command content can both be hidden and shown with a single key
+     binding.  In course of these changes new key bindings for unfolding
+     commands where introduced.  The old bindings are still present but
+     will be phased out in future releases.
+
+   * Info files of the manual now have a .info extension.
+
+   * There is an experimental tool bar support now.  It is not activated
+     by default.  If you want to use it, add
+          (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook 'LaTeX-install-toolbar)
+     to your init file.
+
+   * The manual now contains a new chapter "Quick Start".  It explains
+     the main features and how to use them, and should be enough for a
+     new user to start using AUCTeX.
+
+   * A new section "Font Locking" was added to the manual which explains
+     syntax highlighting in AUCTeX and its customization.  Together with
+     the sections related to folding and outlining, the section is part
+     of the new chapter "Display".
+
+   * Keywords for syntax highlighting of LaTeX constructs to be typeset
+     in bold, italic or typewriter fonts may now be customized.  Besides
+     the built-in classes, new keyword classes may be added by
+     customizing the variable 'font-latex-user-keyword-classes'.  The
+     customization options can be found in the customization group
+     'font-latex-keywords'.
+
+   * Verbatim content is now displayed with the 'fixed-pitch' face.
+     (GNU Emacs only)
+
+   * Syntax highlighting should not spill out of verbatim content
+     anymore.  (GNU Emacs only)
+
+   * Verbatim commands like '\verb|...|' will not be broken anymore
+     during filling.
+
+   * You can customize the completion for graphic files with
+     'LaTeX-includegraphics-read-file'.
+
+   * Support for the LaTeX packages 'url', 'listings', 'jurabib' and
+     'csquotes' was added with regard to command completion and syntax
+     highlighting.
+
+   * Performance of fontification and filling was improved.
+
+   * Insertion of nodes in Texinfo mode now supports completion of
+     existing node names.
+
+   * Setting the variable 'LaTeX-float' to 'nil' now means that you will
+     not be prompted for the float position of figures and tables.  You
+     can get the old behaviour of 'nil' by setting the variable to '""',
+     i.e. an empty string.  See also *note Floats::.
+
+   * The XEmacs-specific bug concerning 'overlays-at' was fixed.
+
+   * Lots of bug fixes.
+
+News in 11.53
+-------------
+
+   * The LaTeX math menu can include Unicode characters if your Emacs
+     built supports it.  See the variable 'LaTeX-math-menu-unicode',
+     *note Mathematics::.
+
+   * Bug fixes for XEmacs.
+
+   * Completion for graphic files in the TeX search path has been added.
+
+   * 'start' is used for the viewer for MiKTeX and fpTeX.
+
+   * The variable 'TeX-fold-preserve-comments' can now be customized to
+     deactivate folding in comments.
+
+News in 11.52
+-------------
+
+   * Installation and menus under XEmacs work again (maybe for the first
+     time).
+
+   * Fontification of subscripts and superscripts is now disabled when
+     the fontification engine is not able to support it properly.
+
+   * Bug fixes in the build process.
+
+News in 11.51
+-------------
+
+   * PDFTeX and Source Special support did not work with ConTeXt, this
+     has been fixed.  Similar for Source Special support under Windows.
+
+   * Omega support has been added.
+
+   * Bug fixes in the build process.
+
+   * 'TeX-fold' now supports folding of environments in Texinfo mode.
+
+News in 11.50
+-------------
+
+   * The use of source specials when processing or viewing the document
+     can now be controlled with the new 'TeX-source-specials' minor mode
+     which can be toggled via an entry in the Command menu or the key
+     binding 'C-c C-t C-s'.  If you have customized the variable
+     'TeX-command-list', you have to re-initialize it for this to work.
+     This means to open a customization buffer for the variable by
+     typing 'M-x customize-variable <RET> TeX-command-list <RET>',
+     selecting "Erase Customization" and do your customization again
+     with the new default.
+
+   * The content of the command menu now depends on the mode (plain TeX,
+     LaTeX, ConTeXt etc.).  Any former customization of the variable
+     'TeX-command-list' has to be erased.  Otherwise the command menu
+     and the customization will not work correctly.
+
+   * Support for hiding and auto-revealing macros, e.g. footnotes or
+     citations, and environments in a buffer was added, *note Folding::.
+
+   * You can now control if indentation is done upon typing <RET> by
+     customizing the variable 'TeX-newline-function', *note Indenting::.
+
+   * Limited support for 'doc.sty' and 'ltxdoc.cls' ('dtx' files) was
+     added.  The new docTeX mode provides functionality for editing
+     documentation parts.  This includes formatting (indenting and
+     filling), adding and completion of macros and environments while
+     staying in comments as well as syntax highlighting.  (Please note
+     that the mode is not finished yet.  For example syntax highlighting
+     does not work yet in XEmacs.)
+
+   * For macro completion in docTeX mode the AUCTeX style files
+     'doc.el', 'ltxdoc.el' and 'ltx-base.el' were included.  The latter
+     provides general support for low-level LaTeX macros and may be used
+     with LaTeX class and style files as well.  It is currently not
+     loaded automatically for those files.
+
+   * Support for ConTeXt with a separate ConTeXt mode is now included.
+     Macro definitions for completion are available in Dutch and
+     English.
+
+   * The filling and indentation code was overhauled and is now able to
+     format commented parts of the source syntactically correct.  Newly
+     available functionality and customization options are explained in
+     the manual.
+
+   * Filling and indentation in XEmacs with preview-latex and activated
+     previews lead to the insertion of whitespace before multi-line
+     previews.  AUCTeX now contains facilities to prevent this problem.
+
+   * If 'TeX-master' is set to 't', AUCTeX will now query for a master
+     file only when a new file is opened.  Existing files will be left
+     alone.  The new function 'TeX-master-file-ask' (bound to 'C-c _' is
+     provided for adding the variable manually.
+
+   * Sectioning commands are now shown in a larger font on display
+     devices which support such fontification.  The variable
+     'font-latex-title-fontify' can be customized to restore the old
+     appearance, i.e. the usage of a different color instead of a change
+     in size.
+
+   * Support for 'alphanum.sty', 'beamer.cls', 'booktabs.sty',
+     'captcont.sty', 'emp.sty', 'paralist.sty', 'subfigure.sty' and
+     'units.sty'/'nicefrac.sty' was added.  Credits go to the authors
+     mentioned in the respective AUCTeX style files.
+
+   * Inserting graphics with 'C-c <RET> includegraphics <RET>' was
+     improved.  See the variable 'LaTeX-includegraphics-options-alist'.
+
+   * If 'LaTeX-default-position' is 'nil', don't prompt for position
+     arguments in Tabular-like environments, see *note Tabular-like::.
+
+   * Completion for available packages when using 'C-c <RET> usepackage
+     <RET>' was improved on systems using the kpathsea library.
+
+   * The commenting functionality was fixed.  The separate functions for
+     commenting and uncommenting were unified in one function for
+     paragraphs and regions respectively which do both.
+
+   * Syntax highlighting can be customized to fontify quotes delimited
+     by either >>German<< or <<French>> quotation marks by changing the
+     variable 'font-latex-quotes'.
+
+   * Certain TeX/LaTeX keywords for functions, references, variables and
+     warnings will now be fontified specially.  You may add your own
+     keywords by customizing the variables
+     'font-latex-match-function-keywords',
+     'font-latex-match-reference-keywords',
+     'font-latex-match-variable-keywords' and
+     'font-latex-match-warning-keywords'.
+
+   * If you include the style files 'german' or 'ngerman' in a document
+     (directly or via the 'babel' package), you should now customize
+     'LaTeX-german-open-quote', 'LaTeX-german-close-quote' and
+     'LaTeX-german-quote-after-quote' instead of 'TeX-open-quote',
+     'TeX-close-quote' and 'TeX-quote-after-quote' if you want to
+     influence the type of quote insertion.
+
+   * Upon viewing an output file, the right viewer and command line
+     options for it are now determined automatically by looking at the
+     extension of the output file and certain options used in the source
+     file.  The behavior can be adapted or extended respectively by
+     customizing the variable 'TeX-output-view-style'.
+
+   * You can control whether 'TeX-insert-macro' ('C-c <RET>') ask for
+     all optional arguments by customizing the variable
+     'TeX-insert-macro-default-style', *note Completion::.
+
+   * 'TeX-run-discard' is now able to completely detach a process that
+     it started.
+
+   * The build process was enhanced and is now based on 'autoconf'
+     making installing AUCTeX a mostly automatic process.  See *note
+     Installation:: and *note Installation under MS Windows:: for
+     details.
+
+News in 11.14
+-------------
+
+   * Many more LaTeX and LaTeX2e commands are supported.  Done by
+     Masayuki Ataka <ataka@milk.freemail.ne.jp>
+
+News in 11.12
+-------------
+
+   * Support for the KOMA-Script classes.  Contributed by Mark Trettin
+     <Mark.Trettin@gmx.de>.
+
+News in 11.11
+-------------
+
+   * Support for 'prosper.sty', see <http://prosper.sourceforge.net/>.
+     Contributed by Phillip Lord <p.lord@russet.org.uk>.
+
+News in 11.10
+-------------
+
+   * 'comment-region' now inserts %% by default.  Suggested by "Davide
+     G. M. Salvetti" <salve@debian.org>>.
+
+News in 11.06
+-------------
+
+   * You can now switch between using the 'font-latex' (all emacsen),
+     the 'tex-font' (Emacs 21 only) or no special package for font
+     locking.  Customize 'TeX-install-font-lock' for this.
+
+News in 11.04
+-------------
+
+   * Now use -t landscape by default when landscape option appears.
+     Suggested by Erik Frisk <frisk@isy.liu.se>.
+
+News in 11.03
+-------------
+
+   * Use 'tex-fptex.el' for fpTeX support.  Contributed by Fabrice
+     Popineau <Fabrice.Popineau@supelec.fr>.
+
+News in 11.02
+-------------
+
+   * New user option 'LaTeX-top-caption-list' specifies environments
+     where the caption should go at top.  Contributed by
+     <ataka@milk.freemail.ne.jp> (Masayuki Ataka).
+
+   * Allow explicit dimensions in 'graphicx.sty'.  Contributed by
+     <ataka@milk.freemail.ne.jp> (Masayuki Ataka).
+
+   * Limited support for 'verbatim.sty'.  Contributed by
+     <ataka@milk.freemail.ne.jp> (Masayuki Ataka).
+
+   * Better support for amsmath items.  Patch by
+     <ataka@milk.freemail.ne.jp> (Masayuki Ataka).
+
+   * More accurate error parsing.  Added by David Kastrup
+     <David.Kastrup@t-online.de>.
+
+News in 11.01
+-------------
+
+   * Bug fixes.
+
+Older versions
+--------------
+
+See the file 'history.texi' for older changes.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Development,  Next: FAQ,  Prev: Changes,  Up: Appendices
+
+A.3 Future Development
+======================
+
+The following sections describe future development of AUCTeX.  Besides
+mid-term goals, bug reports and requests we cannot fix or honor right
+away are being gathered here.  If you have some time for Emacs Lisp
+hacking, you are encouraged to try to provide a solution to one of the
+following problems.  If you don't know Lisp, you may help us to improve
+the documentation.  It might be a good idea to discuss proposed changes
+on the mailing list of AUCTeX first.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Mid-term Goals::
+* Wishlist::
+* Bugs::
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Mid-term Goals,  Next: Wishlist,  Up: Development
+
+A.3.1 Mid-term Goals
+--------------------
+
+   * Integration of preview-latex into AUCTeX
+
+     As of AUCTeX 11.81 preview-latex is a part of AUCTeX in the sense
+     that the installation routines were merged and preview-latex is
+     being packaged with AUCTeX.
+
+     Further integration will happen at the backend.  This involves
+     folding of error parsing and task management of both packages which
+     will ease development efforts and avoid redundant work.
+
+   * Error help catalogs
+
+     Currently, the help for errors is more or less hardwired into
+     'latex.el'.  For supporting error help in other languages, it would
+     be sensible to instead arrange error messages in language-specific
+     files, make a common info file from all such catalogs in a given
+     language and look the error texts up in an appropriate index.  The
+     user would then specify a preference list of languages, and the
+     errors would be looked up in the catalogs in sequence until they
+     were identified.
+
+   * Combining 'docTeX' with RefTeX
+
+     Macro cross references should also be usable for document
+     navigation using RefTeX.
+
+   * Fix remove-style feature
+
+     Currently 'TeX-remove-style' implementation isn't good.  It is
+     common practice that major mode functions directly add macros and
+     environments via 'TeX-add-symbols' and 'LaTeX-add-environments',
+     but those macros and environments are lost once 'TeX-remove-style'
+     runs.  It is necessary to run major mode function, by e.g.
+     'normal-mode', again to recover them, but that makes no point in
+     running 'TeX-remove-style' itself because major mode function kills
+     all buffer-local variables.
+
+     As of AUCTeX 12.3, 'TeX-remove-style' is no longer used by any
+     other codes.
+
+   * Document 'LaTeX-insert-into-commments',
+     'TeX-translate-location-hook', and usage of ConTeXt mode.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Wishlist,  Next: Bugs,  Prev: Mid-term Goals,  Up: Development
+
+A.3.2 Wishlist
+--------------
+
+   * Simplify tool bar implementation.  The library 'toolbar-x.el' was
+     developed as an abstraction layer to absorb difference between
+     XEmacs and GNU Emacs.  Now that XEmacs is no longer supported, the
+     library, together with 'tex-bar.el' as a whole, can be much
+     simplified (or even unified).
+
+   * Documentation lookup for macros
+
+     A parser could gather information about which macros are defined in
+     which LaTeX packages and store the information in a hashtable which
+     can be used in a backend for 'TeX-doc' in order to open the
+     matching documentation for a given macro.  The information could
+     also be used to insert an appropriate '\usepackage' statement if
+     the user tries to insert a macro for which the respective package
+     has not been requested yet.
+
+   * Improvements to error reporting
+
+     Fringe indicators for errors in the main text would be nice.
+
+   * A math entry grid
+
+     A separate frame with a table of math character graphics to click
+     on in order to insert the respective sequence into the buffer (cf.
+     the "grid" of 'x-symbol').
+
+   * Crossreferencing support
+
+     It would be nice if you could index process your favorite
+     collection of '.dtx' files (such as the LaTeX source), just call a
+     command on arbitrary control sequence, and get either the DVI
+     viewer opened right at the definition of that macro (using Source
+     Specials), or the source code of the '.dtx' file.
+
+   * Better plain TeX support
+
+     For starters, 'LaTeX-math-mode' is not very LaTeX-specific in the
+     first place, and similar holds for indentation and formatting.
+
+   * Page count when compiling should (optionally) go to modeline of the
+     window where the compilation command was invoked, instead of the
+     output window.  Suggested by Karsten Tinnefeld
+     <tinnefeld@irb.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
+
+   * Command to insert a macrodefinition in the preamble, without moving
+     point from the current location.  Suggested by "Jeffrey C. Ely"
+     <ely@nwu.edu>.
+
+   * A database of all commands defined in all stylefiles.  When a
+     command or environment gets entered that is provided in one of the
+     styles, insert the appropriate '\usepackage' in the preamble.
+
+   * A way to add and overwrite math mode entries in style files, and to
+     decide where they should be.  Suggested by Remo Badii
+     <Remo.Badii@psi.ch>.
+
+   * Create template for (first) line of tabular environment.
+
+   * I think prompting for the master is the intended behaviour.  It
+     corresponds to a 'shared' value for 'TeX-master'.
+
+     There should probably be a 'none' value which wouldn't query for
+     the master, but instead disable all features that relies on
+     'TeX-master'.
+
+     This default value for 'TeX-master' could then be controled with
+     mapping based on the extension.
+
+   * Use index files (when available) to speed up 'C-c C-m include
+     <RET>'.
+
+   * Option not to calculate very slow completions like for 'C-c C-m
+     include <RET>'.
+
+   * Font menu should be created from 'TeX-font-list'.
+
+   * Installation procedure written purely in emacs lisp.
+
+   * Included PostScript files should also be counted as part of the
+     document.
+
+   * A nice hierarchical by-topic organization of all officially
+     documented LaTeX macros, available from the menu bar.
+
+   * 'TeX-command-default' should be set from the master file, if not
+     set locally.  Suggested by Peter Whaite <peta@cim.mcgill.ca>.
+
+   * Make AUCTeX work with 'crypt++'.  Suggested by Chris Moore
+     <Chris.Moore@src.bae.co.uk>.
+
+   * Make AUCTeX work with 'longlines'.  This would also apply to
+     preview-latex, though it might make sense to unify error processing
+     before attempting this.
+
+   * The 'Spell' command should apply to all files in a document.  Maybe
+     it could try to restrict to files that have been modified since
+     last spell check?  Suggested by Ravinder Bhumbla
+     <rbhumbla@ucsd.edu>.
+
+   * Make <.> check for abbreviations and sentences ending with capital
+     letters.
+
+   * Use Emacs 19 minibuffer history to choose between previewers, and
+     other stuff.  Suggested by John Interrante
+     <interran@uluru.Stanford.EDU>.
+
+   * Documentation of variables that can be set in a style hook.
+
+     We need a list of what can safely be done in an ordinary style
+     hook.  You can not set a variable that AUCTeX depends on, unless
+     AUCTeX knows that it has to run the style hooks first.
+
+     Here is the start of such a list.
+
+     'LaTeX-add-environments'
+
+     'TeX-add-symbols'
+
+     'LaTeX-add-labels'
+
+     'LaTeX-add-bibliographies'
+
+     'LaTeX-largest-level'
+
+   * Outline should be (better) supported in TeX mode.
+
+     At least, support headers, trailers, as well as
+     'TeX-outline-extra'.
+
+   * 'TeX-header-start' and 'TeX-trailer-end'.
+
+     We might want these, just for fun (and outlines)
+
+   * Plain TeX and LaTeX specific header and trailer expressions.
+
+     We should have a way to globally specify the default value of the
+     header and trailer regexps.
+
+   * Get closer to original 'TeX-mode' keybindings.
+
+     A third initialization file ('tex-mode.el') containing an emulator
+     of the standard 'TeX-mode' would help convince some people to
+     change to AUCTeX.
+
+   * Use markers in 'TeX-error-list' to remember buffer positions in
+     order to be more robust with regard to line numbers and changed
+     files.
+
+   * Finish the Texinfo mode.  For one thing, many Texinfo mode commands
+     do not accept braces around their arguments.
+
+   * Hook up the letter environment with 'bbdb.el'.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Bugs,  Prev: Wishlist,  Up: Development
+
+A.3.3 Bugs
+----------
+
+   * The style hooks automatically generated by parsing files for
+     'example.dtx', 'example.sty', 'example.drv' and 'example.bib' all
+     clash.  Bad.  Clash with hand-written style hooks should be removed
+     by dialect discrimination -- to be checked.
+
+   * 'C-c `' should always stay in the current window, also when it
+     finds a new file.
+
+   * Do not overwrite emacs warnings about existing auto-save files when
+     loading a new file.
+
+   * Maybe the regexp for matching a TeX symbol during parsing should be
+     '"\\\\\\([a-zA-Z]+\\|.\\)"' --
+     <thiemann@informatik.uni-tuebingen.de> Peter Thiemann.
+
+   * AUCTeX should not parse verbatim environments.
+
+   * Make '`' check for math context in 'LaTeX-math-mode'.  and simply
+     self insert if not in a math context.
+
+   * Make 'TeX-insert-dollar' more robust.  Currently it can be fooled
+     by '\mbox''es and escaped double dollar for example.
+
+   * Correct indentation for tabbing, table, and math environments.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: FAQ,  Next: Texinfo mode,  Prev: Development,  Up: Appendices
+
+A.4 Frequently Asked Questions
+==============================
+
+  1. Something is not working correctly.  What should I do?
+
+     Well, you might have guessed it, the first place to look is in the
+     available documentation packaged with AUCTeX.  This could be the
+     release notes (in the 'RELEASE' file) or the news section of the
+     manual in case you are experiencing problems after an upgrade, the
+     'INSTALL' file in case you are having problems with the
+     installation, the section about bugs in the manual in case you
+     encountered a bug or the relevant sections in the manual for other
+     related problems.
+
+     If this did not help, you can send a bug report to the AUCTeX bug
+     reporting list by using the command 'M-x TeX-submit-bug-report
+     <RET>'.  But before you do this, you can try to get more
+     information about the problem at hand which might also help you
+     locate the cause of the error yourself.
+
+     First, you can try to generate a so-called backtrace which shows
+     the functions involved in a program error.  In order to do this,
+     start Emacs with the command line 'emacs --debug-init' and/or put
+     the line
+
+          (setq debug-on-error t)
+
+     as the first line into your init file.  After Emacs has started,
+     you can load a file which triggers the error and a new window
+     should pop up showing the backtrace.  If you get such a backtrace,
+     please include it in the bug report.
+
+     Second, you can try to figure out if something in your personal or
+     site configuration triggers the error by starting Emacs without
+     such customizations.  You can do this by invoking Emacs with the
+     following command line, depending on the installation scheme of
+     AUCTeX and your OS:
+        * If you installed AUCTeX from ELPA, use 'emacs -q -no-site-file
+          --eval "(progn (setq package-load-list '((auctex t)))
+          (package-initialize))"'.  The '--eval' option activates only
+          AUCTeX among all installed EPLA packages.
+        * If you installed AUCTeX via traditional 'configure'-'make'
+          scheme, use 'emacs -q -no-site-file -l auctex'.  The '-l'
+          option loads 'auctex.el' which you normally do in your init
+          file.
+        * In both above cases, use 'runemacs' instead of 'emacs' on
+          windows.
+
+     After you have started Emacs like this, you can load the file
+     triggering the error.  If everything is working now, you know that
+     you have to search either in the site configuration file or your
+     personal init file for statements related to the problem.
+
+  2. What versions of Emacs are supported?
+
+     AUCTeX was tested with GNU Emacs 25.1.  Older versions may work but
+     are unsupported.
+
+  3. What should I do when './configure' does not find programs like
+     'latex'?
+
+     This is problem often encountered on Windows.  Make sure that the
+     'PATH' environment variable includes the directories containing the
+     relevant programs, as described in *note (auctex)Installation under
+     MS Windows::.
+
+  4. Why doesn't the completion, style file, or multifile stuff work?
+
+     It must be enabled first, insert this in your init file:
+
+          (setq-default TeX-master nil)
+          (setq TeX-parse-self t)
+          (setq TeX-auto-save t)
+
+     Read also the chapters about parsing and multifile documents in the
+     manual.  *Note Parsing Files:: and *note Multifile::.
+
+  5. Why doesn't 'TeX-save-document' work?
+
+     'TeX-check-path' has to contain "'./'" somewhere.
+
+  6. Why is the information in 'foo.tex' forgotten when I save
+     'foo.bib'?
+
+     For various reasons, AUCTeX ignores the extension when it stores
+     information about a file, so you should use unique base names for
+     your files.  E.g. rename 'foo.bib' to 'foob.bib'.
+
+  7. Why doesn't AUCTeX signal when processing a document is done?
+
+     If the message in the minibuffer stays "Type 'C-c C-l' to display
+     results of compilation.", you probably have a misconfiguration in
+     your init file ('.emacs', 'init.el' or similar).  To track this
+     down either search in the '*Messages*' buffer for an error message
+     or put '(setq debug-on-error t)' as the first line into your init
+     file, restart Emacs and open a LaTeX file.  Emacs will complain
+     loudly by opening a debugging buffer as soon as an error occurs.
+     The information in the debugging buffer can help you find the cause
+     of the error in your init file.
+
+  8. Why does 'TeX-next-error' ('C-c `') fail?
+
+     If 'TeX-file-line-error' is set to nil (not the default), these
+     sort of failures might be related to the the fact that when writing
+     the log file, TeX puts information related to a file, including
+     error messages, between a pair of parentheses.  In this scenario
+     AUCTeX determines the file where the error happened by parsing the
+     log file and counting the parentheses.  This can fail when there
+     are other, unbalanced parentheses present.
+
+     Activating so-called 'file:line:error' messages for the log file
+     usually solves this issue, as these kind of messages are are easier
+     to parse; however, they may lack some details.  Activation can be
+     done either in the configuration of your TeX system (consult its
+     manual to see where this is) or by simply keeping the variable
+     'TeX-file-line-error' to the default value of non-nil.
+
+  9. What does 'AUC' stand for?
+
+     AUCTeX came into being at Aalborg University in Denmark.  Back then
+     the Danish name of the university was Aalborg Universitetscenter;
+     'AUC' for short.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Texinfo mode,  Prev: FAQ,  Up: Appendices
+
+A.5 Features specific to AUCTeX's Texinfo major mode
+====================================================
+
+AUCTeX includes a major mode for editting Texinfo files.  This major
+mode is not the same mode as the native Texinfo mode (*note
+(texinfo)Texinfo Mode::) of Emacs, although they have the same name.
+However, AUCTeX still relies on a number of functions from the native
+Texinfo mode.
+
+   The following text describes which functionality is offered by AUCTeX
+and which by the native Texinfo mode.  This should enable you to decide
+when to consult the AUCTeX manual and when the manual of the native
+mode.  And in case you are a seasoned user of the native mode, the
+information should help you to swiftly get to know the AUCTeX-specific
+commands.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Exploiting::                  How AUCTeX and the native mode work together
+* Superseding::                 Where the native mode is superseded
+* Mapping::                     Where key bindings are mapped to the native mode
+* Unbinding::                   Which native mode key bindings are missing
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Exploiting,  Next: Superseding,  Up: Texinfo mode
+
+A.5.1 How AUCTeX and the native mode work together
+--------------------------------------------------
+
+In a nutshell the split between AUCTeX Texinfo mode, and native Texinfo
+mode is as follows:
+
+   * Most of the editing (environment creation, commenting, font command
+     insertions) and/or processing commands (e.g. compiling or printing)
+     which are available in other AUCTeX modes are also handled by
+     AUCTeX in Texinfo mode.
+
+   * Texinfo-related features (e.g. info node linkage or menu creation)
+     rely on the commands provided by the native Texinfo mode.  AUCTeX
+     provides the key bindings to reach these functions, keeping the
+     same keys as in native Texinfo whenever possible, or similar ones
+     otherwise.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Superseding,  Next: Mapping,  Prev: Exploiting,  Up: Texinfo mode
+
+A.5.2 Where the native mode is superseded
+-----------------------------------------
+
+This section is directed to users of the native Texinfo mode switching
+to AUCTeX.  It follows the summary of the native mode (*note
+(texinfo)Texinfo Mode Summary::) and lists which of its commands are no
+longer of use.
+
+Insert commands
+     In the native Texinfo mode, frequently used Texinfo commands can be
+     inserted with key bindings of the form 'C-c C-c K' where K differs
+     for each Texinfo command; 'c' inserts '@code', 'd' inserts '@dfn',
+     'k' '@kbd', etc.
+
+     In AUCTeX commands are inserted with the key binding 'C-c C-m'
+     instead which prompts for the macro to be inserted.  For font
+     selection commands (like '@b', '@i', or '@emph') and a few related
+     ones (like '@var', '@key' or '@code') there are bindings which
+     insert the respective macros directly.  They have the form 'C-c C-f
+     K' or 'C-c C-f C-K' and call the function 'TeX-font'.  Type 'C-c
+     C-f <RET>' to get a list of supported commands.
+
+     Note that the prefix argument is not handled the same way by
+     AUCTeX.  Note also that the node insertion command from the native
+     mode ('texinfo-insert-@node') can still accessed from the Texinfo
+     menu in AUCTeX.
+
+Insert braces
+     In AUCTeX braces can be inserted with the same key binding as in
+     the native Texinfo mode: 'C-c {'.  But AUCTeX uses its own function
+     for the feature: 'TeX-insert-braces'.
+
+Insert environments
+     The native Texinfo mode does not insert full environments.
+     Instead, it provides the function 'texinfo-insert-@end' (mapped to
+     'C-c C-c e') for closing an open environment with a matching '@end'
+     statement.
+
+     In AUCTeX you can insert full environments, i.e. both the opening
+     and closing statements, with the function 'Texinfo-environment'
+     (mapped to 'C-c C-e').
+
+Format info files with makeinfo and TeX
+     In the native Texinfo mode there are various functions and bindings
+     to format a region or the whole buffer for info or to typeset the
+     respective text.  For example, there is 'makeinfo-buffer' (mapped
+     to 'C-c C-m C-b') which runs 'makeinfo' on the buffer or there is
+     'texinfo-tex-buffer' (mapped to 'C-c C-t C-b') which runs TeX on
+     the buffer in order to produce a DVI file.
+
+     In AUCTeX different commands for formatting or typesetting can be
+     invoked through the function 'TeX-command-master' (mapped to 'C-c
+     C-c').  After typing 'C-c C-c', you can select the desired command,
+     e.g 'Makeinfo' or 'TeX', through a prompt in the mini buffer.  Note
+     that you can make, say 'Makeinfo', the default by adding this
+     statement in your init file:
+
+          (add-hook 'Texinfo-mode-hook
+                    (lambda () (setq TeX-command-default "Makeinfo")))
+
+     Note also that 'C-c C-c Makeinfo <RET>' is not completely
+     functionally equivalent to 'makeinfo-buffer' as the latter will
+     display the resulting info file in Emacs, showing the node
+     corresponding to the position in the source file, just after a
+     successful compilation.  This is why, while using AUCTeX, invoking
+     'makeinfo-buffer' might still be more convenient.
+
+     Note also that in the case of a multifile document, 'C-c C-c' in
+     AUCTeX will work on the whole document (provided that the file
+     variable 'TeX-master' is set correctly), while 'makeinfo-buffer' in
+     the native mode will process only the current buffer, provided at
+     the '@setfilename' statement is provided.
+
+Produce indexes and print
+     The native Texinfo mode provides the binding 'C-c C-t C-i'
+     ('texinfo-texindex') for producing an index and the bindings 'C-c
+     C-t C-p' ('texinfo-tex-print') and 'C-c C-t C-q'
+     ('tex-show-print-queue') for printing and showing the printer
+     queue.  These are superseded by the respective commands available
+     through 'C-c C-c' ('TeX-command-master') in AUCTeX: 'Texindex',
+     'Print', and 'Queue'.
+
+Kill jobs
+     The command 'C-c C-t C-k' ('tex-kill-job') in the native mode is
+     superseded by 'C-c C-k' ('TeX-kill-job') in AUCTeX.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Mapping,  Next: Unbinding,  Prev: Superseding,  Up: Texinfo mode
+
+A.5.3 Where key bindings are mapped to the native mode
+------------------------------------------------------
+
+This node follows the native Texinfo mode summary (*note
+(texinfo)Texinfo Mode Summary::) and lists only those commands to which
+AUCTeX provides a keybinding.
+
+   Basically all commands of the native mode related to producing menus
+and interlinking nodes are mapped to same or similar keys in AUCTeX,
+while a few insertion commands are mapped to AUCTeX-like keys.
+
+'@item' insertion
+     The binding 'C-c C-c i' for the insertion of '@item' in the native
+     mode is mapped to 'M-<RET>' or 'C-c C-j' in AUCTeX, similar to
+     other AUCTeX modes.
+
+'@end' insertion
+     The binding 'C-c C-c e' for closing a '@FOO' command by a
+     corresponding '@end FOO' statement in the native mode is mapped to
+     'C-c ]' in AUCTeX, similar to other AUCTeX modes.
+
+Move out of balanced braces
+     The binding 'C-c }' ('up-list') is available both in the native
+     mode and in AUCTeX.  (This is because the command is not
+     implemented in either mode but a native Emacs command.)  However,
+     in AUCTeX, you cannot use 'C-c ]' for this, as it is used for
+     '@end' insertion.
+
+Update pointers
+     The bindings 'C-c C-u C-n' ('texinfo-update-node') and 'C-c C-u
+     C-e' ('texinfo-every-node-update') from the native mode are
+     available in AUCTeX as well.
+
+Update menus
+     The bindings 'C-c C-u m' ('texinfo-master-menu'), 'C-c C-u C-m'
+     ('texinfo-make-menu'), and 'C-c C-u C-a'
+     ('texinfo-all-menus-update') from the native mode are available in
+     AUCTeX as well.  The command 'texinfo-start-menu-description',
+     bound to 'C-c C-c C-d' in the native mode, is bound to 'C-c C-u
+     C-d' in AUCTeX instead.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Unbinding,  Prev: Mapping,  Up: Texinfo mode
+
+A.5.4 Which native mode key bindings are missing
+------------------------------------------------
+
+The following commands from the native commands might still be useful
+when working with AUCTeX, however, they are not accessible with a key
+binding any longer.
+
+'@node' insertion
+     The node insertion command, mapped to 'C-c C-c n' in the native
+     mode, is not mapped to any key in AUCTeX.  You can still access it
+     through the Texinfo menu, though.  Another alternative is to use
+     the 'C-c C-m' binding for macro insertion in AUCTeX.
+
+Show the section structure
+     The command 'texinfo-show-structure' ('C-c C-s') from the native
+     mode does not have a key binding in AUCTeX.  The binding is used by
+     AUCTeX for sectioning.
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Indices,  Prev: Appendices,  Up: Top
+
+Indices
+*******
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Key Index::
+* Function Index::
+* Variable Index::
+* Concept Index::
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Key Index,  Next: Function Index,  Up: Indices
+
+Key Index
+=========
+
+
+* Menu:
+
+* ":                                     Quotes.              (line  15)
+* $:                                     Quotes.              (line  61)
+* (:                                     Quotes.              (line 154)
+* [:                                     Quotes.              (line 154)
+* ^:                                     Mathematics.         (line  64)
+* _:                                     Mathematics.         (line  64)
+* {:                                     Quotes.              (line 154)
+* C-c %:                                 Commenting.          (line  23)
+* C-c *:                                 Marking (LaTeX).     (line   7)
+* C-c * <1>:                             Marking (Texinfo).   (line   7)
+* C-c .:                                 Marking (LaTeX).     (line  16)
+* C-c . <1>:                             Marking (Texinfo).   (line  25)
+* C-c ;:                                 Commenting.          (line  15)
+* C-c ?:                                 Documentation.       (line   7)
+* C-c C-a:                               Starting a Command.  (line  59)
+* C-c C-b:                               Starting a Command.  (line  35)
+* C-c C-c:                               Starting a Command.  (line  13)
+* C-c C-d:                               Multifile.           (line  99)
+* C-c C-e:                               Environments.        (line  23)
+* C-c C-f:                               Font Specifiers.     (line  55)
+* C-c C-f C-b:                           Editing Facilities.  (line  72)
+* C-c C-f C-b <1>:                       Font Specifiers.     (line  16)
+* C-c C-f C-c:                           Editing Facilities.  (line  93)
+* C-c C-f C-c <1>:                       Editing Facilities.  (line  96)
+* C-c C-f C-c <2>:                       Font Specifiers.     (line  40)
+* C-c C-f C-c <3>:                       Font Specifiers.     (line  52)
+* C-c C-f C-e:                           Editing Facilities.  (line  78)
+* C-c C-f C-e <1>:                       Font Specifiers.     (line  25)
+* C-c C-f C-f:                           Editing Facilities.  (line  87)
+* C-c C-f C-f <1>:                       Font Specifiers.     (line  34)
+* C-c C-f C-i:                           Editing Facilities.  (line  75)
+* C-c C-f C-i <1>:                       Font Specifiers.     (line  22)
+* C-c C-f C-l:                           Font Specifiers.     (line  43)
+* C-c C-f C-m:                           Font Specifiers.     (line  19)
+* C-c C-f C-n:                           Font Specifiers.     (line  49)
+* C-c C-f C-r:                           Editing Facilities.  (line  84)
+* C-c C-f C-r <1>:                       Font Specifiers.     (line  31)
+* C-c C-f C-s:                           Editing Facilities.  (line  81)
+* C-c C-f C-s <1>:                       Font Specifiers.     (line  28)
+* C-c C-f C-t:                           Editing Facilities.  (line  90)
+* C-c C-f C-t <1>:                       Font Specifiers.     (line  37)
+* C-c C-f C-w:                           Font Specifiers.     (line  46)
+* C-c C-f g:                             Japanese.            (line 113)
+* C-c C-f m:                             Japanese.            (line 117)
+* C-c C-k:                               Control.             (line  10)
+* C-c C-l:                               Control.             (line  14)
+* C-c C-m:                               Completion.          (line  69)
+* C-c C-n:                               Parsing Files.       (line  45)
+* C-c C-o b:                             Folding.             (line 121)
+* C-c C-o C-b:                           Folding.             (line  43)
+* C-c C-o C-c:                           Folding.             (line 118)
+* C-c C-o C-e:                           Folding.             (line 102)
+* C-c C-o C-f:                           Folding.             (line  31)
+* C-c C-o C-m:                           Folding.             (line  93)
+* C-c C-o C-o:                           Folding.             (line 140)
+* C-c C-o C-p:                           Folding.             (line  89)
+* C-c C-o C-r:                           Folding.             (line  86)
+* C-c C-o i:                             Folding.             (line 133)
+* C-c C-o p:                             Folding.             (line 129)
+* C-c C-o r:                             Folding.             (line 125)
+* C-c C-q C-e:                           Filling.             (line  90)
+* C-c C-q C-p:                           Filling.             (line  84)
+* C-c C-q C-r:                           Filling.             (line  99)
+* C-c C-q C-s:                           Filling.             (line  95)
+* C-c C-r:                               Starting a Command.  (line  19)
+* C-c C-s:                               Sectioning.          (line  22)
+* C-c C-t C-b:                           Ignoring warnings.   (line  10)
+* C-c C-t C-i:                           Processing Facilities.
+                                                              (line  53)
+* C-c C-t C-i <1>:                       Processor Options.   (line  30)
+* C-c C-t C-o:                           Processing Facilities.
+                                                              (line  59)
+* C-c C-t C-p:                           Processing Facilities.
+                                                              (line  50)
+* C-c C-t C-p <1>:                       Processor Options.   (line  16)
+* C-c C-t C-r:                           Starting a Command.  (line  85)
+* C-c C-t C-s:                           Processing Facilities.
+                                                              (line  56)
+* C-c C-t C-s <1>:                       Processor Options.   (line  37)
+* C-c C-t C-w:                           Ignoring warnings.   (line  15)
+* C-c C-t C-x:                           Ignoring warnings.   (line  39)
+* C-c C-v:                               Starting Viewers.    (line  12)
+* C-c C-z:                               Starting a Command.  (line  42)
+* C-c <LFD>:                             Itemize-like.        (line  10)
+* C-c <LFD> <1>:                         Tabular-like.        (line  33)
+* C-c ]:                                 Environments.        (line 102)
+* C-c ^:                                 Control.             (line  18)
+* C-c _:                                 Multifile.           (line  71)
+* C-c `:                                 Debugging.           (line  12)
+* C-c {:                                 Quotes.              (line 122)
+* C-c ~:                                 Mathematics.         (line  12)
+* C-j:                                   Indenting.           (line  78)
+* C-M-a:                                 Environments.        (line 107)
+* C-M-e:                                 Environments.        (line 114)
+* C-M-h:                                 Marking (Texinfo).   (line  34)
+* C-x n e:                               Narrowing.           (line  17)
+* C-x n g:                               Narrowing.           (line  14)
+* <LFD>:                                 Indenting.           (line  78)
+* M-g p:                                 Debugging.           (line  27)
+* M-q:                                   Filling.             (line  87)
+* M-<TAB>:                               Completion.          (line  24)
+* <TAB>:                                 Indenting.           (line  74)
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Function Index,  Next: Variable Index,  Prev: Key Index,  Up: Indices
+
+Function Index
+==============
+
+
+* Menu:
+
+* align-current:                         Indenting.           (line  58)
+* ams-tex-mode:                          Modes and Hooks.     (line  22)
+* auto-fill-mode:                        Filling.             (line   6)
+* context-mode:                          Modes and Hooks.     (line  22)
+* doctex-mode:                           Modes and Hooks.     (line  22)
+* indent-region:                         Indenting.           (line  29)
+* japanese-latex-mode:                   Japanese.            (line   6)
+* japanese-plain-tex-mode:               Japanese.            (line   6)
+* LaTeX-add-bibliographies:              Adding Other.        (line  13)
+* LaTeX-add-environments:                Adding Environments. (line  66)
+* LaTeX-add-labels:                      Adding Other.        (line  16)
+* LaTeX-arg-author:                      Adding Macros.       (line 244)
+* LaTeX-arg-usepackage:                  Adding Macros.       (line 200)
+* LaTeX-CLASSNAME-class-options:         Adding Other.        (line 107)
+* LaTeX-close-environment:               Environments.        (line 101)
+* LaTeX-command-section:                 Starting a Command.  (line  41)
+* LaTeX-declare-expert-environments:     Adding Environments. (line 128)
+* LaTeX-env-args:                        Adding Environments. (line 109)
+* LaTeX-env-array:                       Adding Environments. (line  81)
+* LaTeX-env-bib:                         Adding Environments. (line 103)
+* LaTeX-env-contents:                    Adding Environments. (line 106)
+* LaTeX-env-figure:                      Adding Environments. (line  77)
+* LaTeX-env-item:                        Adding Environments. (line  74)
+* LaTeX-env-label:                       Adding Environments. (line  85)
+* LaTeX-env-list:                        Adding Environments. (line  88)
+* LaTeX-env-minipage:                    Adding Environments. (line  92)
+* LaTeX-env-picture:                     Adding Environments. (line 100)
+* LaTeX-env-tabular*:                    Adding Environments. (line  96)
+* LaTeX-environment:                     Environments.        (line  22)
+* LaTeX-fill-environment:                Filling.             (line  79)
+* LaTeX-fill-environment <1>:            Filling.             (line  90)
+* LaTeX-fill-paragraph:                  Filling.             (line  84)
+* LaTeX-fill-region:                     Filling.             (line  99)
+* LaTeX-fill-section:                    Filling.             (line  95)
+* LaTeX-find-matching-begin:             Environments.        (line 106)
+* LaTeX-find-matching-end:               Environments.        (line 113)
+* LaTeX-indent-line:                     Indenting.           (line  74)
+* LaTeX-insert-environment:              Adding Environments. (line  69)
+* LaTeX-insert-item:                     Itemize-like.        (line   9)
+* LaTeX-insert-item <1>:                 Tabular-like.        (line  32)
+* LaTeX-mark-environment:                Marking (LaTeX).     (line  15)
+* LaTeX-mark-section:                    Marking (LaTeX).     (line   6)
+* LaTeX-match-class-option:              Adding Other.        (line  55)
+* LaTeX-math-mode:                       Mathematics.         (line  11)
+* latex-mode:                            Modes and Hooks.     (line  22)
+* LaTeX-narrow-to-environment:           Narrowing.           (line  16)
+* LaTeX-PACKAGENAME-package-options:     Adding Other.        (line  82)
+* LaTeX-provided-class-options-member:   Adding Other.        (line  51)
+* LaTeX-provided-package-options-member: Adding Other.        (line  37)
+* LaTeX-section:                         Sectioning.          (line  21)
+* LaTeX-section-heading:                 Sectioning.          (line  69)
+* LaTeX-section-label:                   Sectioning.          (line  83)
+* LaTeX-section-section:                 Sectioning.          (line  77)
+* LaTeX-section-title:                   Sectioning.          (line  72)
+* LaTeX-section-toc:                     Sectioning.          (line  75)
+* plain-tex-mode:                        Modes and Hooks.     (line  22)
+* TeX--completion-at-point:              Completion.          (line  51)
+* TeX-add-style-hook:                    Simple Style.        (line  34)
+* TeX-add-symbols:                       Adding Macros.       (line  24)
+* TeX-arg-bibliography:                  Adding Macros.       (line 210)
+* TeX-arg-bibstyle:                      Adding Macros.       (line 206)
+* TeX-arg-cite:                          Adding Macros.       (line 136)
+* TeX-arg-conditional:                   Adding Macros.       (line  86)
+* TeX-arg-coordinate:                    Adding Macros.       (line 241)
+* TeX-arg-corner:                        Adding Macros.       (line 214)
+* TeX-arg-counter:                       Adding Macros.       (line 141)
+* TeX-arg-date:                          Adding Macros.       (line 122)
+* TeX-arg-define-cite:                   Adding Macros.       (line 182)
+* TeX-arg-define-counter:                Adding Macros.       (line 185)
+* TeX-arg-define-environment:            Adding Macros.       (line 178)
+* TeX-arg-define-label:                  Adding Macros.       (line 166)
+* TeX-arg-define-length:                 Adding Macros.       (line 170)
+* TeX-arg-define-macro:                  Adding Macros.       (line 174)
+* TeX-arg-define-savebox:                Adding Macros.       (line 188)
+* TeX-arg-document:                      Adding Macros.       (line 191)
+* TeX-arg-environment:                   Adding Macros.       (line 133)
+* TeX-arg-eval:                          Adding Macros.       (line  97)
+* TeX-arg-file:                          Adding Macros.       (line 147)
+* TeX-arg-file-name:                     Adding Macros.       (line 151)
+* TeX-arg-file-name-sans-extension:      Adding Macros.       (line 155)
+* TeX-arg-free:                          Adding Macros.       (line  94)
+* TeX-arg-hook:                          Adding Macros.       (line 251)
+* TeX-arg-index:                         Adding Macros.       (line 113)
+* TeX-arg-index-tag:                     Adding Macros.       (line 109)
+* TeX-arg-input-file:                    Adding Macros.       (line 159)
+* TeX-arg-key-val:                       Adding Macros.       (line 257)
+* TeX-arg-label:                         Adding Macros.       (line 100)
+* TeX-arg-length:                        Adding Macros.       (line 116)
+* TeX-arg-literal:                       Adding Macros.       (line  90)
+* TeX-arg-lr:                            Adding Macros.       (line 217)
+* TeX-arg-macro:                         Adding Macros.       (line 119)
+* TeX-arg-pagestyle:                     Adding Macros.       (line 223)
+* TeX-arg-pair:                          Adding Macros.       (line 234)
+* TeX-arg-ref:                           Adding Macros.       (line 104)
+* TeX-arg-savebox:                       Adding Macros.       (line 144)
+* TeX-arg-size:                          Adding Macros.       (line 238)
+* TeX-arg-tb:                            Adding Macros.       (line 220)
+* TeX-arg-verb:                          Adding Macros.       (line 226)
+* TeX-arg-verb-delim-or-brace:           Adding Macros.       (line 229)
+* TeX-arg-version:                       Adding Macros.       (line 129)
+* TeX-auto-generate:                     Automatic Private.   (line  23)
+* TeX-clean:                             Cleaning.            (line   6)
+* TeX-command-buffer:                    Starting a Command.  (line  34)
+* TeX-command-master:                    Starting a Command.  (line  12)
+* TeX-command-region:                    Starting a Command.  (line  18)
+* TeX-command-run-all:                   Starting a Command.  (line  58)
+* TeX-comment-or-uncomment-paragraph:    Commenting.          (line  22)
+* TeX-comment-or-uncomment-region:       Commenting.          (line  14)
+* TeX-complete-symbol:                   Completion.          (line  23)
+* TeX-declare-expert-macros:             Adding Macros.       (line 272)
+* TeX-documentation-texdoc:              Documentation.       (line   6)
+* TeX-electric-macro:                    Completion.          (line 107)
+* TeX-error-overview:                    Error overview.      (line  10)
+* TeX-fold-buffer:                       Folding.             (line  42)
+* TeX-fold-clearout-buffer:              Folding.             (line 120)
+* TeX-fold-clearout-item:                Folding.             (line 132)
+* TeX-fold-clearout-paragraph:           Folding.             (line 128)
+* TeX-fold-clearout-region:              Folding.             (line 124)
+* TeX-fold-comment:                      Folding.             (line 117)
+* TeX-fold-dwim:                         Folding.             (line 139)
+* TeX-fold-env:                          Folding.             (line 101)
+* TeX-fold-macro:                        Folding.             (line  92)
+* TeX-fold-math:                         Folding.             (line 108)
+* TeX-fold-mode:                         Folding.             (line  31)
+* TeX-fold-paragraph:                    Folding.             (line  88)
+* TeX-fold-region:                       Folding.             (line  85)
+* TeX-font:                              Font Specifiers.     (line  54)
+* TeX-home-buffer:                       Control.             (line  17)
+* TeX-insert-braces:                     Quotes.              (line 121)
+* TeX-insert-dollar:                     Quotes.              (line  60)
+* TeX-insert-macro:                      Completion.          (line  68)
+* TeX-insert-quote:                      Quotes.              (line  14)
+* TeX-interactive-mode:                  Processor Options.   (line  29)
+* TeX-ispell-skip-setcar:                Selecting a Command. (line 147)
+* TeX-ispell-skip-setcdr:                Selecting a Command. (line 147)
+* TeX-ispell-tex-arg-end:                Selecting a Command. (line 167)
+* TeX-kill-job:                          Control.             (line   9)
+* TeX-master-file-ask:                   Multifile.           (line  70)
+* TeX-narrow-to-group:                   Narrowing.           (line  13)
+* TeX-next-error:                        Debugging.           (line  11)
+* TeX-normal-mode:                       Parsing Files.       (line  44)
+* TeX-PDF-mode:                          Processor Options.   (line  15)
+* TeX-pin-region:                        Starting a Command.  (line  84)
+* TeX-previous-error:                    Debugging.           (line  26)
+* TeX-read-hook:                         Adding Macros.       (line 248)
+* TeX-read-key-val:                      Adding Macros.       (line 254)
+* TeX-recenter-output-buffer:            Control.             (line  13)
+* TeX-revert-document-buffer:            Modes and Hooks.     (line  39)
+* TeX-save-document:                     Multifile.           (line  98)
+* TeX-source-correlate-mode:             Processor Options.   (line  36)
+* TeX-source-correlate-mode <1>:         I/O Correlation.     (line  12)
+* TeX-toggle-debug-bad-boxes:            Ignoring warnings.   (line   9)
+* TeX-toggle-debug-warnings:             Ignoring warnings.   (line  14)
+* TeX-toggle-suppress-ignored-warnings:  Ignoring warnings.   (line  38)
+* TeX-view:                              Starting Viewers.    (line  11)
+* TeX-view <1>:                          I/O Correlation.     (line  42)
+* TeX-view-mouse:                        I/O Correlation.     (line  48)
+* Texinfo-mark-environment:              Marking (Texinfo).   (line  24)
+* Texinfo-mark-node:                     Marking (Texinfo).   (line  33)
+* Texinfo-mark-section:                  Marking (Texinfo).   (line   6)
+* texinfo-mode:                          Modes and Hooks.     (line  22)
+* turn-on-auto-fill:                     Filling.             (line   6)
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Variable Index,  Next: Concept Index,  Prev: Function Index,  Up: Indices
+
+Variable Index
+==============
+
+
+* Menu:
+
+* AmS-TeX-mode-hook:                     Modes and Hooks.     (line  22)
+* AmSTeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes:    Cleaning.            (line   7)
+* AmSTeX-clean-output-suffixes:          Cleaning.            (line   7)
+* ConTeXt-clean-intermediate-suffixes:   Cleaning.            (line   7)
+* ConTeXt-clean-output-suffixes:         Cleaning.            (line   7)
+* ConTeXt-engine:                        Processor Options.   (line 121)
+* ConTeXt-Mark-version:                  Processor Options.   (line 200)
+* ConTeXt-mode-hook:                     Modes and Hooks.     (line  22)
+* ConTeXt-Omega-engine:                  Processor Options.   (line 121)
+* docTeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes:    Cleaning.            (line   7)
+* docTeX-clean-output-suffixes:          Cleaning.            (line   7)
+* docTeX-mode-hook:                      Modes and Hooks.     (line  22)
+* fill-column:                           Filling.             (line   6)
+* font-latex-deactivated-keyword-classes: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 162)
+* font-latex-fontify-script:             Fontification of math.
+                                                              (line  28)
+* font-latex-fontify-script-max-level:   Fontification of math.
+                                                              (line  42)
+* font-latex-fontify-sectioning:         Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line  95)
+* font-latex-match-bold-command-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 137)
+* font-latex-match-bold-declaration-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 137)
+* font-latex-match-function-keywords:    Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line  60)
+* font-latex-match-italic-command-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 137)
+* font-latex-match-italic-declaration-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 137)
+* font-latex-match-math-command-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 137)
+* font-latex-match-math-command-keywords <1>: Fontification of math.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* font-latex-match-reference-keywords:   Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line  60)
+* font-latex-match-sectioning-0-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 107)
+* font-latex-match-sectioning-1-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 107)
+* font-latex-match-sectioning-2-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 107)
+* font-latex-match-sectioning-3-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 107)
+* font-latex-match-sectioning-4-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 107)
+* font-latex-match-sectioning-5-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 107)
+* font-latex-match-slide-title-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 114)
+* font-latex-match-textual-keywords:     Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line  60)
+* font-latex-match-type-command-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 137)
+* font-latex-match-type-declaration-keywords: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 137)
+* font-latex-match-variable-keywords:    Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line  60)
+* font-latex-match-warning-keywords:     Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line  60)
+* font-latex-math-environments:          Fontification of math.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* font-latex-quotes:                     Fontification of quotes.
+                                                              (line  15)
+* font-latex-script-char-face:           Fontification of math.
+                                                              (line  63)
+* font-latex-script-display:             Fontification of math.
+                                                              (line  66)
+* font-latex-sectioning-0-face:          Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line  96)
+* font-latex-sectioning-1-face:          Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line  96)
+* font-latex-sectioning-2-face:          Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line  96)
+* font-latex-sectioning-3-face:          Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line  96)
+* font-latex-sectioning-4-face:          Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line  96)
+* font-latex-sectioning-5-face:          Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line  96)
+* font-latex-slide-title-face:           Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 114)
+* font-latex-subscript-face:             Fontification of math.
+                                                              (line  42)
+* font-latex-superscript-face:           Fontification of math.
+                                                              (line  42)
+* font-latex-user-keyword-classes:       Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line 194)
+* japanese-LaTeX-default-style:          Japanese.            (line  75)
+* japanese-TeX-engine-default:           Japanese.            (line  36)
+* japanese-TeX-mode:                     Japanese.            (line   6)
+* japanese-TeX-use-kanji-opt-flag:       Japanese.            (line  87)
+* LaTeX-amsmath-label:                   Equations.           (line  15)
+* LaTeX-auto-class-regexp-list:          Parsing Files.       (line 106)
+* LaTeX-auto-counter-regexp-list:        Parsing Files.       (line 112)
+* LaTeX-auto-index-regexp-list:          Parsing Files.       (line 103)
+* LaTeX-auto-label-regexp-list:          Parsing Files.       (line 100)
+* LaTeX-auto-length-regexp-list:         Parsing Files.       (line 115)
+* LaTeX-auto-minimal-regexp-list:        Parsing Files.       (line  97)
+* LaTeX-auto-pagestyle-regexp-list:      Parsing Files.       (line 109)
+* LaTeX-auto-regexp-list:                Parsing Files.       (line 121)
+* LaTeX-auto-savebox-regexp-list:        Parsing Files.       (line 118)
+* LaTeX-babel-hyphen:                    European.            (line 168)
+* LaTeX-babel-hyphen-after-hyphen:       European.            (line 176)
+* LaTeX-babel-hyphen-language-alist:     European.            (line 155)
+* LaTeX-begin-regexp:                    Indenting.           (line 119)
+* LaTeX-biblatex-use-Biber:              Selecting a Command. (line  52)
+* LaTeX-CLASSNAME-class-options:         Adding Other.        (line 104)
+* LaTeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes:     Cleaning.            (line   7)
+* LaTeX-clean-output-suffixes:           Cleaning.            (line   7)
+* LaTeX-command:                         Processor Options.   (line 121)
+* LaTeX-csquotes-close-quote:            Quotes.              (line  43)
+* LaTeX-csquotes-open-quote:             Quotes.              (line  43)
+* LaTeX-csquotes-quote-after-quote:      Quotes.              (line  43)
+* LaTeX-default-author:                  Adding Macros.       (line 245)
+* LaTeX-default-document-environment:    Environments.        (line  61)
+* LaTeX-default-environment:             Environments.        (line  56)
+* LaTeX-default-format:                  Tabular-like.        (line  10)
+* LaTeX-default-options:                 Adding Macros.       (line 192)
+* LaTeX-default-position:                Tabular-like.        (line  16)
+* LaTeX-default-style:                   Adding Macros.       (line 192)
+* LaTeX-default-width:                   Tabular-like.        (line  13)
+* LaTeX-done-mark:                       Sectioning.          (line  62)
+* LaTeX-electric-left-right-brace:       Quotes.              (line 157)
+* LaTeX-enable-toolbar:                  Processing.          (line  11)
+* LaTeX-end-regexp:                      Indenting.           (line 119)
+* LaTeX-eqnarray-label:                  Equations.           (line  12)
+* LaTeX-equation-label:                  Equations.           (line   9)
+* LaTeX-figure-label:                    Floats.              (line  32)
+* LaTeX-figure-label <1>:                Floats.              (line  42)
+* LaTeX-fill-break-at-separators:        Filling.             (line 101)
+* LaTeX-fill-break-before-code-comments: Filling.             (line 111)
+* LaTeX-fill-excluded-macros:            Filling.             (line 121)
+* LaTeX-float:                           Floats.              (line  14)
+* LaTeX-float <1>:                       Floats.              (line  39)
+* LaTeX-fold-env-spec-list:              Folding.             (line 197)
+* LaTeX-fold-macro-spec-list:            Folding.             (line 197)
+* LaTeX-fold-math-spec-list:             Folding.             (line 197)
+* LaTeX-font-list:                       Font Specifiers.     (line  69)
+* LaTeX-indent-environment-check:        Indenting.           (line  51)
+* LaTeX-indent-environment-list:         Indenting.           (line  37)
+* LaTeX-indent-environment-list <1>:     Indenting.           (line  48)
+* LaTeX-indent-environment-list <2>:     Indenting.           (line  86)
+* LaTeX-indent-level:                    Indenting.           (line  19)
+* LaTeX-indent-level <1>:                Indenting.           (line  91)
+* LaTeX-item-indent:                     Indenting.           (line  19)
+* LaTeX-item-indent <1>:                 Indenting.           (line  95)
+* LaTeX-item-regexp:                     Indenting.           (line  19)
+* LaTeX-label-alist:                     Environments.        (line  38)
+* LaTeX-level:                           Sectioning.          (line  53)
+* LaTeX-math-abbrev-prefix:              Mathematics.         (line  26)
+* LaTeX-math-default:                    Mathematics.         (line   6)
+* LaTeX-math-list:                       Mathematics.         (line  36)
+* LaTeX-math-menu-unicode:               Mathematics.         (line  56)
+* LaTeX-mode-hook:                       Modes and Hooks.     (line  22)
+* LaTeX-name:                            Sectioning.          (line  56)
+* LaTeX-Omega-command:                   Processor Options.   (line 121)
+* LaTeX-PACKAGENAME-package-options:     Adding Other.        (line  69)
+* LaTeX-paragraph-commands:              Filling.             (line  54)
+* LaTeX-provided-class-options:          Adding Other.        (line  44)
+* LaTeX-provided-package-options:        Adding Other.        (line  26)
+* LaTeX-section-hook:                    Sectioning.          (line  40)
+* LaTeX-section-hook <1>:                Sectioning.          (line  48)
+* LaTeX-section-label:                   Sectioning.          (line  42)
+* LaTeX-section-label <1>:               Sectioning.          (line 101)
+* LaTeX-short-caption-prompt-length:     Floats.              (line  27)
+* LaTeX-short-caption-prompt-length <1>: Floats.              (line  51)
+* LaTeX-style-list:                      Adding Macros.       (line 192)
+* LaTeX-syntactic-comments:              Indenting.           (line  68)
+* LaTeX-syntactic-comments <1>:          Indenting.           (line 103)
+* LaTeX-table-label:                     Floats.              (line  32)
+* LaTeX-table-label <1>:                 Floats.              (line  45)
+* LaTeX-title:                           Sectioning.          (line  58)
+* LaTeX-toc:                             Sectioning.          (line  60)
+* LaTeX-top-caption-list:                Floats.              (line  20)
+* LaTeX-top-caption-list <1>:            Floats.              (line  48)
+* LaTeX-verbatim-environments:           Verbatim content.    (line  10)
+* LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-braces:     Verbatim content.    (line  10)
+* LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-delims:     Verbatim content.    (line  10)
+* outline-regexp:                        Marking (Texinfo).   (line  10)
+* plain-TeX-auto-regexp-list:            Parsing Files.       (line 124)
+* plain-TeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes: Cleaning.            (line   7)
+* plain-TeX-clean-output-suffixes:       Cleaning.            (line   7)
+* plain-TeX-enable-toolbar:              Processing.          (line  11)
+* plain-TeX-mode-hook:                   Modes and Hooks.     (line  22)
+* TeX-after-compilation-finished-functions: Modes and Hooks.  (line  30)
+* TeX-after-compilation-finished-functions <1>: Modes and Hooks.
+                                                              (line  40)
+* TeX-arg-cite-note-p:                   Adding Macros.       (line 137)
+* TeX-arg-input-file-search:             Adding Macros.       (line 160)
+* TeX-arg-input-file-search <1>:         Adding Macros.       (line 192)
+* TeX-arg-input-file-search <2>:         Adding Macros.       (line 201)
+* TeX-arg-item-label-p:                  Itemize-like.        (line  15)
+* TeX-arg-right-insert-p:                Quotes.              (line 150)
+* TeX-auto-cleanup-hook:                 Hacking the Parser.  (line 100)
+* TeX-auto-empty-regexp-list:            Parsing Files.       (line  94)
+* TeX-auto-full-regexp-list:             Parsing Files.       (line 127)
+* TeX-auto-global:                       Automatic Global.    (line  24)
+* TeX-auto-local:                        Automatic Local.     (line  21)
+* TeX-auto-parse-length:                 Parsing Files.       (line  88)
+* TeX-auto-prepare-hook:                 Hacking the Parser.  (line  97)
+* TeX-auto-private:                      Automatic Private.   (line  19)
+* TeX-auto-regexp-list:                  Parsing Files.       (line  85)
+* TeX-auto-regexp-list <1>:              Hacking the Parser.  (line  78)
+* TeX-auto-save:                         Parsing Files.       (line  41)
+* TeX-auto-untabify:                     Parsing Files.       (line  58)
+* TeX-bar-LaTeX-button-alist:            Processing.          (line  11)
+* TeX-bar-LaTeX-buttons:                 Processing.          (line  11)
+* TeX-bar-TeX-all-button-alists:         Processing.          (line  11)
+* TeX-bar-TeX-buttons:                   Processing.          (line  11)
+* TeX-brace-indent-level:                Indenting.           (line  99)
+* TeX-check-engine:                      Processor Options.   (line 164)
+* TeX-check-path:                        Selecting a Command. (line  68)
+* TeX-check-TeX:                         Processor Options.   (line 149)
+* TeX-check-TeX-command-not-found:       Processor Options.   (line 150)
+* TeX-clean-confirm:                     Cleaning.            (line  30)
+* TeX-close-quote:                       Quotes.              (line  25)
+* TeX-command:                           Processor Options.   (line 121)
+* TeX-command <1>:                       Processor Options.   (line 150)
+* TeX-command-default:                   Selecting a Command. (line  43)
+* TeX-command-extra-options:             Processor Options.   (line 172)
+* TeX-command-list:                      Starting a Command.  (line  16)
+* TeX-command-list <1>:                  Starting a Command.  (line  32)
+* TeX-command-list <2>:                  Selecting a Command. (line  14)
+* TeX-complete-expert-commands:          Environments.        (line  78)
+* TeX-complete-expert-commands <1>:      Completion.          (line 142)
+* TeX-complete-list:                     Completion.          (line  26)
+* TeX-date-format:                       Adding Macros.       (line 123)
+* TeX-debug-bad-boxes:                   Ignoring warnings.   (line  10)
+* TeX-debug-warnings:                    Ignoring warnings.   (line  15)
+* TeX-default-macro:                     Completion.          (line  76)
+* TeX-default-mode:                      Japanese.            (line   6)
+* TeX-default-mode <1>:                  Japanese.            (line  67)
+* TeX-dialect:                           Simple Style.        (line  82)
+* TeX-display-help:                      Debugging.           (line  47)
+* TeX-DVI-via-PDFTeX:                    Processor Options.   (line  22)
+* TeX-electric-escape:                   Completion.          (line  97)
+* TeX-electric-math:                     Quotes.              (line  72)
+* TeX-electric-sub-and-superscript:      Mathematics.         (line  70)
+* TeX-engine:                            Processor Options.   (line 104)
+* TeX-engine <1>:                        Japanese.            (line   6)
+* TeX-engine-alist:                      Processor Options.   (line 121)
+* TeX-engine-alist <1>:                  Processor Options.   (line 132)
+* TeX-engine-alist <2>:                  Japanese.            (line   6)
+* TeX-engine-alist-builtin:              Processor Options.   (line 121)
+* TeX-error-overview-frame-parameters:   Error overview.      (line  43)
+* TeX-error-overview-open-after-TeX-run: Error overview.      (line  25)
+* TeX-error-overview-setup:              Error overview.      (line  34)
+* TeX-expand-list:                       Selecting a Command. (line  14)
+* TeX-file-line-error:                   Processor Options.   (line 193)
+* TeX-file-recurse:                      Automatic.           (line  44)
+* TeX-fold-auto:                         Folding.             (line  70)
+* TeX-fold-command-prefix:               Folding.             (line 145)
+* TeX-fold-env-spec-list:                Folding.             (line 187)
+* TeX-fold-force-fontify:                Folding.             (line  62)
+* TeX-fold-help-echo-max-length:         Folding.             (line 224)
+* TeX-fold-macro-spec-list:              Folding.             (line 154)
+* TeX-fold-math-spec-list:               Folding.             (line 194)
+* TeX-fold-preserve-comments:            Folding.             (line  75)
+* TeX-fold-type-list:                    Folding.             (line  57)
+* TeX-fold-unfold-around-mark:           Folding.             (line  81)
+* TeX-fold-unspec-env-display-string:    Folding.             (line 207)
+* TeX-fold-unspec-macro-display-string:  Folding.             (line 203)
+* TeX-fold-unspec-use-name:              Folding.             (line 211)
+* TeX-font-list:                         Font Specifiers.     (line  60)
+* TeX-header-end:                        Starting a Command.  (line  32)
+* TeX-header-end <1>:                    Starting a Command.  (line  69)
+* TeX-ignore-file:                       Automatic.           (line  52)
+* TeX-ignore-warnings:                   Ignoring warnings.   (line  25)
+* TeX-indent-close-delimiters:           Indenting.           (line 133)
+* TeX-indent-open-delimiters:            Indenting.           (line 128)
+* TeX-insert-braces:                     Completion.          (line 117)
+* TeX-insert-braces-alist:               Completion.          (line 121)
+* TeX-insert-macro-default-style:        Completion.          (line  80)
+* TeX-install-font-lock:                 Font Locking.        (line  13)
+* TeX-interactive-mode:                  Processor Options.   (line  30)
+* TeX-ispell-extend-skip-list:           Selecting a Command. (line  83)
+* TeX-ispell-verb-delimiters:            Selecting a Command. (line 176)
+* TeX-japanese-process-input-coding-system: Japanese.         (line  95)
+* TeX-japanese-process-output-coding-system: Japanese.        (line  99)
+* TeX-language-bg-hook:                  European.            (line  51)
+* TeX-language-cz-hook:                  European.            (line  51)
+* TeX-language-de-hook:                  European.            (line  51)
+* TeX-language-dk-hook:                  European.            (line  51)
+* TeX-language-en-hook:                  European.            (line  51)
+* TeX-language-is-hook:                  European.            (line  51)
+* TeX-language-it-hook:                  European.            (line  51)
+* TeX-language-nl-hook:                  European.            (line  51)
+* TeX-language-pl-hook:                  European.            (line  51)
+* TeX-language-pt-br-hook:               European.            (line  51)
+* TeX-language-pt-hook:                  European.            (line  51)
+* TeX-language-sk-hook:                  European.            (line  51)
+* TeX-language-sv-hook:                  European.            (line  51)
+* TeX-macro-global:                      Customizing.         (line  19)
+* TeX-macro-global <1>:                  Automatic Global.    (line  16)
+* TeX-macro-private:                     Automatic Private.   (line  12)
+* TeX-master:                            Starting a Command.  (line  16)
+* TeX-master <1>:                        Starting a Command.  (line  32)
+* TeX-master <2>:                        Multifile.           (line  39)
+* TeX-math-input-method-off-regexp:      Mathematics.         (line  76)
+* TeX-newline-function:                  Indenting.           (line  29)
+* TeX-newline-function <1>:              Indenting.           (line 107)
+* TeX-Omega-command:                     Processor Options.   (line 121)
+* TeX-one-master:                        Multifile.           (line  57)
+* TeX-open-quote:                        Quotes.              (line  21)
+* TeX-outline-extra:                     Outline.             (line  13)
+* TeX-output-dir:                        Control.             (line  25)
+* TeX-parse-all-errors:                  Debugging.           (line  35)
+* TeX-parse-self:                        Parsing Files.       (line  38)
+* TeX-parse-self <1>:                    Japanese.            (line   6)
+* TeX-PDF-from-DVI:                      Processor Options.   (line  71)
+* TeX-PDF-mode:                          Processor Options.   (line  16)
+* TeX-quote-after-quote:                 Quotes.              (line  29)
+* TeX-quote-language-alist:              European.            (line 142)
+* TeX-raise-frame-function:              I/O Correlation.     (line  85)
+* TeX-region:                            Starting a Command.  (line  32)
+* TeX-region <1>:                        Starting a Command.  (line  65)
+* TeX-save-query:                        Multifile.           (line 102)
+* TeX-show-compilation:                  Processor Options.   (line 185)
+* TeX-source-correlate-map:              I/O Correlation.     (line  48)
+* TeX-source-correlate-method:           Processor Options.   (line  48)
+* TeX-source-correlate-method <1>:       I/O Correlation.     (line  21)
+* TeX-source-correlate-mode:             Processor Options.   (line  37)
+* TeX-source-correlate-start-server:     I/O Correlation.     (line  57)
+* TeX-source-correlate-start-server <1>: I/O Correlation.     (line  63)
+* TeX-source-correlate-start-server <2>: I/O Correlation.     (line  77)
+* TeX-style-global:                      Automatic Global.    (line  19)
+* TeX-style-local:                       Automatic Local.     (line  16)
+* TeX-style-path:                        Automatic.           (line  38)
+* TeX-style-private:                     Automatic Private.   (line  28)
+* TeX-suppress-ignored-warnings:         Ignoring warnings.   (line  39)
+* TeX-trailer-start:                     Starting a Command.  (line  32)
+* TeX-trailer-start <1>:                 Starting a Command.  (line  74)
+* TeX-view-evince-keep-focus:            Starting Viewers.    (line  92)
+* TeX-view-predicate-list:               Starting Viewers.    (line  56)
+* TeX-view-program-list:                 Starting Viewers.    (line  65)
+* TeX-view-program-selection:            Starting Viewers.    (line  36)
+* Texinfo-clean-intermediate-suffixes:   Cleaning.            (line   7)
+* Texinfo-clean-output-suffixes:         Cleaning.            (line   7)
+* Texinfo-mode-hook:                     Modes and Hooks.     (line  22)
+* texinfo-section-list:                  Marking (Texinfo).   (line  10)
+* texmathp-tex-commands:                 Fontification of math.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* texmathp-tex-commands-default:         Fontification of math.
+                                                              (line   6)
+
+
+File: auctex.info,  Node: Concept Index,  Prev: Variable Index,  Up: Indices
+
+Concept Index
+=============
+
+
+* Menu:
+
+* .emacs:                                Loading the package. (line   6)
+* \begin:                                Environments.        (line   6)
+* \chapter:                              Editing Facilities.  (line  24)
+* \chapter <1>:                          Sectioning.          (line   6)
+* \cite, completion of:                  Completion.          (line 154)
+* \emph:                                 Editing Facilities.  (line  78)
+* \emph <1>:                             Font Specifiers.     (line  25)
+* \end:                                  Environments.        (line   6)
+* \include:                              Multifile.           (line   6)
+* \input:                                Multifile.           (line   6)
+* \item:                                 Itemize-like.        (line   6)
+* \label:                                Editing Facilities.  (line  24)
+* \label <1>:                            Sectioning.          (line   6)
+* \label, completion:                    Completion.          (line 154)
+* \mathgt:                               Japanese.            (line 113)
+* \mathmc:                               Japanese.            (line 117)
+* \ref, completion:                      Completion.          (line 154)
+* \section:                              Editing Facilities.  (line  24)
+* \section <1>:                          Sectioning.          (line   6)
+* \subsection:                           Editing Facilities.  (line  24)
+* \subsection <1>:                       Sectioning.          (line   6)
+* \textbf:                               Editing Facilities.  (line  72)
+* \textbf <1>:                           Font Specifiers.     (line  16)
+* \textgt:                               Japanese.            (line 113)
+* \textit:                               Editing Facilities.  (line  75)
+* \textit <1>:                           Font Specifiers.     (line  22)
+* \textmc:                               Japanese.            (line 117)
+* \textmd:                               Font Specifiers.     (line  19)
+* \textnormal:                           Font Specifiers.     (line  49)
+* \textrm:                               Editing Facilities.  (line  84)
+* \textrm <1>:                           Font Specifiers.     (line  31)
+* \textsc:                               Editing Facilities.  (line  93)
+* \textsc <1>:                           Font Specifiers.     (line  40)
+* \textsf:                               Editing Facilities.  (line  87)
+* \textsf <1>:                           Font Specifiers.     (line  34)
+* \textsl:                               Editing Facilities.  (line  81)
+* \textsl <1>:                           Font Specifiers.     (line  28)
+* \textsw:                               Font Specifiers.     (line  46)
+* \texttt:                               Editing Facilities.  (line  90)
+* \texttt <1>:                           Font Specifiers.     (line  37)
+* \textulc:                              Font Specifiers.     (line  43)
+* Abbreviations:                         Mathematics.         (line   6)
+* Adding a style hook:                   Simple Style.        (line   6)
+* Adding bibliographies:                 Adding Other.        (line   6)
+* Adding environments:                   Adding Environments. (line   6)
+* Adding labels:                         Adding Other.        (line   6)
+* Adding macros:                         Adding Macros.       (line   6)
+* Adding other information:              Adding Other.        (line   6)
+* Adding support for completion of package/class options: Adding Other.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* Adding to PATH in Windows:             Installation under MS Windows.
+                                                              (line  42)
+* align.el:                              Indenting.           (line  58)
+* amsmath:                               Equations.           (line   6)
+* amsmath <1>:                           Tabular-like.        (line   6)
+* Arguments to TeX macros:               Completion.          (line   6)
+* ASCII pTeX:                            Internationalization.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* ASCII pTeX <1>:                        Japanese.            (line   6)
+* auctex.el:                             Loading the package. (line  10)
+* auctex.el <1>:                         Changes.             (line 841)
+* auto directories.:                     Automatic.           (line   6)
+* auto-fill-mode:                        Indenting.           (line  29)
+* Auto-Reveal:                           Folding.             (line   6)
+* Automatic:                             Automatic.           (line   6)
+* Automatic Customization:               Automatic.           (line   6)
+* Automatic Parsing:                     Parsing Files.       (line   6)
+* Automatic updating style hooks:        Automatic Local.     (line   6)
+* Bad boxes:                             Debugging.           (line   6)
+* Biber:                                 Selecting a Command. (line  47)
+* biblatex:                              Selecting a Command. (line  47)
+* Bibliographies, adding:                Adding Other.        (line   6)
+* Bibliography:                          Commands.            (line   6)
+* bibliography, completion:              Completion.          (line 154)
+* BibTeX:                                Commands.            (line   6)
+* BibTeX, completion:                    Completion.          (line 154)
+* book.el:                               Simple Style.        (line   6)
+* Braces:                                Quotes.              (line   6)
+* Brackets:                              Quotes.              (line   6)
+* Brazilian Portuguese:                  European.            (line  51)
+* Bulgarian:                             European.            (line  51)
+* Changing font:                         Font Specifiers.     (line   6)
+* Changing the parser:                   Hacking the Parser.  (line   6)
+* Chapters:                              Editing Facilities.  (line  24)
+* Chapters <1>:                          Sectioning.          (line   6)
+* Checking:                              Checking.            (line   6)
+* ChinaTeX:                              Internationalization.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* chktex:                                Checking.            (line   6)
+* citations, completion of:              Completion.          (line 154)
+* cite, completion of:                   Completion.          (line 154)
+* CJK language:                          Internationalization.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* CJK-LaTeX:                             Internationalization.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* Cleaning:                              Cleaning.            (line   6)
+* Commands:                              Commands.            (line   6)
+* Completion:                            Completion.          (line   6)
+* Controlling the output:                Control.             (line   6)
+* Copying:                               Copying.             (line   6)
+* Copyright:                             Copying.             (line   6)
+* CTeX:                                  Internationalization.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* Current file:                          Control.             (line   6)
+* Customization:                         Customizing.         (line   6)
+* Customization, personal:               Customizing.         (line   6)
+* Customization, site:                   Customizing.         (line   6)
+* Czech:                                 European.            (line  51)
+* Danish:                                European.            (line  51)
+* Debugging:                             Debugging.           (line   6)
+* Default command:                       Commands.            (line   6)
+* Defining bibliographies in style hooks: Adding Other.       (line   6)
+* Defining environments in style hooks:  Adding Environments. (line   6)
+* Defining labels in style hooks:        Adding Other.        (line   6)
+* Defining macros in style hooks:        Adding Macros.       (line   6)
+* Defining other information in style hooks: Adding Other.    (line   5)
+* Deleting fonts:                        Editing Facilities.  (line  96)
+* Deleting fonts <1>:                    Font Specifiers.     (line  52)
+* Descriptions:                          Itemize-like.        (line   6)
+* Display math mode:                     Quotes.              (line   6)
+* Distribution:                          Copying.             (line   6)
+* Documentation:                         Documentation.       (line   6)
+* Documents:                             Multifile.           (line   6)
+* Documents with multiple files:         Multifile.           (line   6)
+* Dollar signs, color bleed with:        Known problems.      (line   6)
+* Dollars:                               Quotes.              (line   6)
+* Double quotes:                         Quotes.              (line   6)
+* Dutch:                                 European.            (line  51)
+* English:                               European.            (line  51)
+* Enumerates:                            Itemize-like.        (line   6)
+* Environments:                          Environments.        (line   6)
+* Environments, adding:                  Adding Environments. (line   6)
+* Eqnarray:                              Equations.           (line   6)
+* Equation:                              Equations.           (line   6)
+* Equations:                             Equations.           (line   6)
+* Errors:                                Debugging.           (line   6)
+* Europe:                                European.            (line   6)
+* European Characters:                   European.            (line   6)
+* Examining package/class options:       Adding Other.        (line   6)
+* Example of a style file.:              Simple Style.        (line   6)
+* Expansion:                             Completion.          (line   6)
+* External Commands:                     Commands.            (line   6)
+* Extracting TeX symbols:                Automatic.           (line   6)
+* Faces:                                 Faces.               (line   6)
+* FDL, GNU Free Documentation License:   GNU Free Documentation License.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* Figure environment:                    Floats.              (line   6)
+* Figures:                               Floats.              (line   6)
+* Filling:                               Filling.             (line   6)
+* Finding errors:                        Checking.            (line   6)
+* Finding the current file:              Control.             (line   6)
+* Finding the master file:               Control.             (line   6)
+* Floats:                                Floats.              (line   6)
+* Flymake:                               Checking.            (line   6)
+* Folding:                               Folding.             (line   6)
+* Folding <1>:                           Outline.             (line   6)
+* Font Locking:                          Font Locking.        (line   6)
+* Font macros:                           Font Specifiers.     (line   6)
+* font-latex:                            Font Locking.        (line   6)
+* Fonts:                                 Font Specifiers.     (line   6)
+* Formatting:                            Indenting.           (line   6)
+* Formatting <1>:                        Filling.             (line   6)
+* Formatting <2>:                        Commands.            (line   6)
+* Forward search:                        I/O Correlation.     (line   6)
+* Free:                                  Copying.             (line   6)
+* Free software:                         Copying.             (line   6)
+* General Public License:                Copying.             (line   6)
+* Generating symbols:                    Automatic.           (line   6)
+* German:                                European.            (line  51)
+* Global directories:                    Automatic Global.    (line   6)
+* Global macro directory:                Automatic Global.    (line   6)
+* Global style hook directory:           Automatic Global.    (line   6)
+* Global TeX macro directory:            Automatic Global.    (line   6)
+* GPL:                                   Copying.             (line   6)
+* Header:                                Commands.            (line   6)
+* Headers:                               Outline.             (line   6)
+* Hide Macros:                           Folding.             (line   6)
+* HLaTeX:                                Internationalization.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* I/O correlation:                       Processor Options.   (line  36)
+* I/O correlation <1>:                   I/O Correlation.     (line   6)
+* Including:                             Multifile.           (line   6)
+* Indentation:                           Indenting.           (line   6)
+* Indenting:                             Indenting.           (line   6)
+* Indexing:                              Commands.            (line   6)
+* init.el:                               Loading the package. (line   6)
+* Initialization:                        Customizing.         (line   6)
+* input method:                          Mathematics.         (line  73)
+* Inputing:                              Multifile.           (line   6)
+* Installation:                          Build/install and uninstall.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* Internationalization:                  Internationalization.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* Inverse search:                        I/O Correlation.     (line   6)
+* ISO 8859 Latin 1:                      European.            (line   6)
+* ISO Character set:                     European.            (line   6)
+* iso-cvt.el:                            European.            (line  29)
+* ispell:                                Selecting a Command. (line  74)
+* ispell <1>:                            European.            (line  38)
+* Italian:                               European.            (line  51)
+* Itemize:                               Itemize-like.        (line   6)
+* Items:                                 Itemize-like.        (line   6)
+* Japan:                                 Japanese.            (line   6)
+* Japanese:                              Japanese.            (line   6)
+* jLaTeX:                                Japanese.            (line   6)
+* jTeX:                                  Internationalization.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* jTeX <1>:                              Japanese.            (line   6)
+* Killing a process:                     Control.             (line   6)
+* kTeX:                                  Internationalization.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* Label prefix:                          Sectioning.          (line 111)
+* Label prefix <1>:                      Floats.              (line  32)
+* Labels:                                Sectioning.          (line 111)
+* Labels <1>:                            Floats.              (line  32)
+* Labels, adding:                        Adding Other.        (line   6)
+* labels, completion of:                 Completion.          (line 154)
+* lacheck:                               Checking.            (line   6)
+* Language Support:                      Internationalization.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* LaTeX:                                 Commands.            (line   6)
+* Latin 1:                               European.            (line   5)
+* License:                               Copying.             (line   6)
+* Literature:                            Commands.            (line   6)
+* Local style directory:                 Automatic Local.     (line   6)
+* Local style hooks:                     Automatic Local.     (line   6)
+* Local style hooks <1>:                 Automatic Local.     (line   6)
+* Macro arguments:                       Completion.          (line   6)
+* Macro completion:                      Completion.          (line   6)
+* Macro expansion:                       Completion.          (line   6)
+* macro.el:                              Hacking the Parser.  (line   6)
+* macro.tex:                             Hacking the Parser.  (line   6)
+* Macros, adding:                        Adding Macros.       (line   6)
+* Make:                                  Build/install and uninstall.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* makeindex:                             Commands.            (line   6)
+* Making a bibliography:                 Commands.            (line   6)
+* Making an index:                       Commands.            (line   6)
+* Many Files:                            Multifile.           (line   6)
+* Master file:                           Control.             (line   6)
+* Master file <1>:                       Multifile.           (line   6)
+* Matching dollar signs:                 Quotes.              (line   6)
+* Math mode delimiters:                  Quotes.              (line   6)
+* Math, fontification of:                Fontification of math.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* Math, fontification problems with:     Known problems.      (line   6)
+* Mathematics:                           Mathematics.         (line   6)
+* Multifile Documents:                   Multifile.           (line   6)
+* Multiple Files:                        Multifile.           (line   6)
+* Next error:                            Debugging.           (line   6)
+* Nippon:                                Japanese.            (line   6)
+* NTT jTeX:                              Internationalization.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* NTT jTeX <1>:                          Japanese.            (line   6)
+* Other information, adding:             Adding Other.        (line   6)
+* Outlining:                             Folding.             (line   6)
+* Outlining <1>:                         Outline.             (line   6)
+* Output:                                Control.             (line   6)
+* Overfull boxes:                        Debugging.           (line   6)
+* Overview:                              Outline.             (line   6)
+* package/class options, Examining:      Adding Other.        (line   6)
+* Parsing errors:                        Debugging.           (line   6)
+* Parsing LaTeX errors:                  Debugging.           (line   6)
+* Parsing new macros:                    Hacking the Parser.  (line   6)
+* Parsing TeX:                           Parsing Files.       (line   6)
+* Parsing TeX <1>:                       Automatic.           (line   6)
+* Parsing TeX output:                    Debugging.           (line   6)
+* PATH in Windows:                       Installation under MS Windows.
+                                                              (line  42)
+* PDF mode:                              Processor Options.   (line  16)
+* PDFSync:                               Processor Options.   (line  36)
+* PDFSync <1>:                           I/O Correlation.     (line   6)
+* Personal customization:                Customizing.         (line   6)
+* Personal information:                  Automatic Private.   (line   6)
+* Personal macro directory:              Automatic Private.   (line   6)
+* Personal TeX macro directory:          Automatic Private.   (line   6)
+* pLaTeX:                                Japanese.            (line   6)
+* Polish:                                European.            (line  51)
+* Portuguese:                            European.            (line  51)
+* Prefix for labels:                     Sectioning.          (line 111)
+* Prefix for labels <1>:                 Floats.              (line  32)
+* preview-install-styles:                Configure.           (line  85)
+* Previewing:                            Viewing.             (line   6)
+* Printing:                              Commands.            (line   6)
+* Private directories:                   Automatic Private.   (line   6)
+* Private macro directory:               Automatic Private.   (line   6)
+* Private style hook directory:          Automatic Private.   (line   6)
+* Private TeX macro directory:           Automatic Private.   (line   6)
+* Problems:                              Checking.            (line   6)
+* Processes:                             Control.             (line   6)
+* pTeX:                                  Internationalization.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* pTeX <1>:                              Japanese.            (line   6)
+* Quotes:                                Quotes.              (line   6)
+* Quotes, fontification of:              Fontification of quotes.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* Redisplay output:                      Control.             (line   6)
+* Refilling:                             Filling.             (line   6)
+* Reformatting:                          Indenting.           (line   6)
+* Reformatting <1>:                      Filling.             (line   6)
+* Region:                                Commands.            (line   6)
+* Region file:                           Commands.            (line   6)
+* Reindenting:                           Indenting.           (line   6)
+* Reveal:                                Folding.             (line   6)
+* Right:                                 Copying.             (line   6)
+* Running BibTeX:                        Commands.            (line   6)
+* Running chktex:                        Checking.            (line   6)
+* Running commands:                      Commands.            (line   6)
+* Running Flymake:                       Checking.            (line   6)
+* Running lacheck:                       Checking.            (line   6)
+* Running LaTeX:                         Commands.            (line   6)
+* Running makeindex:                     Commands.            (line   6)
+* Running TeX:                           Commands.            (line   6)
+* Sample style file:                     Simple Style.        (line   6)
+* Sectioning:                            Editing Facilities.  (line  24)
+* Sectioning <1>:                        Sectioning.          (line   6)
+* Sectioning commands, fontification of: Fontification of macros.
+                                                              (line  91)
+* Sections:                              Editing Facilities.  (line  24)
+* Sections <1>:                          Sectioning.          (line   6)
+* Sections <2>:                          Outline.             (line   6)
+* Setting the default command:           Commands.            (line   6)
+* Setting the header:                    Commands.            (line   6)
+* Setting the trailer:                   Commands.            (line   6)
+* Site customization:                    Customizing.         (line   6)
+* Site information:                      Automatic Global.    (line   6)
+* Site initialization:                   Customizing.         (line   6)
+* Site macro directory:                  Automatic Global.    (line   6)
+* Site TeX macro directory:              Automatic Global.    (line   6)
+* Slovak:                                European.            (line  51)
+* Source specials:                       Processor Options.   (line  36)
+* Source specials <1>:                   I/O Correlation.     (line   6)
+* Specifying a font:                     Font Specifiers.     (line   6)
+* Starting a previewer:                  Viewing.             (line   6)
+* Stopping a process:                    Control.             (line   6)
+* Style:                                 Checking.            (line   6)
+* style:                                 Style Files.         (line   6)
+* Style file:                            Simple Style.        (line   6)
+* Style files:                           Style Files.         (line   6)
+* Style hook:                            Simple Style.        (line   6)
+* Style hooks:                           Style Files.         (line   6)
+* subscript:                             Mathematics.         (line  64)
+* Subscript, fontification of:           Fontification of math.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* superscript:                           Mathematics.         (line  64)
+* Superscript, fontification of:         Fontification of math.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* support for completion of package/class options, Adding: Adding Other.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* Swedish:                               European.            (line  51)
+* Symbols:                               Mathematics.         (line   6)
+* SyncTeX:                               Processor Options.   (line  36)
+* SyncTeX <1>:                           I/O Correlation.     (line   6)
+* Syntax Highlighting:                   Font Locking.        (line   6)
+* Tabify:                                Parsing Files.       (line   6)
+* Table environment:                     Floats.              (line   6)
+* Tables:                                Floats.              (line   6)
+* Tabs:                                  Parsing Files.       (line   6)
+* TeX:                                   Commands.            (line   6)
+* TeX parsing:                           Automatic.           (line   6)
+* tex-jp.el:                             Japanese.            (line   6)
+* tex-mik.el:                            Installation under MS Windows.
+                                                              (line 252)
+* tex-site.el:                           Loading the package. (line  10)
+* tex-site.el <1>:                       Customizing.         (line   6)
+* tex-site.el <2>:                       Changes.             (line 841)
+* tool bar, toolbar:                     Processing.          (line  11)
+* Trailer:                               Commands.            (line   6)
+* Underfull boxes:                       Debugging.           (line   6)
+* Uninstallation:                        Build/install and uninstall.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* Untabify:                              Parsing Files.       (line   6)
+* Updating style hooks:                  Automatic Local.     (line   6)
+* upLaTeX:                               Japanese.            (line   6)
+* upTeX:                                 Internationalization.
+                                                              (line   6)
+* upTeX <1>:                             Japanese.            (line   6)
+* Verbatim, fontification of:            Verbatim content.    (line   6)
+* Viewer predicates:                     Adding Other.        (line   6)
+* Viewing:                               Viewing.             (line   6)
+* Warranty:                              Copying.             (line   6)
+* Writing to a printer:                  Commands.            (line   6)
+* X-Symbol:                              European.            (line  32)
+
+
+
+Tag Table:
+Node: Top917
+Node: Copying7373
+Node: Introduction9318
+Node: Summary9588
+Node: Installation12321
+Node: Prerequisites14294
+Node: Configure16493
+Node: Build/install and uninstall21071
+Node: Loading the package21824
+Node: Advice for package providers23517
+Node: Advice for non-privileged users26322
+Node: Installation under MS Windows31668
+Node: Customizing45290
+Node: Quick Start46875
+Ref: Quick Start-Footnote-148996
+Node: Editing Facilities49090
+Node: Processing Facilities53785
+Node: Editing58514
+Node: Quotes59844
+Node: Font Specifiers68284
+Node: Sectioning70352
+Node: Environments74871
+Node: Equations80024
+Node: Floats80616
+Node: Itemize-like82620
+Node: Tabular-like83342
+Node: Customizing Environments85115
+Node: Mathematics85355
+Node: Completion88791
+Node: Marking95822
+Node: Marking (LaTeX)96446
+Node: Marking (Texinfo)97388
+Node: Commenting98999
+Node: Indenting100324
+Node: Filling108018
+Node: Display113888
+Node: Font Locking116383
+Node: Fontification of macros118462
+Node: Fontification of quotes127978
+Node: Fontification of math129472
+Node: Verbatim content133140
+Node: Faces133914
+Node: Known problems134411
+Node: Folding135408
+Node: Outline146181
+Node: Narrowing147460
+Node: Prettifying148529
+Node: Processing149766
+Node: Commands151094
+Node: Starting a Command151650
+Node: Selecting a Command156666
+Node: Processor Options165785
+Node: Viewing176178
+Node: Starting Viewers176552
+Node: I/O Correlation182202
+Ref: I/O Correlation-Footnote-1187878
+Node: Debugging188128
+Node: Ignoring warnings190746
+Node: Error overview192805
+Node: Checking194713
+Node: Control196329
+Node: Cleaning198438
+Node: Documentation199797
+Node: Customization200512
+Node: Modes and Hooks201005
+Node: Multifile202893
+Node: Parsing Files207625
+Node: Internationalization212614
+Node: European213962
+Node: Japanese221441
+Node: Automatic226505
+Node: Automatic Global228996
+Node: Automatic Private230128
+Node: Automatic Local231464
+Node: Style Files232495
+Node: Simple Style233301
+Node: Adding Macros237022
+Node: Adding Environments246521
+Node: Adding Other251185
+Node: Hacking the Parser255785
+Node: Appendices259774
+Node: Copying this Manual260070
+Node: GNU Free Documentation License260953
+Node: Changes286073
+Node: Development340925
+Node: Mid-term Goals341571
+Node: Wishlist343539
+Node: Bugs349299
+Node: FAQ350379
+Node: Texinfo mode356099
+Node: Exploiting357233
+Node: Superseding358051
+Node: Mapping362282
+Node: Unbinding364117
+Node: Indices364938
+Node: Key Index365101
+Node: Function Index372630
+Node: Variable Index384608
+Node: Concept Index409749
+
+End Tag Table
+
+
+Local Variables:
+coding: utf-8
+End: